m 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 

Treasure  %oom 


GIFT  OF 

History  9,    1927-28 


{ 


THE 

TROOPER^S  MANUAL: 

OR, 

TACTICS 

FOR 
COMPILED,    ABRIDGED   AND   ARRANGED, 

BY 

Col.  j:  LUCIUS  DAVIS, 

GRADUATE    OP    THE    UNITED    8TATRS    MILITARY    ACADEMV, 

WEST    point;    formerly    an    OFFICKR    of    THE    UNITED 

BTATeKa^MY  ;    ^ND'-FOR,  MANY^YEA^S  COMMANDER 

AND   lkSTRUCTOR*'OF   VOLUNTEER '■CAV^RY. 


■  ■mM^ 


RICHMOND,   VA. 
PUBLISHED    BY    A.    MORRIS 

186L 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  tlic  year  iS'il. 

Bv  A.  MORRIS, 

In  the  Clerk's   Office   of  the  District  Court  of  the  Con- 
PBDBRATE  Statbs,  foMhc  Eastcm  District  of  Virginia. 


MACKARLANE   A    PBROUSSON.    PRIN'TBRfl. 


I'J 


PREFACE. 


!N^o  military  work  is  iu  more  demand  at  present 
tlian  a  cheap,  plain^  brief  compendium  of  Cavalry 
Tactics. 

All  books  of  this  description,  heretofore  pub- 
lished, are  too  large  and  costly  to  serve  as  manuals 
for  the  Trooper.  They  abound,  too,  in  matter  of  no 
interest,  at  least,  to  Mounted  Volunteers. 

As  a  general  rule,  what  have  the  latter  to  do 
with  the  tactics  oj  the  riding-house  f  or  the  drill 
of  Lancers,  Hussars,  Cuirassiers,  or  Carabiniers? 

The  revolver-manual  J  adopted  in  this  work,  is 
the  admirable  one  of  Capt.  Bell,  U.  S.  Cavalry. 
It  is  superseding  the  defective  one  given  in  every 
Cavalry  hand-book  which  has  preceded  this.  The 
demand  for  this  work  being  immediate,  the  Com- 
piler has  ventured  to  avail  himself  of  that  manual 
for  the  revolver,  without  having  had  time  or  oppor- 
tunity to  obtain  the  author's  permission. 

109785 


It  preface. 

The  Mounted  Rifle  drill  offered  is  the  authorized 
one  of  the  United  States  service  prepared  by  Capt. 
Maury  of  the  Mounted  Rifles,  under  the  orders 
of  the  War  Department. 

The  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War  establishes 
this  drill,  with  its  single  rank  formation  for  all 
mounted  troops,  the  double  rank  system  being  re- 
tained for  garrison  service  only. 

In  f;iet,  this  formation,  (the  single  rank,)  re- 
commended by  Capt.  McClellan  of  the  Military 
Commission  to  Europe,  and  approved  by  our  best 
Cavalry  commanders,  is  the  only  one  suited  to  ac- 
tual service  in  any  portion  of  the  American  Con- 
tinent. 

But  as  two  ranks  answer  for  garrison  service  in 
peace,  for  reviews,  parades,  and  manoeuvres  in  con- 
tracted limits,  both  the  single  and  the  two  rank 
drills  are  given  in  this  book — only  one,  viz.  the  two 
rank  formation,  being  found  in  other  works. 

The  originals  have  been  faithfully  copied,  ex- 
cept where  error  demanded  correction,  not  more 
than  fifty  pages  (including  notes,  remarks,  and 
Glossary)  having  been  introduced  by  the  Compiler, 
as  demanded  by  recent  improvements  in  arms  and 
otherwise. 

General  and  Field  Officers  and  Superintendents 
of  Riding  Schools  will  require  more  extended  trea- 


PREFACE.  V 

tises,  embracing  the  whole  subject  of  Equitation; 
ijut  the  Compiler  hopes  that  this  little  volume  pro- 
vides all  necessary  instruction  for  every  grade,  from. 
the  Trooper  to  the  Commander  of  the  Squadron. 

The  Compiler. 
Richmond,  Va.,  A2)rilj  1861, 


1* 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS, 


Cavalry  is  a  general  term,  embracing,  in  its 
modern  and  more  extended  sense,  all  classes  of 
mounted  soldiery.. 

Dragoons  -were  originally  armed  witli  muskets, 
and  were  trained  equally  for  Cavalry  and  Infantry 
service. 

In  the  United  States  service.  Cavalry  and  Dra- 
goons are  armed  and  drilled  alike,  the  distinction 
being  merely  nominal. 

Mounted  Rifles  differ  from  other  Cavalry  in 
arms',  manceuvres,  and  in  habitually  dismounting 
for  the  combat,  their  horses  being  chiefly  the  i»eans 
of  rapid  locomotion. 

All  American  Cavalry  should  be  well  trained  on 
foot  in  the  Light  Infantry  exercises;  should  carry 
a  light  rifle,  (as  well  as  sabre  and  pistol,)  and  use 
the  fire-arms  mostly  on  foot. 

For  actual  service,  the  regular  Cavalry  saddle 
and  equipments  are  necessary.     The  Mexican  sad- 


Vlll  INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 

die,  however,  is  generally  preferred  by  the  Mounted 
Rangers  of  the  Western  frontier. 

Fancy  hats,  with  plumes  of  ostrich  or  other  fea- 
thers, are  only  suitable  on  parades  and  reviews,  but, 
on  campaign,  they  arc  a  useless  incumbrance. 

A  conical  forage-cap,  with  water-proof  cover 
extending,  when  unrolled,  to  the  shoulders;  a 
water-proof  cape  reaching  from  the  neck  to  the 
hips;  one  close-bodied  coat,  one  round  jacket,  one 
over-coat,  and  two  pairs  of  pants,  (the  four  latter 
of  dark-blue  or  gray  cloth,)  together  with  under- 
garments and  short-top  boots,  constitute  the  proper 
apparel  ibr  all  mounted  troops. 

The  Cavalry  Tactics,  from  the  drill  of  the 
Trooper  to  that  of  the  Squadron,  both  inclusive, 
should  be  acquired  by  all  Cavalry  Corps.  The  pe- 
culiar organization  and  manoeuvres  of  the  Mounted 
llifles  will  be  confined  to  that  class  of  troops  ;  but 
they,  too,  should  be  instructed  in  the  general  prin- 
ciples, laid  down  in  the  following  pages,  for  all 
Cavalry  exercises,  adding  what  appertains  to  their 
own  branch  of  the  service. 

Volunteers,  who  are  generally  expert  horsemen, 
sometimes  enter  with  reluctance  into  the  minutiae 
of  mounting,  dismounting,  the  prescribed  manage- 
ment of  the  arms  and  legs,  and  the  elementary 
rules  of  equitation  ;  but  every  item  should  be  prac- 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  ix 

tised  in  detail  until  thoroughly  understood ;  as 
they  become  more  familiar  with  them,  they  will 
more  fully  appreciate  their  importance. 

A  troop-horse,  when  thorouiz;hly  trained,  can  be 
guided  by  the  arms  and  legs  alone,  thus  allowing 
the  trooper  the  use  of  both  hands,  if  necessary  in 
combat. 

The  following  rules  are  presented  substantially 
as  laid  down  in  the  prescribed  tactics,  the  Compiler 
having  no  authority  to  make  any  important  altera- 
tions in  the  authorized  text-books.. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


OPuSlRT    FIRST- 


^rill  of  t\t  Crcffpr. 


For  the  first  lessons,  it  is  best  to  charge  each  in- 
structor with  a  veri/  small  squad  of  recruits,  having 
between  tliem  intervals  of  one  yard. 

But  it  is  sometimes  necessary,  especially  with 
volunteers,  for  one  single  Instructor  to  take  charge 
of  a  platoon,  or  even  a  squadron.  In  this  case, 
they  may  he  arranged  in  one  rank,  (which  is  best) 
or  in  two  ranks  along  the  sides  of  a  square;  all 
facing  inwards  toward  the  Instructor,  who  will  exe- 
cute in  person  all  the  motions,  or  will  cause  them 
to  be  executed  by  a  well-drilled  trooper,  stationed 
in  the  centre. 

Having  acquired  thorou2;hly  the  motions  of 
mounting  and  dismounting,  the  whole  may  be  formed 
into  a  platoon  or  squadron,  according  to  numbers 
present.  When  two  ranks  are  used,  they  should 
be  six  yards  distant,  measured  from  head  to  tail. 


12  THE   TROOPEE. 

To  conduct  the  horses  to  the  drill  ground. 

The  trooper  conducts  his  horse  to  the  ground, 
the  reins  passed  over  the  neck,  and  their  extremity 
engaged  in  the  left  cloak-strap.*  He  holds  the 
reins  with  the  right  hand  at  six  inches  from  the 
mouth  of  the  horse,  the  nails  under,  the  hand  ele- 
vated and  firm,  to  prevent  the  horse  from  jumping. 

When  the  trooper  w  under  arms,  he  has  the  sabre 
hooked  up. 

The  carbine  is  passed  over  the  right  shoidder,  the 
left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

JIaoing  arrived  on  ike  ground,  the  sabre  is  un- 
hooked. 

Position  of  the  trooper  before  mounting. 

The  trooper  places  himself  on  the  left  side  of  the 
horse,  abreast  of  the  nether  jaw;  he  holds  the  reins 
with  the  right  hand  at  six  inches  from  the  mouth 
of  the  horse,  the  nails  downward. 

The  trooper  has  his  heels  upon  the  same  line  and 
as  near  together  as  his  conformation  will  permit, 
the  feet  at  little  less  than  a  right  angle,  and  equally 
turned  out;  the  knee  straight  without  being  stiff, 
the  body  perpendicular  upon  the  haunches,  and 
slightly  inclined  forward;  the  left  hand  hanging  at 
the  side,  the  palm  a  little  turned  out,  the  little 
finger  along  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons;  the  head 


*In  the  absence  of  nioak-straps,    any  other  mode  of 
altachiiig  ilic  veins  to  the  pummel  may  answer. 


THE   TROOPER.  13 

erect;  the  chin  drawn   in,  but  without  constraint; 
the  eyes  fixed  to  the  front. 

When  the  trooper  is  under  arms,  he  Jms  the  left 
handover  the  sabre. 

To  Mount  * 

The  instructor  commands: 

Prepare  to  mount. 
1  timej  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  prepare  to  mount,  Nos.  1 
and  3  of  each  rank  move  six  paces  to  the  front, 
steppinjij  off  with  the  left  foot,  keeping  opposite 
their  intervals,  and  reij;u1ating  by  the  right. 

Phicc  the  ri<z:ht  foot  three  inches  in  rear  of  the 
left;  make  a  face  and  a  half  to  the  right  on  both 
heels;  let  go  the  right  rein;  slip  the  right  hand 
along  the  left  rein;  take  two  steps,  stepping  off 
with  the  right  fuot,  and  face  to  the  left  upon  the 
point  of  the  left  foot,  the  right  side  towards  the 
flank  of  the  horse;  carry  back  the  right  heel  tlirce 
inches  in  rear  of  the  left;  the  right  hand  seizing 
the  end  of  the  reins  is  placed  upon  the  cantle  of 
the  saddle. 

2.  Place  a  third  of  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup, 
supporting  it  against  the  fore-arm  of  the  horse;  rest 
upon  the  point  of  the  right  foot,  and  seize  with  the 

*Tlic  trooper  being  alijined  with  the  tallest  on  the 
right,  the  orderly  ser^eaiif,  (or  senior  non-commissioned 
officer)  calls  the  roll  helbie  mounling. 

2 


14  THE    TROOPER. 

left  hand  over  the  reins  a  lock  of  the  inane  as  far 
forward  as  possible,  the  extremity  of  the  lock  paSwS- 
ing  out  of  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  little  finger. 

Mount. 

1  time^  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  mount,  spring  from  the 
right  foot,  holding  firmly  to  the  mane,  at  the  same 
time  pressing  upon  the  can  tie  to  prevent  the  saddle 
from  turning;  the  body  erect. 

2,  Pass  the  right  leg  stretched  over  the  croup  of 
the  horse,  without  touching  him;  sit  lightly  in  the 
saddle,  placing  at  the  same  time  tlie  right  hand, 
without  quitting  the  reins,  upon  the  riglit  holster, 
the  palm  of  the  hand  resting  upon  it,  the  fingers  on 
the  outside  of  it,  and  take  one  rein  of  the  snaffle  in 
each  hand.* 

(If  the  trooper  is  using  the  curb-bridle,  he  will 
pass  the  reins  of  it  in  the  left  hand  and  adjust 
them.) 

Place  the  right  foot  In  the  stirrup. 

Let  fall  the  carbine  by  the  side.f 

Position  of  tlie  bridle-hand. 

The  reins  with  their  slide  in  the  left  hand,  the 
little  finger  between  the  reins,  the  other  fingers  well 

^'The  reins  of  tlie  suafUc  are  thus  held  by  recruits 
and  beginners  in  equitation.  The  practised  horseman 
will  take  his  riding  reins  at  once  in  his  left  hand  on 
mouniin?:. 

fTlic  carbine  (or  rifle)  is  suspended  by  a  strap  over 
the  left  shoulder. 


THE   TROOPER.  15 

closed,  and  the  thumb  upon  the  second  joint  of  the 
jBrst  fingers ;  the  elbow  slightly  detached  from  the 
body,  the  hand  four  inches  above  the  pommel  of  the 
saddle,  the  finger  six  inches  from,  and  turned  to- 
wards the  body;  the  little  finger  a  little  nearer  the 
body  than  tlie  upper  part  of  the  wrist^  the  right 
hand  at  the  side. 

Lengtli  of  tlie  stirrups. 

Havtng  comineneed the  exercise,  the  instructorassures 
himself  that  the  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted. 

They  are  the  proper  length  if,  when  thetroo]ier  raises 
himself  on  ihe  stirrnps,  there  is  a  space  of  six  inches  be- 
tween the  fork  and  the  saddle. 

Position  of  the  foot  in  tlie  stirrup. 

The  stirrup  should  support  only  the  weight  of 
the  leg;  the  foot  ought  to  be  inserted  one-third  of 
its  length,  the  heel  lower  than  the  toe. 

The  stirrvj)  should  support  only  the  iccight  of  the  leg:  if 
the  trooper  bore  too  much  upon  the  stirrups,  his  seat 
woidd  be  ilerangetl,  as  well  as  the  position  of  the  legs 
and  the  justness  of  their  action  would  be  impaired. 

The  foot  ought  to  be  inserted  one-third  of  its  length:  if  the 
trooper  did  not  insert  the  foot  sufliciently  lar  in  the 
stirrup,  he  would  risk  losing  them,  particularly  during 
the  lively  gaits.  If  the  foot  were  inserted  too  far,  the 
legs  would  not  fall  natiu-ally. 

2Vie heel  lower  than  the  toe:  that  the  foot  may  keep  the 
stirrup  without  cffortand  without  stiffness;  thattlie  play 
of  the  joint  with  the  leg  may  remain  free,  and  that  the 
spur  being  further  removed  from  the  horse,  there  is  less 
danger  of  its  being  improperly  employed. 


16  THE   TROOPER. 

Form — Ranks. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  comiiiaTid,  wliich  is 
RANKS,  Nos.  1  mid  3  raise  the  wrist  (of  the  bridle 
hand),  and  hold  the  legs  close  to  the  body  of  the 
horse  to  keep  him  quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  enter  the 
intervals  ■without  jostling  aud  without  precipitation. 

The  rear  rank  being  formed,  closes  to  the  distance 
of  2  feet  from  the  front. 

Before  causing ilie  command  mount  tobe  executed,  the 
instructor  explains  in  detail  the  two  times  of  it,  and 
allows  bnta  .short  interval  between  the  firt^t  and  seconi 
part  of  ill  ibcoMimand.  been  vise,  were  the  trooper  to  remain 
a  lone?  time  on  tlie  stirrup,  the  lior.ses  would  become 
restive  and  move  out  of  their  proper  iilaces. 

The  instructor  will  explain  to  the  troopers,  that  in  car- 
rying the  right  hand  to  the  holster  before  placing  them, 
selves  ill  the  saddle,  they  will  be  able  to  do  so  lightly, 
and  will  not  run  the  risk  of  injuring  themselves  in  bes- 
tritliug  their  horses. 

The  instructor  causes  the  stirrups  tobe  crossed  upon 
the  neck,  the  IclY  stirrup  over  the  right.* 

The  position  of  the  trooper,  mounted. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  the  saddle, 
and  as  far  forward  as  possible  ] 

The  thighs  turned  upon  their  flat  side  without 
effort,  embracing  equally  the  horse,  and  stretched 
only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of  the  legs  ; 

A  supple  bend  of  the  knees; 

•This  is  usually  omitted  in  volunteer-cavalry  exercises. 


THE   TROOPER.  17 

The  legs  free  and  falling  naturally; 

The  point  of  the  feet  falling  in  like  manner;  (i. 
e.  when  not  in  the  stirrups.) 

The  loins  supported  without  stiffness; 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  at  ease,  free  and 
erect; 

The  shoulders  equally  thrown  back; 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally ; 

The  head  erect,  at  ease,  and  not  drawn  in  be- 
tween the  shoulders; 

One  rein  of  the  snaffle  in  each  hand,  the  fingers 
closed,  the  thumb  along  each  rein,  the  wrists  as 
high  as  the  elbow,  at  6  inches  from  each  other, 
the  fingers  turned  towards  each  other,  the  upper 
extremity  of  the  reins  leaving  the  hand  on  the  side 
of  the  thumb.* 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  the  saddle :  Serving 
as  a  base  to  the  position  of  the  trooper,  they  ouf?ht  to  be 
equally  charged  with  all  the  weight  of  the  body  to  assure 
its  steadiness. 

^nd  as  far  forward  as  possible :  In  order  that  the 
trooper  may  have  greater  facility  in  embracing  his  horse. 
and  conforming  to  all  his  movements. 

The  thighs  turned  upon  their  flat  side  without  effort, 
embracing  equally  the  horse:  The  more  the  thighs  adhere 
to  the  horse,  the  greater  is  the  solidity  of  the  trooper.  If 
they  did  not  embrace  the  horse  equally,  the  scat  of  the 
trooper  would  be  unfixed. 

jind  stretched  only  by  their  own  weight  and  that  of  the 
legs:  If  they  did  not  fall  naturally,  they  could  be  extend- 
ed only  by  an  effort,  which  would  cause  constraint. 

*NoTE.     This    paragraph,    referring  to    the    mode   o^ 
holding  the  snaffle  rein,  is  not  applicable  to  volunteer- 
cavalry  who  are  generally  expert  horsemen. 
2* 


18  THE   TROOPER. 

A  supple  bend  of  the  knees:  To  giv^  a  facility  in  carrying 
the  log?  iiK^re  or  less  to  the  rear,  witliout  deranging  the 
position  of  the  thiizhs. 

The  legs  free,  and  falling  oiatvrally,  the  point  of  the  feet 
falling  in  like  manner  :  Stiliiiess  in  ilie  legs  would  impair 
the  good  ellects  of  their  action. 

The  loins  supported  tcithout  stiffness  :  The  loins  should 
be  sustained,  to  give  the  trooper  grace  and  solidity. — 
Stifiness  vvoiild  ]nevcnt  his  accommodating  himself  to 
all  tlie  motions  of  the  horse. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  at  ease,  free  and  erect :  The 
body  can  preserve  its  erectness  only  by  suppleness  and 
ease. 

I'he  shoulders  equally  thrown  back:  Were  the  shonlders 
thrown  forward,  the  back  wonld  be  curved  and  the 
breast  contracted  ;  were  they  thrown  too  much  to  the 
rear,  the  loins  would  be  hollowed  and  the  action  of  the 
arms  constrained. 

The  arms  free  :  In  order  not  to  employ  more  force  than 
is  absolutely  necessary  ;  constrained  movements  produce 
uncertain  elfects. 

I'he  elbows  falling  naturally  :  That  they  may  contribute 
to  the  steadiness  of  the  seat,  and  communicate  stiffness 
neither  to  the  body  nor  fore-arms. 

The  head  erect :  If  the  head  were  not  erect,  the  body 
would  lean  towards  the  side  it  inclined  to. 

At  ease,  and  not  drawn  in  between  the  shoulders  :  To  be 
able  to  turn  it  witli  ease,  and  that  its  movements  maybe 
independent  of  those  of  the  body. 

The  use  of  the  reins. 

The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  liorse  for  the 
iiiov^ements  he  is  required  to  execute,  to  direct 
him,  and  to  stop  him.  Their  action  should  he 
progressive  and  in  accordance  "with  that  ot  the 
legs. 


THE   TROOPER.  19 

When  the  trooper  makes  use  .of  the  reins,  the 
arms  should  act  with  suppleness,  and  their  move- 
ments ought  to  extend  from  the  wrist  to  the 
shoulder. 


Tlie  use  of  the  legs. 

The  legs  serve  to  virge  the  horse  forward,  to 
support  him,  and  to  aid  him  in  turning  to  the 
right  and  to  the  left.  Whenever  the  trooper  wishes 
his  horse  to  move  forward,  he  should  close  the  legs 
by  degrees  behind  the  girths,  causing  their  effect 
to  correspond  xwith  the  sensibility  of  the  horse, 
taking  care  neither  to  open  nor  elevate  the  knees, 
of  which  the  bend  should  be  always  pliant.  The 
trooper  relaxes  the  legs  by  degrees,  as  he  closed 
them. 

The  effect  of  the  reins  and  legs  com- 
bined. 

By  elevating  a  little  the  left  wrist,  and  closing 
the  legs,  the  trooper  ^^  gathers  his  horse  ;'^  by  ele- 
vating again  the  wrist,  he  slackens  the  pace;  by 
repeating  this  movement  of  the  wrist,  he  stops 
the  horse,  or  "  reins  back."  The  troopers  ought  to 
elevate  the  wrists  without  curving  them,  at  the 
same  time  drawing  them  slightly  towards  the  body. 

By  opening  the  right  rein  and  closing  the  right 
leg,  the  trooper  turns  his  horse  to  the  right.  To 
open  the  right  rein,  the  wrist  is  carried,  without 


20  THE   TROOPER. 

turning  it,  more  •  or  less  to  the  riglit,  according  to 
the  sensibility  of  the  horse. 

By  opening  the  left  rein,  and  closing  the  left  leg, 
the  trooper  turns  his  horse  to  the  left.  To  open 
the  left  rein,  the  left  wrist  is  carried,  without  turn- 
ing it  more  or  less  to  the  left,  according  to  the  sen- 
sibility of  the  horse. 

By  lowering  slightly  the  wrist,  the  horse  is  at 
liberty  to  move  forward;  the  closing  the  legs  de- 
termines the  movement.* 

To  marcli. 

The. instructor  commands: 

1,  Squad  (or  company ^  qv 2^lOrtooii)  forward. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  squad  forward^  elevate  slightly 
the  wrists,  and  close  the  legs,  in  order  to  "  gather 
the  horse." 

At  the  command  maivCH,  lower  slightly  the 
wrists,  and  close  the  legs  more  or  less,  according 
to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse.  The  horse  having 
obeyed,  replace    the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

If  tho  trooper  did  not  gather  his  horse  at  the  prepara- 
tory command,  'the  execution  of  the  second  command 
Avouhl  he  too  abrupt  or  too  slow. 

If  the  trooper,  at  the  command  of  execution,  did  not 
commence  by  lowering  the  wrist,  the  horse  would  not 
have  the  liberty  necessary  to  enable  him  to  move  forward. 

If  the  trooper  did  not  close  equally  the  legs,  the  horse 
would  not  move  directly  to  the  front;  and  if  he  did  not 

*The  wrist  of  the  bridle  hand  is  of  course  meant. 


THE   TROOPER.  21 

close  them  progressively,  the  horse  would  not  obey  with- 
out irregularity. 

To  halt. 

After  some  steps,  tlie  instrticlor  commands: 

1.  Squad.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  squod,  the  trooper  gathers  his 
horse,  without  slaekening  his  pace. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  braces  him- 
self in  the  saddle;  elevate  the  wrists  at  the  same 
time  by  degrees,  and  close  the  legs  in  order  to 
prevent  the  horse  from  receding.  1'he  horse  hav- 
ing obeyed^  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  i>y  de- 
grees. 

When  the  horse  docs  not  obey,  cause  him  to  feel 
successively  the  effect  of  each  rein,  according  to  his 
sensibility. 

If'the  trooper  pressed  tliehorse  with  the  thighs  or  legs 
it  would  be  difficult  for  hitn  to  stop. 

If  lie  did  not  use  the  two  reins  equally,  and  hold  the 
legs  equally  near,  the  horse  would  stop  in  a  diagonal 
position. 

Jf  tlie  trooper  used  the  reins  with  too  much  force  and 
precipitation,  the  horse  would  stop  suddenly  and  fall 
back. 

To  turn  to  the  right,  and  to  the  left.* 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.   Sqvad  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.') 
.2.  March.  3.  Halt. 

*  In  practising  the  turnings,  let  intervals  be  taken  of 
3  yards,  from  boot  to  boot. 


22  THE   TUOorER. 

At  the  command,  squad  to  the  ricjlit,  gather  the 
horse. 

At  the  cniiiniand  March,  open  the  right  rein, 
and  close  })n>i^ressively  the  right  leg.  In  order  not 
to  turn  the  horse  too  short,  perform  the  movement 
upon  a  quarter  of  a  circle  of  o  paces. '^"  The  move- 
ment being  almost  completed,  diminisli  the  effect 
of  the  rein  and  the  light  leg,  supporting  the  horse 
at  the  same  time  with  the  left  rein  and  leg  to  termi- 
nate the  movement. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  slightly  the 
wrists,  and  hold  the  legs  near,  in  order  to  keep  the 
horse  .'•traight  in  the  new  direction;  replace  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

Iftlie  trooper  did  not.  describe  the  nrc  ofthcpre- 
scribetl  circle,  the  inovement  would  be  too  much  shor- 
tened. 

If  the  trooper,  towards  the  end  of  the  movement,  did 
not  diminish  the  ertect  of  the  right  rein  and  the  right  leg. 
by  means  of  the  left  rein  and  left  leg,  the  horse  would 
])«rforni  more-  iliun  :l  mm  to  the  right. 

'I'o  tui'ii-abuut  to  tlie  riglit  and  to  the 

left. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  S(juatl  to  the  rijht-ahout  (or  l<>  ihf  Ir/tahout) 

2.  INlAiif'iL  il.  llAi/r. 

Thi^  luuvcuiciiL  is  executed  on  the  })rinciples 
prescribed   for  the   turn  to  the  ri(jht  or   to  the  h'/t, 

^*That  i.=,  a  circulai:  path  or  track  3  yards  in  Icngtli. 


THE   TROOPER.  23 

with  this  difference,  that  the  horse  should  pass  over 
a  semi-circle  of  6  paces,  and  face  to  the  rear. 

In  Older  to  make  the  trooper  comprehend  better  the 
movements  detailed,  the  instructor  places  himself  at  the 
shoulder  of  the  horse,  and  describes  each  movement  on 
foot,  in  marking  ofl"  the  arc  of  ilie  prescribed  circle. 

To  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  and 
to  the  left. 

The  instructor  commands. 

1.  jSquad  right  ohiiqne,  (or  left  oblique.') 

2.  March.  3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  Squad  right  oblique,  gather  the 
horse. 

At  the  command  March,  open  a  little  the  right 
rein,  and  close  slightly  the  right  leg,  in  order  to 
make  the  horse  execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right; 
cause  the  horse  to  feel,  almost  at  the  same  time, 
the  eifect  of  the  left  rein  and  the  left  leg,  to  termi- 
nate the  movement  without  increasing  the  degree  of 
obliquity. 

At  the  command  Halt,  elevate  slightly  the 
wrists  and  close  the  legs,  to  keep  the  direction  of 
the  quarter-turn  to  the  right ;  replace  the  wrists 
and  legs  by  degrees. 

The  instructor  commands  halt  almost  imme- 
diately after  the  command  march;  he  does  not 
require  great  exactness  in  this  movement,  the  ob- 
ject of  which  is,  to  give  the  trooper  the  first  idea 
of  the  oblique  direction. 


24  THE  TROOPED. 

The  itinvements  detailed,  after  having  been  executed 
to  the  right,  are  executed  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  priiici|)les,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  rcin-l)ack,  and  to  cease  rein-back. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Sji^'^ff^ — Backwards.  3.    Squad. 

2.  March.  4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  Squad  bacJcwards,  gather  the 
horse. 

At  the  command  march,  keep  a  firm  seat,  ele- 
vate the  wrists,  and  clo.se  the  le;^s.  As  soon  as  the 
hor.-e  obeys,  low.n'  and  « levate  successively  the 
"wrist-,  which  is  called  yieldliKj  and  chi'.ckinij.  If 
the  h'H'se  throws  the  haunches  to  the  right,  close 
the  ri^ht  leg;  if  he  throws  them  to  the  left,  close 
the  left  leg.  If  these  means  are  not  sufficient  to 
replace  the  horse  in  his  proper  position,  open  the 
rein  on  the  side  towards  which  the  horse  throws 
his  hauiiclies,  cau^inii:  him  to  feel,  at  the  same  time, 
slightly,  the  effect  of  the  opposite  rein. 

At  the  command  squad,  the  trooper  prepares  to 
stop. 

At  the  command  halt,  lower  the  wrists  and  close 
the  legs.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the 
wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

If  tho  trooper  did  not  keep  a  firm  seat,  lie  woiihl  in- 
cline reward,  from  the  eiYeci  of  the  movement  of  the 
horse. 

If,  instead  of  lowering  and  eh'vating  the  wrists  alter- 
nately, the    trooper  were  to  piolong   tlie  etfect  of  the 


THE   TROOPER.  26 

hands,  the  horse  wouhl  step  Iiack  suddenly,  and  would 
cross  or  throw  himself  upon  his  haunches. 

To  dismount. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount. 
1  timej  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  prepare  to  dismount, 
Nos.  1  and  3  of  the  f'rDnt  rank  move  forward  6 
paces,  Nos.  2  and  4  of  the  rear  rank  rein-back  4 
paces,  and  keep  themselves  opposite  their  intervals. 
The  troopers  of  each  rank  dress  by  the  right. 

Seize  the  carbine  with  the  right  hand,  at  the 
lower  band  ;  pass  it  over  the  right  sliouldcr  diago- 
nally, the  muzzle  in  the  air,  so  that  it  cannot  fall 
back. 

Seize  the  reins  of  the  snaffle  (or  of  the  curh- 
hridie)  above  and  near  the  left  thumb  with  the 
right  hand,  the  nails  downward,  and  place  this 
hand  upon  the  right  holster.  Disengage  the  right 
foot  from  the  stirrup,  and  seize  with  the  left  hand 
a  lock  of  the  mane  over  the  reins. 

Dismount. 

1  timef  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  command  dismount,  rise  upon  the 
left  stirrup ;  pass  the  right  leg  extended  over  the 
croup  of  the  horse,  without  touching  him,  and 
bring  the  right  thigh  near  to  the  left,  the  body 
well  sustained; -place  at  the  same  time  the  right 
3 


26  THE    TROOPER. 

hand  upon  the  cantlc  of  the  saddle,  slipping  it 
along  tlio  reins  without  letting  them  go;  descend 
lightly  to  the  ground,  the  body  erect,  the  heels 
upon  the  same  line.  Let  go  the  mane  with  the  left 
hand ;  engage  the  extremity  of  the  reins  in  the 
left  cloak-strap  with  the  right  hand,  which  then 
seizes  the  left  rein. 

2.  Make  a  face  and  2  steps  to  the  left,  stepping 
off  with  the  left  foot;  slip  the  right  hand  alongthe 
left  rein,  seize  with  the  same  hand  both  reins  at  6 
inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  hor.'e,  thcnaila  dew-a- 
ward, and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper  before 
mounting. 

Form — Ranks. 

• 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  ranks, 
Nos.  1  and  3  of  each  rank  elevate  slightly  the  right 
hand  to  keep  the  horse  quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  return 
to  their  intervals  gently. 

To  file  oif. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1 .  Bi/  tJir.  right  (or  h?/  the  left) — FiLE  OFF. 

2.  March, 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
FILE  OFF,  hook  up  thc  sabrc  ;  use  both  hands  to 
unhook  the  curb  and  unbuckle  the  nose-band ;  re- 
take the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace  the 
left  hand  at  the  side. 

At  the  command  march,  the"  trooper  of  the 
right,  in  each  rank,  steps  off  with  the  left  foot, 


THE   TROOPER.  27 

leading  his  horse  to  the  front ;  he  takes  4  steps, 
turns  to  the  right,  and  marches  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, hokling  at  the  same  time  the  hand  high  and 
firm  to  prevent  the  horse  from  jumping.  Each 
trooper  in  each  rank  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  when  the  one  who  precedes  him 
has  moved  4  paces  to  the  front. 

To  leap  to  the  ground ;  the  trooper,  holding 
the  reins  of  the  snaffle  as  prescribed,  seizes  with 
the  left  hand  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  fingers  well 
closed  ;  places  the  right  hand  upon  (he  pommel,  raises 
himself  upon  the  wrists,  brings  the  right  thigh  to 
the  side  of  the  left,  remains  an  instant  in  this  posi- 
tion, and  descends  lightly  to  the  ground. 

To  hap  0)1  the  horse ;  the  trooper  seizes  the 
mane  with  the  left  hand,  places  the  right  hand 
which  holds  the  reins  upon  the  pommel  of  the  sad- 
dle, springs  lively,  raising  himself  upon  the  two 
wrists,  remains  an  instant  in  this  position,  and 
places  himself  lightly  in  tne  saddle. 

The  instructor  sometimes  gives  the  coinniand  to  rest, 
in  marching,  in  order  to  cahn  iho  horses  after  a  quick 
pace,  tmd  to  relieve  the  troopers  who  may  become  fa- 
tigued. During  tlie  rest  in  marching,  the  trooj)ers  relax 
themselves  a  little;  but  without  changing  the  pace  and 
without  losing  their  distance.  The  conductors  alvvays 
regulate  the  march. 

Being  halted,  to  commence  the  move  at 
a  trot. 

The  commands  are  : 

1.  Column  /or ward. 

2.  Trot.  3.  March. 


28  THE   TROOPER. 

At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  coniinarid  MARCH,  lower  the  wrists  and 
close  the  legs  progressively ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

Marching  at  a  trot,  to  lialt. 

The  troopers  marching  at  a  trot,  and  in  column,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.   Column.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  column^  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  the  wrists  by 
degrees,  until  the  horse  stops ;  and  hold  the  legs 
always  near,  to  keep  him  straight  and  to  prevent 
his  stepping  back.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  re- 
place the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

The  instructor  requires  all  the  troopers  to  set  off  freely 
at  the  trot,  at  the  command  march,  and  to  slop  all  to- 
gether, without  jostling,  at  the  command  halt. 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  trot-out, 
and  from  the  trot-out  to  the  trot. 

The  troopers  marching  at  the  trot,  and  in  column,  the 
iiistructor  commands: 

Trot-out. 

At  this  command,  lower  a  little  the  wrists  and 
close  the  legs  progressively ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 


THE   TROOPER.  29 

The  gate  being  lengthened  to  a  suitable  degree,  the  in- 
structors see  that  the  troopers  keep  their  horses   up  to  it. 

He  pays  particular  attention  to  the  position  of  the 
troopers.  He  reminds  them  that  it  is  in  holding  the  body 
erect,  having  a  light  hand,  the  loins  supple,  and  in 
allowing  the  thighs  and  legs  to  fall  naturally,  they  can 
diminish  the  efiect  of  the  reaction  of  the  horse,  and  con- 
form more  readily  to  all  his  motions. 

To  prevent  the  horses  from  over-reaching,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  raise  the  wrists  and  close  more  or  less  the   legs. 

To  passage  from  the  trot-out  to  the  trot^  the  instructor 
commands : 

Slow  trot. 

At  this  command,  elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees 
and  close  the  legs,  to  prevent  the  horse  from  taking 
the  walk ;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

To  pass   from   tlie  trot  to  the  gallop. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  gallop,  gather  the  horse  and 
keep  him  perfectly  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  carry  the  hand  slightly 
forward  and  to  the  left,  to  enable  the  right  shoul- 
der to  move  in  advance  of  the  left,  and  close  the 
legs  behind  the  girths  in  order  to  urge  the  horse 
forward,  causing  him  to  feel  lightly  the  efiect  of 
the  left  leg.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  hold  a 
light  hand  and  the  legs  near,  to  keep  him  at  his 
gait. 

3* 


30  THE   TROOPER. 

The  instructor  requires  tlie  troopers  to  be  perfectly 
cahn,  to  conduct  their  horses  with  inildness,  and  particu-' 
larly  to  preserve  a  light  hand  that  the  gallop  may  be  free 
and  regular. 


To  passage  to  tlie  riglit   or  to  the   left. 


The  commands  are : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  pass.  3.   Squad. 

2.  MARCH.  4.    HALT. 

At  the  command  right  pas!^,  bear  the  shoulders 
of  the  horse  to  the  right,  opening  a  little  the  right 
rein,  and  closing  the  right  leg.  , 

This  movement  is  only  preparatory  ;  it  indicates 
to  the  trooper  that  the  shonlders  of  his  horse  should 
always  cotnmence  the  march,  and  precede  the  move- 
ment of  the  haunches. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  open  the  right  rein  to 
incline  the  horse  to  the  right,  closing  at  the  same 
time  the  left  leg  that  the  haunches  may  follow, 
without  leaning  the  body  to  the  left;  make  use  of 
the  left  rein  and  the  right  leg  to  support  the  horse 
and  moderate  his  movement. 

At  the  command  halt,  cause  to  cease  insensibly 
the  effect  of  the  right  rein  and  the  left  leg,  em- 
ploying the  opposite  rein  and  leg ;  straighten  the 
horse  and  replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

ToY)aS5age  to  the  left,  and  to  halt,  employ  the  same 
principles  and  inverse  means. 


THE   TROOPER.  31 

The  principal  movements  of  tlie  bridle- 
hand. 

By  raising  slightly  the  hand  and  drawing  it  in 
towards  the  body,  the  trooper  gathers  his  horse ; 
by  raising  it  still  more,  the  gait  is  made  slower- 
By  increasing  the  effect  of  the  hand,  the  horse  is 
stopped  ;  ifincreased  still  more,  the  horse  is  reined 
back. 

By  lowering  slightly  the  hand,  the  horse  is  at 
liberty  to  move  forward. 

By  carrying  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right, 
the  horse  is  turned  to  the  right. 

By  carrying  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  left,  the 
horse  is  turned  to  the  left. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  the  bridle-hand  re- 
sumes its  original  position. 

In  all  the  movements  of  the  hand,  the  arm  should 
act  freely,  without  communicating  constraint  to  the 
shoulder  or  body;  the  effect  of  the  curb  being  more 
powerful  than  that  of  the  snaffle,  it  should  be  used 
progressively,  particularly  9k  stopping  and  reining 
back. 

To  gather  the  horse. 

Elevate  slightly  the  hand,  drawing  it  at  the  same 
time  towards  the  body,  and  close  the  legs. 

To   march. 

Lower  slightly  the  hand,  the  wrist  always  oppo- 
site the  middle  of  the  body,  and  close  the  legs  pro- 


32  THE   TROOPER. 

gressively.     As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the 
hand  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  halt. 

The  trooper  braces  himself  in  the  saddle ;  ele- 
vate the  hand  by  degrees,  drawing  it  towards  the 
body,  and  close  the  legs  to  keep  the  horse  straight, 
and  prevent  hiui  from  stepping  back.  As  soon  as 
the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  hand  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

To  turn  to  the  right. 

Carry  the  hand  forward  and  to  the  right,  accord- 
ing to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse ;  close  the  right 
leg,  the  left  leg  held  near  to  sustain  him.  The 
movement  being  nearly  finished,  replace  the  hand 
and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

To  turn  to  the  left. 

Carry  the  hand  for\lard  and  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse ;  close  the  left  leg, 
the  right  leg  held  near  to  sustain  him.  The  move- 
ment being  nearly  finished,  replace  the  hand  and 
legs  by  degrees. 

To  turn-about  to  the  right  and  to  the 

left. 

The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  a 
turn  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  observing  to  pass 
over  a  semi-circle. 


THE   TROOPER„  So 

To  make  a  quarter-turn  to  tlie  riglit,  and 
to  the  left. 

The  same  principles  as  prescribed  to  execute  a 
turn  to  the  rii;ht,  or  to  the  left,  observing  that  the 
movement  of  the  hand  does  not  require  the  horse 
to  do  more  than  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right, 
or  to  the  left. 

To  rein  Lack,  and  to  cease  reining  back. 

The  same  principles  as  prescribed  for  the  halt, 
observing,  as  soon  as  the  horse  obejs,  to  lower  and 
raise  the  hand  alternately,  that  the  movement  may 
be  regular. 

To  cease  reining  back,  relax  the  effect  of  the 
hand  and  close  the  legs;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys, 
replace  the  hand  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

Of  the  spur. 

If  the  horse  does  not  obey  the  legs,  it  is  necessary 
to  employ  the  spur. 

It  is  only  necessary  to  use  it  occasionally,  but 
always  vigorously,  and  at  the*moment  the  horse 
commits  the  fault. 

In  order  to  use  the  spurs,  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
steady  the  body,  the  waist  and  the  wrists;  to  cling 
to  the  horse  with  the  thighs  and  the  calves  of  the 
legs ;  turn  the  point  of  the  feet  a  little  out ;  lower 
a  little  the  wrists ;  press  the  spurs  close  behind  the 


34  THE   TROOPER. 

girths,  without  moving  the  body,  and  let  thera  re- 
main there  until  the  horse  obeys ;  replace  then  the 
wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

When  tlie  troopers  employ  the  spur,  the  instructor 
observes  that  they  do  not  bear  too  much  upon  the  reins, 
which  would  counteract  the  etTect  of  the  spur.  He  also 
observes  that  the  troopers  do  not  use  the  spur  unneces- 
sarily. 

Preparation  for  the  sabre  exercise. 

The  instructor  causes  the  sabre  exercise  to  be 
executed  at  a  halt;  for  this  purpose  he  opens  the 
ranks,  and  commands : 

1.  By  the  left  (ovhy  tlieritjlit) — o^^en files. 

2.  March. 

3.  Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  trooper  of 
each  rank  moves  forward  6  paces ;  the  one  on  the 
left  of  each  rank  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  for- 
ward ;  he  is  followed  by  all  the  other  troopers  of 
his  rank,  who  execute  the  same  movement  as  soon 
as  they  have  the  necessary  space  to  put  themselves 
in  file  at  their  proper  distances.  The  second 
trooper  from  the  right  of  each  rank,  after  having 
marched  3  paces,  turns  and  dresses  to  the  right ; 
each  of  the  other  troopers  look  occasionally  to  the 
rear,  and  perform  successively  the  same  movement 
when  at  three  paces  from  the  one  who  follows  him, 
and  dresses  upon  those  already  formed  :  the  troopers 


THE    TROOPER.  35 

of  the   rear  rank  place  themselves  exactly  behind 
their  file-leader. 

After  the  command  ^fARCH.  the  inptnictor  moves  to  the 
rijfht  of  llie  front  rank,  and  when  the  second  trooper  from 
the  right  has  turned  to  the  front,  he  commands  :  Right — 
Dress.  After  liaving  rectified  tlie  alignment  and  the 
distances  in  the  two  ranks,  he  commands  :  Front. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  form  the  platoon, 
he  commands  : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  lef{) — done  files. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  trooper  of 
each  rank  moves  forward  6  paces;  all  the  other 
troopers  execute  a  turn  to  the  right  and  move  for- 
ward. 

Each  trooper,  on  arriving  within  2  paces  of  the 
place  he  is  to  occupy  in  line,  turns  to  the  left,  and 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  troopers  already 
formed,  and  dresses  to  the  right. 

The  instructor  closes  the  ranks  as  soon  as  they 
are  formed. 

The  sabre  manual. 

-Draw — Sabre. 

2   times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
DRAW,  incline  slightly  the  head  to  the  left,  carry 
the  right  hand  above  the  reins,  engage  the  wrist  in 
the   sword-knot;  seize^the  gripe,    disengage    the 


36  THE   TROOPER. 

blade  six  inches  from  the  scabbard;  and  turn  the 
head  to  tlie  front. 

2.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
SABRE,  draw  quickly  the  sabre,  raising  the  arm  to 
its  full  length;  hold  the  sabre  in  this  position  an 
instant,  then  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the 
back  of  the  blade  supported  against  the  hollow  of 
the  shoulder,  the  wrist  upon  the  top  of  the  thigh, 
the  little  finger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 

Present — S  A  bre  . 

1  time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre, 
carry  the  sabreforward,  the  thumb  opposite  to  and 
f»  inches  from  the  neck,  the  blade  perpendicular, 
the  edge  to  the  left,  the  thumb  along  the  right  side 
of  the  gripe,  the  little  finger  joined  to  the  other 
three. 

Carry — Sabre. 

1  tvtne. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre, 
replace  the  sabre,  the  back  of  the  blade  supported 
against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  upon 
the  upper  part  of  the  thigh,  the  little  finger  outside 
of  the  gripe. 

Return — Sabre. 

2.  times. 

1.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
RETliRN,  execute  the  movement  ofpreacnt  sabre. 

2.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 


THE   TROOPER.  37 

SABRE,  carry  the  wrist  opposite  to  and  6  inches 
from  the  left  shoulder,  lower  tlie  blade^  passing  it 
near  the  left  arm,  the  point  to  the  rear;  incline  the 
head  slightly  to  the  left,  and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the 
mouth  of  the  scabbarb ;  return  the  blade,  disengage 
the  wrist  from  the  sword-knot,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front,  and  adjust  the  reins. 

Inspection  (o/) — Sabre. 

1  time,  7  motions. 

1 .  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
SABRE,  execute  the  first  time  of  draiv  sabre. 

2.  Execute  the  second  time  of  draw  sahre. 
8.  Present  the  sabre. 

4.  Turn  in  the  wrist,  in  order  to  show  the  other 
side  of  the  blade. 

5.  Carry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder. 

6.  Execute  the  first  time  of  return  sahre. 

7.  Execute  the  second  time  of  return  sahre. 

Manual  of  arms,  in  marcliing. 

The  troopers  are  required  to  draw  sabre,  and  to  rfh'rn 
sabre,  while  marching  in  cohimn  at  a  walk. 

The  instructor  observes  that  neither  the  seat,  nor  the 
position  of  the  bridle  hand  is  deranged.  He  also  requires 
the  troopers  to  keep  their  legs  near,  in  order  to  prevent 
tlie  horses  from  slackening  tliegait.  When  the  troopers 
have  the  sabre  tbawn.  the  instructor  observes  that  they 
do  not  throw  back  the  right  shouUler. 

As  tlio  troopers  become  more  skilful,  they  are  rfquirol 
to  draw  sabre,  in  marching  first  at.  the  trot,  and  then  at 
the  gallop.     They  also  take  the  position  of  the  first  motion 

4 


38  THE   TROOPER. 

of  in  tierce  point,  and  front  cut,  in  marching  at  the   differ- 
ent gaits. 

The  troopers  are  taught  to  take  the  position  of  the 
sabre  for  the  charge,  as  front  rank  and  as  rear  rank.  For 
this  purpose  the  instructor  commands : 

As  front  rank — Kaise  sabre. 

1  time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command^  which  is  sabre, 
take  the  position  of  in  tierce  j^oint. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  sabre  to  be  carried,  and 
commands  : 

As  rear  rank — Raise  sabre. 

1   time. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre, 
take  the  position  of  the  first  motion  of  front  cut. 

These  movements  are  executed  successively  at  the 
different  gaits. 

The  sabres  are  returned  in  marching  at  a  walk ;  for  tliis 
purpose  the  troopers  are  directed  to  support  the  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  left  arm.  until  the  point  has  entered 
the  scabbard. 

The  troopers  are  exercised,  sabres  drawn,  in  turning  to 
the  right  and  to  the  left  at  the  i?-of  and  at  the  gallop,  and  to 
the  right-about,  and  left-about,  at  the  trot  only. 

Sabre  exercise  at  all  gaits. 

The  troopers  execute  progressively,  at  the  different 
gaits,  the  exercise  of  the  sabre,  taking  care  to  jn-eserve 
between  each  other  the  distance  of  3  yards. 


i 


'iHE    TROOPER.  39 

Let  the  other  motions  of  tliis  exercise  be  first  taught  to 
the  troopers  dismoUNTKD. 

Preparatory  to  all  cuts  and  thrusts,  the  commander  or 
instructor  opens  Viis  ranks  and  then  orders, 

1.  B)j  tlicJift  (or  A//  lie  right) — Open  files. 

2.  March. 

3.  Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  last  jmrt  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
OPEN  FILES,  all  face  to  the  left  except  the  first  file. 

At  the  command  march,  the  men  step  off  to- 
gether. The  second  man  from  the  right,  after 
having  marched,  for  the  sahre  exercise  6  paces, 
halts,  fronts  by  a  right  face,  and  dresses  on  the 
right  file  who  has  not  moved.  The  others  march 
on,  and  each  one  glancing  over  his  right  shoulder, 
halts  in  succession,  and  fronts  when  he  has  arrived 
at  his  place.  The  rear  rank  men  regula+e  them- 
selves by  their  file-leaders,  and  rematti  exactly 
behind  them. 

When  the  third  man  from  the  right  has  fronted,  the 
instructor  dresses  the  front  rank  ;  the  assistant  instructor 
dresses    the    rear    rank,  and    the  instructor  commands 

FRONT. 

Wlien  the  instructor  Mnshes  to  form  the  platoon,  he 
commands  : 

1.  To  the  right  (or  to  the  left) — Close  FILE.?. 

2.  March. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
CLOSE  ilLES,  the  men  all  face  to  the  right  (or  hft), 
except  the  file  on  which  they  close. 


40  THE   TROOPER. 

At  the  command  march,  they  step  oflF  together, 
and  each  one  fronts  in  succession  by  a  right  face 
(or  left  face),  when  he  has  closed  up  to  the  man 
who  precedes  him. 

After  the  ranks  are  formed,  the  instructor  closes  and 
dresses  them. 

At  first  the  motions  ave  executed  in  detail  by  the  num- 
bers ;  but  when  the  troopers  execute  all  the  motions  M'^ith 
regularity,  the  instructor  requires  each  cut  to  be  given 
without  decomposing  it ;  the  last  syllable  of  a  command 
is  the  signal  for  the  quick  execution  of  it.  All  the  cuts 
are  then  terminated  by  a  half-moulinet,  which  brings 
back  to  the  position  of  guard. 

The  objects  of  the  moulinet  is  to  render  the  joints  of  the 
arm  and  wrists  supple,  and  as  it  adds  to  the  confidence  of 
the  men  when  isolated,  by  increasing  their  dexterity, 
they  should  first  be  exercised  at  it,  as  a  preparation  for 
the  other  motions. 

Each  lesson  is  therefore  commenced  and  ended  with 
moulinets.  executed  with  a  quickness  proportioned  to  the 
progress  of  the  troopers.  The  instructor  pays  particular 
attention  that  the  men  do  not  employ  a  degree  of  force  in 
the  sabre  exercise,  which  not  only  is  less  necessary  than 
skill  and  supi)leness,  but  which  is  even  prejudicial.  He 
observes,  also,  that  they  do  not  lean  to  one  side,  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  lose  the  seat  when  mounted  ;  he  requires 
more  especially,  in  the  motions  of  the  sabre  to  the  rear, 
that  the  blade  shall  not  fall  too  near  the  body,  for  fear 
of  wounding  the  horse.  In  describing  a  circle,  the  flat  of 
the  blade  should  be  to  the  side  and  the  edge  to  the  front, 
and  it  should  be  so  directed  as  not  to  touch  either  the 
horse's  head,  or  his  haunches,  or  the  knees  of  the  rider. 

Thrusts  should  always  be  used  in  preference,  as  they 
require  less  force,  and  their  result  is  more  prompt,  sure, 
and  decisive.  They  should  be  directed  quickly  home  to 
the  body  of  the  adversary,  the  sabre  being  held  with  the 
full  grasp,  the  thumb  pressing  against  the  guard  in  the 
direction  of  the  blade. 


THE   TEOOPER.  41 

The  parries  against  the  lance  are  the  same  as  agiiintt 
the  point. 

The  instructor  explains  what  is  meant  by  right  and 
left  side  of  the  gripe;  hy  tierce  and  by  quarte. 

The  right  side  of  the  gripe  is  tlie  side  opposite  to  tlie 
guard. 

The  left  side  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  next  to  the  guard. 

Tierce  is  tlie  position  in  which  the  edgeof  the  blade  is 
turned  to  the  right,  the  nails  downwards. 

Quarte  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade 
is  turned  to  the  left,  the  nails  upwards. 

To  rest,  the  instructor  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed. 
In  this  case,  he  causes  the  sabre  to  be  returned. 

Sabre  exercise. 

The  troopers  being  placed  as  prescribed,  tlie  instructor 
orders  the  sabres  to  be  drawn. 

He  commands: 

Guard. 

1    time. 

At  the  command  guard,  carry  the  right  foot  2 
feet  from  the  left,  the  heels  on  the  same  fine;  place 
the  left  hand  closed,  6  inches  from  the  body,  and  as 
high  as  the  elbow,  the  fingers  towards  the  body,  the 
little  finger  nearer  than  the  thumb  (position  :of  the 
Iridic  hand);  at  the  same  time,  place  the  right 
hand  in  tierce  at  the  height  of,  and  8  inches  from, 
the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of 
the  gripe,  the  little  finger  by  the  side  of  the  others, 
the  point  of  the  sabre  incHncd  to  the  left,  and  2 
feet  higher  than  the  hand. 
4* 


42  THE   TROOPER- 

Left — Moulin  ET. 
1  tinic^  2  motions. 

1,  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
3I0ULINET,  extend  the  right  arm  to  the  front,  to  its 
full  length,  the  hand  in  tierce  and  as  high  as  the 
eyes. 

2.  Lower  the  blade  in  rear  of  the  left  elbow; 
graze  the  horse's  neck  quickly,  describing  a  circle 
from  rear  to  front,  and  return  to  the  position  of 
guard. 

Riglit — MOULINET. 

1  timCj  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
MOULINET,  extend  the  right  arm  to  the  front  to  its 
full  length,  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  as  high  as  the 
eyes. 

2.  Lower  the  blade  in  rear  of  the  right  elbow  ; 
graze  the  horse's  neck  quickly,  describing  a  circle 
from  rear  to  front,  and  return  to  the  position  of 
guard. 

To  execute  the  moulinet  without  stopping,  if  the  in- 
structor wishes  to  begin  by  the  leil,  he  commands  : 

Left  and  right — Moulinet. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

If  he  wishes  to  begin  by  the  right,  he  commands  : 

Right  and  left — Moulinet. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

At  either  of  these  commands,  the  troopers,  com- 
mencing from  the  position  of  guard,  execute  alter- 


THE   TROOPER.  43 

nately  what  is  laid  down^  without  stopping  at  any 
motion. 

Rear — Moulinet. 
1  time  J  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command  which  is 
MOULINET.  raise  the  arm  to  the  right  and  rear  to 
its  full  extent,  the  point  of  the  sabre  upwards,  the 
edge  to  the  right,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  the  body  slightly  turned  to  the  right, 

2.  Describe  a  circle  in  rear  from  left  to  right,  the 
hand  as  far  as  possible  from  the  body,  and  return  to 
the  position  of  guard. 

When  the  troopers  execute  the  mouliuets  well,  the  in- 
structor requires  them  to  execute  several  in  succession, 
until  the  command  guard. 

In  tierce — Point. 

1  titnej  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  raise  the  hand  in  tierce  as  high  as  the  eyes, 
throw  back  the  right  shoulder,  carrying  the  elbow 
to  the  rear,  the  point  of  the  sabre  to  the  front,  the 
edge  upwards. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Poi^N  T. 

1  tinie,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT;  lower  the  hand  in  Cjuarte  near  the  right  hip, 


44  THE   TROOPER. 

the  thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of  the  gripe, 
the  point  a  little  higher  than  the  wrist.* 

2.  Thrust  to  the  front;  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length.  \ 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left — Point. 
1  thney  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  left,  draw  back  the 
hand  in  tierce  towards  the  right,  at  the  height  of 
the  neck,  the  edge  upwards,  the  point  directed  to 
the  left. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  left,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right — Point. 
1  timej  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
point,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
in  quarte  near  the  left  breast,  the  edge  upwards, 
the  point  directed  to  the  right. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  right,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

*The  first  position  of  the  hand  is  with  the  finger-nails 
turned  towards  the  hip,  the  edge  ofthe  sabre  downward; 
as  the  tlirustis  made,  the  edge  is  turned  to  the  left  and 
the  nails  brought  forward. 


THE   TROOPER.  45 

Rear — Point. 
1  timie,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
POINT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  and  rear,  bring 
the  hand  in  quarte  opposite  to  the  right  shoulder, 
the  arm  half  extended,  the  blade  horizontal,  the 
point  to  the  rear,  the  edge  upwards. 

2.  Thrust  to  the  rear,  extending  the  arm  to  its 
full  length. 

3.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  left — Point. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left,  raise  the  hand  in 
tierce  near  the  neck,  the  point  of  the  sabre  directed 
at  the  lieighc  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 

2.  Thrust  down  in  tierce. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry  right — Point. 

1  time  J  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
point,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
in  quarte  near  the  right  hip,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
directed  at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on 
foot. 

2.  Thrust  in  quarte. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 


46  THE   TROOPER. 

Front — Cut. 

1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  half  extended,  the 
hand  a  little  above  the  head,  the  edge  upwards,  the 
point  to  the  rear  and  higher  than  the  hand. 

2.  Cut,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

ie/if— Cut. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  turn  the  head  to  the  left,  raise  the  sabre,  the 
arm  extended  to  the  right,  the  hand  in  quarte,  and 
as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  higher  than  the 
hand. 

2.  Cut  diagonally  to  the  left. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right — Cut. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  carry  the  hand 
opposite  to  the  left  shoulder,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
upwards,  the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length, 
give  a  back-handed  cut  horizontally. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

The  cuts  are  also  used  against  infantry,  observini?  to 
direct  them  downward. 


THE   TROOPER.  47 

Rear — Cut. 
1   time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  throwing  back  the 
riglit  shoulder  ;  carry  the  hand  as  high  as,  and  op- 
posite to  the  left  shoulder,  the  sabre  perpendicular, 
the  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Extend  the  arm  quickly  to  its  full  length,  and 
give  a  back-handed  cut  horizontally  to  the  rear. 

8.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right,  in  tierce  and  quarfe — Cut. 
1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  j^igJit  cut. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  i-ighf  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left  in  quarte  and  tierce — Cut. 
1  time,  4  motions, 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  left  cut. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  left  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  tierce,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Return  to  tljie  position  of  guard. 

Rear,  in-  tierce  and  quarte — Cut. 

1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
CUT,  execute  the  1st  motion  of  rear  cut. 


48  THE   TROOPER. 

2.  Execute  the  2d  motion  of  rear  cut. 

3.  Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 

4.  Keturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  tiefi'ce — Parry. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  par- 
ry, carry  the  hand  quickly  a  little  to  the  front  and 
right,  the  nails  downwards,  without  moving  the 
elbow ;  the  point  inclined  to  the  front  as  high  as 
the  eyes,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  right  shoulder; 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  and 
pressing  against  the  guard. 

2.  Pveturn  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Parry. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
PARRY,  turn  the  hand  and  carry  it  quickly  to  the 
front  and  left,  the  nails  upwards,  the  edge  to  the 
left,  the  point  inclined  to  the  front,  as  high  as  the 
eyes,  and  in  the  direction  of  the  left  shoulder;  the 
thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  and 
resting  against  the  guard. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

For  the  head — Parry. 
1  timej  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
parry,  raise  the  sabre  quickly  above  the  head,  the 


THE   TROOPER.  49 

arm  nearly  extended,  tlie  edge  upwards,  the  point 
to  tlie  left,  and  about  6  inches  higher  than  the 
hand. 

The  hand  is  carried  more  or  less  to  the  right,  left,  or 
rear,  according  to  the  position  of  the  adversary. 

2.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against   wfanfri/  right — Parry. 
1  time,  3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is 
PARRY,  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  throwing  back 
the  right  shoulder,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  ex- 
tended to  the  right  and  rear,  the  point  upwards, 
the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  tlie  edge  to  the  left. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  right  from 
rear  to  front,  the  arm  extended ;  turn  aside  the 
bayonet  with  the  back  of  the  blade,  bringing  the 
hand  as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  upwards. 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantru  left — Parry. 
1   time,   3  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  PAR- 
RY, turn  the  head  to  the  left,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm 
extended  to  the  front  and  right,  the  point  upwards, 
the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back 
of  the  gripe,  the  back  of  the  blade  to  the  front. 

2.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  left,  from 
front  to  rear  along  the   horse's  neck,  the  arm  ex- 

5 


50  THE   TROOPER. 

tended ;  turn  aside  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of 
the  blade,  bringing  the  hand,  still  in  tierce,  above 
the  left  shoulder, 

3.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  execute  correctly  the  above 
cuts,  thrusts  and  parries,  the  instructor  requires  them  to 
make  the  application  of  them  by  combined  motions,  as 
follows  : 

In  tierce — Point  and  front  cut. 

In  quarte — Point  and  front  cut. 

Left — Point  and  cut. 

Eight — Point  and  cut. 

Rear — Point  and  cut. 

Against  infantry  right — Point  and  cut.- 

Against  infantry  left — Point  and  cut. 

Carry — Sabre. 

As  it  is  prescribed,  and  carry  the  right  foot  by 
the  side  of  the  left. 

After  the  troopers  have  acqiiired  the  sabrc-exercise  on 
foot,  they  must  practice  it  on  horseback,  at  all  the  gaits. 

Of  course  it  M-'ouId  be  better  to  study  the  sabre-man- 
ual under  the  instruction  of  a  skillful  swordsman,  but  as 
■perfect  accuracy  is  not  essential,  the  trooper  may  acquire 
all  that  is  necessary  by  attention  to  the  rules  given,  and 
frequent  practice. 

Manual  for  Colt's  revolver. 

The  preliminary  instructions  in  the  use  of  the 
Revolver  should  always  be  given  on  foot,  but  the 
following  Manual  will   apply   equally  well  either 


THE   TROOPER.  51 

on  foot  or  mounted.  In  the  instruction  on  foot, 
the  trooper  should  be  brought  to  the  position  of 
^'giuwcV  in  the  sabre  exercise,  so  as  to  assimilate 
his  motions  to  those  he  will  execute  when  mounted. 
In  the  following  Manual  for  Colt's  revolver,  the 
term  "holster"  is  applied  equally  to  the  holster  of 
the  saddle  or  its  substitute  on  the  belt. 

The  trooper  being  in  position,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

Draw  pistol. 
1  time,  2  motions.^ 

1.  At  the  command,  unbuckle  the  holster,  seize 
the  2^isfol  by  the  handle  with  the  last  three  fingers 
and  palm  of  the  hand,  the  fore-finger  extended  out- 
side the  holster,  so  as  to  be  placed  on  the  guard 
when  the  jnstol  is  partially  withdrawn,  the  thumb 
on  the  back  of  the  handle. 

2.  At  the  command  "two,"  draw  the  pistol  from 
the  holster,  placing  the  fore-finger  on  the  guard ; 
raise  it,  placing  the  right  wrist  at  the  height  and  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  right  shoulder ;  the  barrel 
of  the  pistol  perpendicular,  guard  to  the  front. 

To  load  the  pistol  the   instructor  will  command: 

Load  in  six  times. — 1  load. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  the  little 
finger  on  the  point  of  the  hci/,  the  muzzle  inclined 
to  the  left,  and  front  and  upwards  at  an  angle  of 
sixty  degrees  to  the  horizon,  half  cock  the  pistol 


62  THE    TROOPER. 

with  the  rii^ht  tliuinb,  the  vight  liaiul  j^raspiiig  the 
handle. 

2.  Let  go  the  pistol  with  the  left  hand,  turn  it 
with  the  right,  and  seize  it  with  the  left ;  the  liaiii- 
mer  between  the  thumb  and  fore-tinger,  the  middle 
finger  on  the  guard,  the  last  two  fingers  and  palm 
of  the  hand  grasping  the  handle,  and  carry  the 
right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box,  and  open  it. 

2.  IIani:>le    cartridge. 

1  time  J  1  motion. 

Take  a  ^avtnd.re  from  the  box  with  tlie  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers  and  carry  it  to  the  mouth. 

3.  Tear  cartridge. 

Tear  off  the  end  of  the  cartriilge  with  the  teeth 
and  carry  it  opposite  the  chamber  nearest  the  lever 
and  on  the  side  next  the  trooper. 

4.  Charge  cartridge. 

1  time,  1  motion. 

Empty  the  pnwder  into  the  chamber  and  press 
the  ball  in  with  the  fore-finger,  seize  the  end  of  the 
lever  with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers  of  the 
right  hand. 

5.  Ham  cartridge. 

1    time,   1  motion. 

Bring  down  the  lever  with  the  right  hand,  at  the 
same  time  turning  the  cijVnder  with  thethunil)  and 
fore-finger  of  the  left,  until  the  charged  chamber 


THE    TROOPER.  53 

comes  in  prolongation  of  the  lever,  ram  home  the 
charge  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge 
&o:r,"leaYing  the  lever  in   the  charged  chamber. 

Repeat  asabove  until  all  the  chambers  are  charged, 
and  after  charging  the  last  one  return  the  lever,  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  remaining  on  the  end 
of  it. 

6.  Prime. 

1  timej  2  motions. 

1.  Seize  the  handle  of  iho  jmfol  mih  the  right 
hand  below  the  left,  turn  it  with  th^  guard  to  the 
front,  muzzle  to  the  left  and  front,  and  elevated 
sixt^  degrees  above  the  horizon,  and  place  it  in  the 
left  hand,  the  little  finger  on  the  point  of  the  hei/  ; 
turn  the  cylinder  with  the  right  hand  until  it 
clicks,  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cap  hox  and 
open  it. 

2.  Take  a  cap,  press  it  on  the  exposed  cone,  turn 
the  cylinder  again  until  it  clicks,  and  carry  the  right 
hand  again  to  the  cap  hox. 

Repeat  the  second  motion  until  the  priming  is 
completed  ;  then  seize  i\\Q  pistol  at  the  handle  witli 
the  righthand,  let  down  the  hammer,  and  bring  the 
pistol  to  the  second  position  of  ''■draw  pistolJ' 

To  fire  x\\q  pistol  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Ready. 
1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  the  little 
finger  touching  the  key,  the  muzzle  to  the  left  and 
5* 


54  THE  TROOPER. 

front,  and  elevated  at  an  angle  of  sixt^  degrees  to 
the  horizon,  the  guard  under,  the  thumb  on  the 
cock,  the  fore-fin izer  on  the  iiuard. 

2.  Cock  the  pistol  with  the  thumb  and  return  to 
the  second  position  oi^^ draw  pistol." 

Aim. 
1  timcj  1  motion. 

Lower  the  muzzle  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the 
front  of  the  neck,  half  extending  the  right  arm, 
place  the  fore^finger  lightly  on  the  trigger,  close 
the  left  eye  and  aim  horizontally. 

Fire. 
1  time,  1  motion. 

Press  the  fore-finger  gradually,  but  quickly  on 
the  trigger,  fire  and  return  to  the  second  position 
of  ^'draio  pistol." 

Should  the  instructor  desire  to  have  all  the  i-iiaij^es 
fired,  he  will  give  an  intimation  to  that  uflect,  and  alter 
bringing  the  trooper  to  the  ])o.sition  of  "»-ca(/i/,"  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Aim.  2,  Fire. 

AVhich  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  After 
firing  the  first  charge,  the  troopers  will  go  through 
the  motions  of  ^'•readij,"  ^^aini,"  and  ^^Ji7'e,"  and 
so  continue  until  the  last  charge  is  fired,  when  they 
will  return  to  the  second  position  of  ^^draw  p)istol." 

To  load  withoxit  observing  the  times  and  motions,  tho 
instructor  will  command: 


the  trooper.         55 
1.  Load  at  will.  2.  Load. 

Load  the  pistol slb  prescribed.  Prime  and  return 
to  the  second  position  of  "  draw  jn'sfoV 

When  the  troopers  execute  the  manual  well, 
they  will  be  instructed  to  come  to  the  position  of 
^'readi/,"  as  follows: 

The  instructor  will  command: 

Ready. 

1  time,  1  motion.    * 

Move  the  right  hand  6  inches  to  the  front,  at 
the  same  time  lowering  the  muzzle  to  an  angle  of 
sixty  degrees  with  the  horizon,  cock  Wiq  pistol  with 
the  right  thumb,  and  return  to  the  second  position 
of  "  draw  jnstol." 

The  trooper  having  been  well  instructed  in  the  "man- 
uar'  on  foot,  should  Ije  made  to  repeat  it  mounted,  first 
at  a  halt,  and  afterwards  at  the  different  gaits,  but  the 
progression  in  the  instruction  should  be  slow.  Every 
trooper  should  be  made  to  execute  all  the  motions  well 
at  each  gait  before  passing  to  a  more  rapid  one. 

Aiming,  and  especially  at  rapid  gaits,  requires  some 
remark.  Aiming  should  be  practiced  to  the  right,  left , 
front  and  rear  In  aiming  to  the  right,  left  or  front,  at 
the  gallop,  or  at  speed,  the  trooper  should  rise  a  little  in 
the  stirrups  and  incline  the  body  slightly  to  the  front;  the 
arm  should  be  half  extended  and  the  body  turned  in  the 
direction  of  the  object  aimed  at.  In  aiming  to  the  rear, 
the  right  shoulder  should  be  well  thrown  back  and  the 
right  arm  extended  to  its  full  length. 

Filing  should,  at  first,  be  executed  with  the  greatest 
care  and  deliberation.  The  "target"  should  be  8  feet 
high  and  3  feet  wide,  with  a  vertical  and  a  horizontal  line, 


56  THE    TROOPER. 

each  nn  incli  wide,  intersecting  nt  the  liciijlit  off)  foel. 
The  vertical  line  should  pass  through  the  centre  ot  the 
target.  The  troopers  should  be  formed  in  front  of,  facing, 
and  at  a  distance  of  100  paces  from  the  target.  The 
firing  should  at  first  be  executed  at  the  distance  of  10 
paces,  but  the  distance  should  be  gradually  increased  to 
40  paces.  A  peg  in  front  of  the  target  will  mark  the 
point  from  which  the  trooper  is  to  fire. 

To  commence  the  firing,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
trooper  on  the  right  to  move  5  paces  to  the  front,  turn  to 
the  right,  move  30  paces  to  the  front,  turn  to  the  left, 
move  to  the  front  until  he  arrives  abreast  of  the  peg  in 
front  of  the  target,  then  turn  to  the  left  and  move  to  the 
front  until  he  aomes  opposite  the  target,  turn  toward  it, 
cock  the  pistol,  aim  and  fire  deliberately  ;  then  turn  to  the 
lefr,  move  30  paces  to  the  front,  turn  totlie  left  again  and 
pass  to  the  rear  of  the  troop,  reloadand  takehis  place  on 
the  left  of  the  rank.  To  fire  to  the  right,  the  trooper  ex- 
ecutes what  he  did  in  firing  to  the  iront,  except  that  he 
does  not  turn  towards  the  target  when  he  comes  in  front 
of  it.  To  fire  to  the  left  the  instructor  causes  the  trooper 
on  the  left  to  execute,  inversely,  what  the  trooper  on  tlie 
right  executed  in  firing  to  the  right.  To  fire  to  the  rear, 
the  trooper  on  the  right  executes  what  he  did  in  firing  to 
the  front,  except  that  he  turns  from  the  target  instead  of 
towards  it,  and  aims  to  the  rear.  The  points  where  the 
troopers  are  rerjuircd  to  turn  in  the  exercise  will  be 
marked  by  pegs.  At  hrst,  but  one  chamber  of  the  pistol 
should  be  discharged  by  eafdi  troojjcr,  and  great  care 
should  be  taken  to  guard  against  iVighteniug  the  horses. 
The  troopers  should  lie  cautioned  to  be  gentle  with  them, 
aiul  soothe  them  when  excitiul.  When  a  young  horse  is 
very  timid,  he  should  be  accompanied  by  one  which  has 
couroge.  When  the  troopers  are  sufiiciently  instructed  in 
the  exercise,  and  control  their  horses  well,  tkree  or  more 
targets  should  be  used.  They  should  at  first  be  placed  ou 
the  same  line,  and  100  paces  apart;  but  the  distance 
should  be  gradually  reducetl  to  T)!)  pru-es. 


THE    TROOPER.  57 

To  load  tlie  repeating  riile  (or  carbine.) 

Follow  the  directions  given  for  tlio  repeating  or 
r(>vo!vcr  pistol,  with  <,such  slight  modifications  as  the 
ditlerence  in  size  and  shape  of  tlie  weapons  will  suggest 
to  tlie  instructor. 

To  load  with  powder  and  ball. 

The  command^;  are  : 

Load  in  5  times. 

1.  Load. 

2.  Handle  cartridge. 

3.  Charge  cartridge. 

4.  Ram  cartridge. 
6.  Prime. 

All  of  which  are  executed  as  directed,  except 
that  at  the  second  command,  the  right  hand  grasps 
the  flask  and  brings  the  charger  to  the  chamber ; 
and  at  the  third  command,  the  powder  being  intro- 
duced, the  same  hand,  letting  go  the  flask,  (juickly 
inserts  the  ball  on  the  powder. 

But,  in  loading  the  rifle  or  carbine,  the  previ- 
ous command,  instead  of  draw  pistol,  is  advance 
carbine  or  advance  rifle,  which  is  executed  as 
in  tlie  manual  of  tlie  hrecch  loader. 


58  THE   TROOPER. 

Manual  of  the  breedi-loader. 

The  rille  beinj^  stispended  at  tlie  back,  muzzle  down- 
ward, by  the  t-houkler-siiap  from  left  to  right.  The  in- 
structor coininands : 

Advance  luirbK. 

Seize  the  rifle  at  the  sniiill  of  the  stock  witli  the 
right  hand  ;  place  the  butt  on  the  riglit  thigh  and 
across  it;  the  barrel  sloping  easily  forward. 

To  load  tlie  rifle. 

The  commands  are : 

load  in  3  times. 

1.  Load.  3.  Prime. 

2.  Charge  cartridge. 

At  the  word  "LOAD,"  place  the  piece  quickly  in 
the  left  hand,  which,  holding  the  reins,  gra.sps  the 
gun  near  and  below  the  band ;  the  muzzle  upward 
and  pointing  to  the  left;  butt  downward,  to  the 
right  and  near  the  right  hip;  the  right  hand  seizes 
the  lever;  (2d,) opens  the  breech;  (3d,)  opens  the 
cartridge-box. 

At  the  command, ''Charge  cartridge,"  put 
the  cartridge  in  the  chamber,  slmt  the  breech  by 
pressing  the  lever  firmly  ;  then  half-cock,  brush  off 
the  old  cap,  and  oju'ii  the  cap-box;  each  motion 
with  the  right  hand  and  in  the  order  prescribed. 

At  the  w^ord  "]*iUMr.,"  place  the  caj),  press  it 
on  the  nij»ple  with  the  right  thumb,  let  the  cock 
gently  down,  and  with  the  right  hand  grasp  the 
small  of  the  stock. 


THE   TROOPER  59 

To  load  tlie  self-priming  l)reecli  loader. 

The  commands  are: 

Load  in  2  times. 
1.  Load.  2.  Charge  cartridge. 

Which  are  executed  as  above. 

If  the  intention  is  to  fire  immediately  after  load- 
ing, the  word  "ready"  is  given. 

At  this  command,  promptly  cock  the  rifle  with 
the  right  hand,  and  place  it  in  the  position  of  ad- 
vance RIFLE. 

Next,  the  word 

Aim. 

At  which  the  piece  is  leveled,  with  the  butt 
against  the  right  shoulder;  left  eye  closed,  the 
right  cast  along  the  sights;  the  right  fore-finger 
lightly  touching  the  trigger;  the  barrel  resting  on 
the  bridle-hand. 

Fire. 

At  this  M'ord,  discharge  the  piece,  but  remain  at 
the  podtion  of  aim. 

It' the  intention  is  to  load  after  firing,  the  word 
^^load,"  is  given  and  executed  by  the  times  as 
before,  or  the  command, 

Load  at  will. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  load  without  the 
times,  or  separate  commands,  and  then  advance 
rr'Jlcs. 

If  the  design  is  not  to  reload,  instead  of  the 
rommand  LOAD,  ADVANCE  RIFLES  is  ordered. 


i 


GO  THE    TROOPEU. 

The  instructor  must  not  allow  tliepiecesto  be  held  iu 
the  position  of  aim  more  than  a  moment  before  giving 
the  next  following  command;  and.  until  the  horses  are 
accustomed  to  firing,  the  pieces  should  be  advanced 
after  being  discharged,  or  held  at  will. 

Not  intending  to  fire  after  aiming,  the  instructor 
■will  order  advance  RirLE^  (or  recover  arms,  when 
dismounted.) 

Intending  to  handle  the  sabre  or  pistol,  the  com- 
mand is,  DROP  RIFLE. 

At  which  the  trooper  lowers  the  muzzle,  butt 
upward,  the  piece  behind  him. 

For  insjjcction  of  sabre,  sec  sabre-manual. 

To  inspect  tlie  revolver-pistol. 

The  command  is: 


Inspection  of  pistol. 


At  which  the  trooper  draws2)Utol;  (2d,)  turns 
his  hand,  bringing  first  the  right  and  then  the  left 
side  toward  the  inspector;  (3d,)  he  returns  pistol 
without  farther  command. 

To  return  pistol  at  tlie  word. 

The  command  is : 

Return  pistol. 

At  which  it  is  passed  helow  the  reins  into  the 
saddk-lwhtcr ;  if  the  belt  or  side-holster  is  meant, 
it  must  be  named. 


THE   TROOPER.  61 

To  inspect  tlie  breech-loader  on  horse- 
back. 

The  command  is  : 

Inspection  of  rifle  (o?*  carbine.) 

At  which  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  advance  ; 
(2d,)  turned  to  exhibit  the  other  side ;  and  (3d,) 
DROPPED  as  directed. 

In  preparing  to  moimt  or  dismount^  the  rifle  or  carbine 
is  passed  over  the  right  shoulder,  as  directed  in  the  arti- 
cles on  that  subject. 

For  further  instruction  in  the  mounted  rifle  exercise, 
see  Skirmish  Drill  in  the  sequel. 

The  position  of  raise  pistol  is  that  of  the  second  motion 
of  draw  pistol ;  see  Manual. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


:e'a.t(.t  secoktx). 


Jib  lllatcoii  Irill. 


The  PLATOON  is  composed  of  either  12  or  16 
files,  according  to  the  numbers  present. 

This  requires  24  or  32  troopers  in  two  ranks ; 
12  or  16  in  one  rank. 

The  right  and  left  jianh-men  are  corporals  ;  but, 
in  two  ranks,  the  rear  flank-men  vlvq  privates.    • 

The  chief  of  platoon  (lieutenant  or  sergeant)  is 
posted,  when  in  line,  one  pace  (that  is,  o?ie  yard) 
in  front  of  the  centre  j  this  is  measured  from  the 
heads  of  the  front  horses  to  tlic  croup  or  tail  of  the 
horse  of  the  chief. 

The  senior  sergeant  one  pace  behind  the  third 
file  from  the  right )  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right 
of  the  corporal  of  the  right  flank  ;  this  sergeant  is 
right  particular  guide ^  and  not  counted  in  the  fours; 
the  third  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  left  corporal; 
the  third  sergeant  of  a  single  platoon  is  counted  off. 


THE   PLATOON.  63 

But  when  two,  three  or  four  platoons  are  organized 
as  a  squadron,  or  fraction  of  a  squadron,  the  left 
sergeant  is  left  particular  (juide,  and  not  counted. 

But,  in  this  case,  i\\Q  first  and  second  sergeants 
are  i\\Q  principal  guides ;  they  are  posted  beh'nd 
the  third  file  from  each  flank.  The  third  and 
fourth  sergeants  are  the  particular  guides  respec- 
tively of  the  right  and  left. 

x\ll  non-commissioned  officers,  excepting  thej^rin- 
cipal  Midi  particular  guides,  and  those  commanding 
platoons,  are  counted  in  the  fours. 

The  rank  and  file,  composed  of  all  except  officers, 
chiefs  of  platoon  and  guides  princip)cd  axviii  p)artieu- 
lar,  are  counted  or  told  off"  into  fours. 

On  the  left  of  the  first  and  right  of  the  second 
platoon  are  sergeants,  who  are  counted,  and  covered 
by  rear-rank  men  ;  when  these  sergeants  are  absent, 
corporals  take  their  plaees. 

The  file-close7-s  are  one  yard  in  rear  of  the  platoon 
or  troop;  the  principal  guides  are  the  file-closers  of 
the  right  and  left. 

T^o  platoons  are  a  division  or  company  ;  its  chief 
(like  the  chief  of  squadron)  is  posted,  when  in  line, 
one  yard  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  command. 

The  organization  of  the  division,  troop  or  com- 
pany, is  as  follows : 

Posts  of  Officers  and  Fon-Commissioned 
Officers  of  a  Company  acting  singly. 

The  Captain  in  front  of  the  centre,  one  pace  dis- 
tant from  the  front  rank. 


64  THE  PLATOON. 

The  1st  Lieutenant  in  rear  of  the  centre,  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers. 

The  2d  Lieutenant  commands  tlie  first  platoon ; 
in  the  absence  of  a  3d  Lieutenant  the  2d  platoon  is 
commanded  by  the  senior  Sergeant.  The  chiefs  of 
platoons  are  posted  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  their  respective  platoons. 

The  1st  Sergeant  in  rear  of  the  right,  in  the  rank 
of  file-closers. 

The  2d  and  8d  Sergeants  on  the  riglit  and  left  of 
the  troop,  not  told  off. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  is  posted  on  the  left 
of  the  1st  platoon,  and  on  the  right  of  the  2d. 

Corporals,  next  to  the  Sergeants  who  are  on  the 
flanks  of  platoons. 

The  Saddler  and  Farrier  in  rear  of  the  left  of 
the  troo])  8  paces  retired  from  the  line  of  file- 
closers ;  and  the  Buglers  20  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre. 


Posts  of  the  Officers  and  Non-Commis- 
sioned  Officers  of  a  Squadron  in  line. 

The  Captain  commanding  is  posted  at  the  centre 
of  the  squadron,  the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank. 

The  2d  Captain  3  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of 
the  squadron.  He  is  charged  with  the  alignment 
of  the  rear  rank  and  file-closers. 

The  senior  1st  Lieutenant   commands  the    1st 


THE   PLATOON.  65 

plat-ooHj  the  other  1st  Lieutenant  commands  the  4th 
platoon. 

The  senior  2d  Lieutenant  commands  the  2d  pla- 
toon, the  other  2d  Lieutenant  commands  the  3d 
platoon. 

Each  of  these  officers  is  posted  at  the  centre  of 
his  platoon,  with  the  croup  of  his  horse  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank. 

The  senior  Sergeant  is  posted  behind  the  3d  file 
from  the  right  of  the  1st  platoon  ;  he  is  the  princi- 
pal guide  when  the  column  of  squadrons  is  left  in 
front. 

The  2d  Sergeant  behind  the  3d  file  from  the  left 
of  the  4th  platoon ;  he  is  principal  guide  when  the 
column  of  squadrons  is  right  in  front. 

The  8d  Sergeant  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  squadron;  he  is  not  counted  in 
the  rank. 

The  4th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank; 
he  is  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  5th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  1st  platoon. 

The  6th  Sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  2d  platoon. 

The  7th  Sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  3d  platoon. 

The  8th  Sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  4th  platoon. 

The  heads  of  the  horses  of  all  the  file-closers 
are  at  one  pace  from  the  croup  of  those  of  the  rear 
rank. 

The  Corporals  are  posted  in  the  front  rank,  on 
the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons,  and 
supply  the  places  of  Sergeants  when  necessary. 

When  guidons  are  used^  they  are  carried  by  the 

5* 


66  THE   PLATOON. 

non-commissioned   officers  on   tlie  left  of  tlie  1st 
and  3d  platoons. 

The  flag  of  the  guidonis  swallow-tailed, 3  feet 5  inches 
from  the  lance  to  the  end  of  the  swallow-tail;  15  inches 
to  the  fork,  and  2  feet  3  inches  measured  on  the  lance. 
Half  red  and  half  white;  the  red  above.  On  the  red  the 
arms  of  the  State  or  the  initial  letters.  On  the  white  the 
letter,  number,  or  name  of  the  company. 

The  lances  of  standards  and  giudons  are  nine  feet 
long,  including  spear  and  ferule. 

The   Squadron   in  column   in  twos  or 
fours. 

The  Captains  commanding  march  on  the  side  of 
the  guides,  and  4  paces  from  the  flank,  and  abreast 
of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  second  Captains  march  on  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guides,  4  paces  from  the  flank,  and  abreast 
of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  1st  Lieutenant  of  each  squadron  marches  at 
the  head  of  the  1st  platoon,  one  pace  in  advance  of 
tlie  first  files,  having  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  on  his  right. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  march  on  the 
side  of  the  guides,  one  pace  from  the  flank  of  the 
column,  and  abreast  of  their  first  files;  the  file- 
closers  march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide, 
one  pace  from  the  flank,  and  on  a  line  with  the 
centre  of  their  platoons. 

They  all  march  in  a  similar  manner  on  the 
flanks  of  the  column  when  the  left  is  in  front ;  and, 
in  this  case,  it  is  the  junior  1st  Lieutenant  who 
marches  in  the  column  at  the  head  of  the  4th  pla- 
toon of  each  squadron. 


THE   PLATOON.  67 

The  particular  guide,  wlio  in  line  is  posted  on 
the  left  of  the  squadron,  marches  behind  the  last 
files  of  the  squadron  ;  when  the  column  is  left  in 
front,  he  takes  post  on  the  left  of  the  officer  com- 
manding the  4th  platoon,  one  pace  in  front  of  the 
left  file.' 

When  the  nature  of  the  ground  obliges  the  offi- 
cers and  file-elosers  to  enter  the  column,  the  move- 
ment is  made  successively  j  the  Captains  command- 
ing, and  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  place  themselves  at 
the  head  ;  the  second  Captains  and  the  file-closers, 
in  rear  of  their  respective  troops. 


Order  in  column  of  Platoons. 


In  this  order,  the  distance  from  one  platoon  to 
another,  measured  from  the  men  of  one  front  rank 
to  those  of  another  front  rank,  is  equal  to  the  front 
of  a  platoon;  that  is  to  say,  it  is  l2  paces  if  the 
platoons  are  of  twelve  files.  Subtracting  the  depth 
of  two  ranks,  which  is  6  paces,  there  remain  6 
paces  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  ol  the  rear  rank 
of  one  platoon,  to  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  next  platoon,  a  distance  which  is 
equal  to  half  of  the  front  of  a  platoon. 

In  SINGLE  RANK  FORMATION,  subtracting  3  paces 
or  yards  from  12,  there  remain  9  yards  as  the  dis- 
tance between  platoons  from  head  to  croup  ;  or  with 
platoons  of  16  troopers,  13  yards. 

The  Captains  commanding  march  on  the  side  of 
the  guideS;  four    paces  from   the   flank  of  the  col- 


68  THE   PLATOON. 

umn,  and  habitually  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their 
squadrons. 

The  second  Captains  march  on  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide,  4  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column, 
and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  1st  and  2d  Lieutenants  march  at  the  centre 
of  their  platoons,  one  pace  from  the  front  rank; 
other  chiefs  of  platoon  in  iront  of  centre  of  pla- 
toons ;  those  who  command  the  platoons  at  the 
head  of  squadrons,  preserve,  besides  their  distance, 
the  ground  necessary  to  enable  each  squadron,  in 
wheeling  into  line,  to  maintain  its  interval. 

The  Sergeants,  who  are  file-closers,  march  en  the 
side  opposite  to  the  guides,  behind  the  third  file  of 
their  platoons. 

When  the  column  marches  right  in  front,  the 
particular  guide  of  the  right  of  each  squadron 
marches  on  the  right  of  the  1st  platoon ;  and  the 
particular  guide  on  the  left  places  himself  as  file- 
closer  behind  the  2d  file  from  the  left  of  the  4th 
platoon. 

The  post  of  these  Sergeants  is  the  reverse  when 
the  left  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  being  composed  of  64  files,  when 
it  is  broken  into  sections,  the  1st  Lieutenant  of 
each  squadron  marches  at  the  head  of  the  1st  sec- 
tion of  the  1st  platoon  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  pla- 
toons remain  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  one  pace 
from  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  their  1st 
section. 

The  file-closers  who  command  the  2d  sections, 
march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides,  one  pace 
from  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank. 


THE   PLATOON.  69 

The  posts  of  the  commandants  of  sections  is  the 
reverse  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

Column  of  divisions  (or  companies.) 

The  Captains  are  posted  as  in  column  of  platoons. 

The  •  senior  1st  Lieutenant  commands  the  1st 
division,  the  other  1st  Lieutenant  the  2d  ;  they  re- 
main, however,  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

All  the  other  officers  and  Sergeants  of  each  divi- 
sion are  posted  as  prescribed  in  the  order  in  column 
of  platoons,  the  file-closers  remaining  in  their  places, 
on  whatsoever  side  the  guide  may  be. 

There  being  a  sufficient  number  of  officers  and  troopers 
present,  they  may  be  formed  as  a  division  or  squadron, 
and  the  various  posts  taken  as  directed;  but  before  at- 
tempting the  drill  of  the  squadron,  that  of  the  platoon 
must  be  well  understood.  If  competent  officers  can  be 
found  for  the  purpose,  each  Instructor  and  assistant 
should  be  limited  to  12  or  16  men.  But  this  not  being 
always  possible,  2  or  more  platoons  may  be  instructed  by 
ONE  OFFICER  and  ONE  ASSISTANT,  the  wliole  for  the  pres- 
ent forming  one  single  platoon.  The  other  officers  may  re- 
main at  the  posts  assigned  them,  or,  for  the  time  being, 
ride  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

The  drill-call  being  soi.uided,  the  horses  are  conducted 
to  the  drill-ground,  as  directed  in  the  first  lesson,  none 
being  mounted  but  the  instructor  and  assistant.  The 
former  commands  : 

ATTENTION! 
IN  TWO  RANKS, 
FORM  PLATOON. 

To  form  company  or  squadron,  those  words  will  be  sub- 
stituted for  '-platoon.''  To  form  in  one  xfxnk.,  one  rank 
will  be  named  instead  oitwo. 


70  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  last  command,  tlie  flank  Sergeants  (guides  of 
the  right  and  left)  will  take  post  at  the  flanks  of  the  prt)- 
posed  line;  the  Isl  Corporal  on  the  leftof  the  right  guide  ; 
the  2d  Corporal  on  the  right  of  the  left  guide  ;  the  tallest 
trooper  (man  and  liorse  considered)  will  take  his  place 
on  the  left  of  the  1st  Corporal,  and  the  lowest  on  the 
right  of  the  2(1  Corporal;  the  next  tallest  will  cover  the 
1st  Corporal,  and  the  next  lowest  the  2d  Corporal  ;  these 
latter  being  of  the  rear  rank,  will  form  six  yards  beliind 
the  Corporals. 

Thus  the  platoon  will  be  formed  with  the  tallest  on 
the  right. 

The  file-closers  are  six  yards  in  rear,  posted  as  direct- 
ed ;  the  assistant  instructor  ten  yards  in  front  of  centre, 
facing  the  platoon. 

The  instructor,  posted  where  liis  presence  is  most 
wanted,  commands: 

1.  Attention.  3  Front. 

2.  Eight — Dress. 

He  then  commands: 

Iti  each  rank — Count  (by)  fours. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  fours, 
the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  right  to  left,  pro- 
nouncing in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same 
tone,  without  hurry,  and  without  turning  the  head; 
one,  two,  three,  Jour,  according  to  the  place  which 
each  one  occupies. 

The  troopers  then  mount  by  the  times,  and  without 
explanation. 

At  the  command  form — ranks,  the  assistant- 
instructor  moves  forward,  turns  to  the  right-about, 
and  places  himself  at  the  centre  of  the  platoon,  the 
croup  of  his  horse  one  pace  from  the  head  of  the 


THE    PLATOON.  71 

horses  of  the  front   rank.     The   file-closers  follow 
the  rear  rank. 

General  principles  of  alignment. 

The  troopers,  to  align  themselves,  should  regu- 
late their  shoulders  upon  those  of  the  men  on  the 
side  of  the  alignment,  and  fix  the  eyes  upon  the 
line  of  the  eyes,  so  as  to  perceive  the  breast  of  the 
the  second  trooper  of  their  rank  on  the  side  of  the 
alignment;  for  this  purpose,  they  should  turn  the 
head,  remaining  square  upon  their  horses,  feel 
lightly  the  boot  of  the  man  on  the  side  of  the 
alignment,  and  keep  the  horses  straight  in  the 
ranks  that  all  may  have  a  parallel  direction. 

The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank,  independently  of 
the  alignment,  should  be  exactly  behind  their  file- 
leaders,  and  in  the  same  direction,  taking  care  to 
preserve  the  distance  of  2  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

Successive  alignment  of  files  in  tlie 
platoon. 

The  two  files  of  the  right  or  oftlie  left  are  moved  for- 
ward 10  paces,  and  aliened  parallel  to  the  platoon  by  the 
commands:  1.  Two  files  from  right  (or  left.)  forward ; 
2.  Mahcii;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right  (or /c/O— Dress  ;  5.  Front. 
The  instructor  then  commands: 

1.  By  file  right  (or  Jcjt) — Dress. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  -which  is 
DRKSS,  each  file  moves  forward  successively  and 
steadily,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to  the  right, 

i 


IZ  THE   PLATOON. 

and  taking  the  last  steps  slowly,  in  order  to  arrive 
abreast  of  the  files  already  formed  without  passing 
beyond  the  alignment,  observing  then  to  halt,  give 
the  hand,  relax  the  legs,  and  keep  the  head  to  the 
riii'ht  until  the  command  front. 

Each  file  executes  the  same  movement  when  the 
preceding  one  has  arrived  on  the  base  of  alignment, 
so  that  only  one  file  may  align  itself  at  the  same 
time. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  front  when  the 
last  file  is  aligned. 

When  the  troopers  execute  correctly  these  alignments, 
this  instruction  is  repeated  in  giving  the  two  files  of  the 
right  an  oblique  direction.  For  this  purpose,  the  two 
files  having  marched  forward  4  paces,  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed, execute  a  half-turn  to  the  rights  or  the  left,  and 
march  6  paces  in  this  new  direction. 

The  platoon  being  unmasked,  the  remainder  of  tlie 
movement  is  executed  by  the  commands  and  folIoM^ing 
the  principles  prescribed  ;  each  file,  as  it  arrives  nearly 
opposite  the  place  it  is  to  occupy,  executes  a  half-turn  to 
the  right,  or  to  the  left,  so  that  having  left  the  platoon  by 
one  straight  line,  it  arrives  upon  the  new  alignment  by 
another. 

The  two  files  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  are  made  to 
rein-back  4  paces,  and  align  themselves  parallel  to  the 
platoon  and  opposite  the  place  they  occupied  in  it,  by 
the  commands  :  1.  Two  files  from  the  right  {ox  left)  back- 
wards; 2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right  {ox  left)— Dis.^^^] 
5.  Front.     The  instructor  then  commands  : 

1.  By  file — right  (or  left)  hackwarcls — Dress. 

2.  Front. 


THE   PLATOON.  73 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  each  file  reins  back  successively,  keeping 
perfectly  straight,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to 
the  right,  and  passing  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the 
files  already  formed,  in  order  to  come  up  abreast  of 
them  by  a  movement  to  the  front,  which  renders 
the  alignment  more  easy. 

The  troopers  of  the  front  rank  rein  back  slowly, 
those  of  the  rear  rank  regulate  themselves  upon 
the  file-leaders,  preserving  always  their  proper  dis- 
tance. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  aliirnment  to  the  rear  gives  the  means  of  repair- 
ing a  fault  by  returning  to  the  alignment  when  it  has 
been  passed  over;  but  it  should  be  avoided  as  much  as 
possible. 

The  alignment  is  then  executed  by  twos  (or  by  fours.) 
For  this  purpose,  the  two  or  four  files  of  the  riglit  move 
forward  as  has  been  prescribed,  a»ul  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  twos  (or  hi/  fours)  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

2,  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  the  files  align  themselves  successively  by 
twos  (or  by  fours),  following  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  alignment  by  file,  being  particular 
to  set  out  and  arrive  upon  the  alignment  together. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  align  them- 
selves on  the  breast  of  the  second  man  towards  the  side 

7 


74  THE  PLATOON. 

of  the  alignment,  and  not  upon  the  extremity  of  the 
rank  (wliich  would  prevent  their  remaining  square  in 
their  seals)  ;  that  they  are  neither  too  much  opened  nor 
closed;  and,  finally^  that  those  of  the  rear  rank  are  ex- 
actly behind  their  file-leaders.  The  troopers  are  also 
required  to  align  themselves  promptly,  that  the  horses 
may  not  1>e  kept  a  long  time  gntkered. 

When  a  platoon  is  not  aligned,  it  arises  from  the  fact, 
generally,  that  the  horses  are  not  straight  in  the  ranks. 

When  a  platoon  dresses  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing 
is  in  rear,  it  is  presumed  that  most  of  the  horses  are 
turned  to  the  left ;  it  is  necessary  to  observe  if  this  is 
the  case,  and  to  command  the  troopers  to  carry  the  hand 
slightly  to  the  right,  at  the  same  time  closing  the  right 
leg,  which  brings  the  horse  upon  the  alignment. 

If,  after  this  movement,  some  of  the  troopers  are  still 
too  much  in  rear  to  perceive  the  line  of  the  rank,  they 
move  forward  after  squaring  their  horses. 

When  a  platoon  dresses  to  the  right,  if  the  left  wing- 
is  in  advance,  it  is  presumed  that  the  horses  are  turned 
to  the  right:  the  troopers  are  then  required  to  carry  the 
hand  to  the  left,  closing  at  the  same  time  the  left  leg, 
which  causes  the  horse  to  step  back  to  his  proper  place. 

If,  after  this  movement,  some  troopers  are  still  in  ad- 
vance, they  rein  directly  back  until  they  can  perceive 
only  the  line  of  the  rank. 

In  dressing  to  the  left,  the  Same  faults  are  corrected 
by  inverse  means. 

During  the  alignment,  the  instructor  places  himself 
in  front  of  the  troopers,  to  be  assured  that  they  execute 
the  movement  steadily,  and  do  not  turn  the  head  more 
than  is  prescribed;  that  they  do  not  open  the  knee  in 
order  to  feel  the  boot;  thatth«y  prevent  their  horses  from 
crowding  the  troopers  already  lornied  ;  that  they  take 
the  last  steps  slowly;  that  they  align  themselves  without 
losing  time  as  they  arrive ;  and  that  they  give  the  hand 
and  replace  the  legs  immediately  after  being  aligned. 

For  this    exercise'  alone,   the   assistant   instructor  is 


THE  PLATOON.  75 

placed  perpendicularly  to  the  flank  of  the  platoon,  facing 
to  the  left,  if  the  alignment  is  to  the  right,  and  facing 
to  the  right,  if  the  alignment  is  to  the  left.  He  observes 
that  the  troopers  halt  on  the  same  line,  and  rectifies  the 
alignm^int  in  a  low  voice.  At  the  command  FRONT,  he 
resumes  his  place  before  the  platoon. 

The  instructor  insists  upon  all  these  principles;  but 
the  alignments  w^ill  be  occasionally  interrupted  by 
marches  in  eolnmn,  in  order  to  calm  the  horses. 

Alignment  of  tiie  platoon, 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  places  the 
corporal  of  the  flank  on  which  he  wishes  to  align  it  iu 
siiiich  a  position  that  no  trooper  will  be  forced  to  reiii 
back,  and  commands : 

1.  Right  (or  left) — Dress.  2.  Front. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  which  is 
DRESS,  all  the  troopers  align  themselves  promptly, 
but  with  steadiness. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

In  all  the  alignments,  the  corporal  of  the  opposite 
flank  aligns  himself  promptly  on  the  one  towards  the 
side  of  the  alignment,  without  respect  to  the  individual 
alignment  of  the  troo])ers. 

To  open  and  close  tlie  ranks. 

To  open  the  ranks,  the  insfructor  commands: 

1.  Rear  rank  open  order.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 


76  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  remains 
immoveable,  the  rear  rank  reins-back  6  paces,  each 
trooper  preserving  the  direction  of  his  file-leader. 
The  file-closer  reins  back  until  he  is  6  paces  from 
the  rear  rank.  The  assistant  instructor  moves  for- 
ward 6  paces,  and  faces  the  platoon  by  a  turn-about 
to  the  left. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  the  rear  rank 
dresses  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

To  close  the  rank,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Rear  ranh  close  order.  3.   Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  closes 
upon  the  front  to  the  distance  of  2  feet,  each 
trooper  taking  care  to  preserve  the  direction  of  his 
file-leader.  The  assistant  instructor  resumes  his 
place  at  the  centre  of  the  platoon  by  a  turn-about 
to  the  right,  and  the  file-closer  takes  his  proper  dis- 
tance from  the  rear  rank. 

At  the  command  right — DRESS,  the  platoon  is 
aligned  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

To  rein-back  the  platoon. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  the  instrnctor  commands: 

1.  Platoon  backwards. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left.^ 


THE  PLATOON.  77 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  rein- 
back  at  once,  regulating  their  movements  by  those 
of  the  guide. 

When  the  platoon  has  reined  back  some  *;tcps,  the  in- 
•structor  commands : 

1,  Platoon.  3.  Right  (or  left) — Dress, 

2.  Halt,  4.  Front, 

To  break  the  platoon  by  file. 

The  platoon  bcsng  ii;i  line,  the  instrnctor  commands : 

1,  j%  Jik,  2,  March. 

At  the  command  by  file ^  the  troopers  of  the  first 
file  gather  their  horses,  and  the  others  successively, 
as  soon  as  the  file  on  the  right  is  in  motion. 

At  the  command  MA..CH,  the  first  file  of  the 
right  moves  straight  to  the  front;  it  is  followed  by 
the  other  file ;  each  file  moves  oflf  when  the 
haunches  of  the  rear  rank  horse  of  the  file  which 
has  broken,  arrives  at  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the 
front  rank;  each  file  marches  6  paces  straight  to 
the  front,  makes  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right,  and 
marches  in  the  new  direction  until  it  reaches  its 
place  in  the  column,  when  it  makes  a  quarter-turn 
to  the  left. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  gather  their 
horses  and  break  successively,  only  at  the  moment  pre- 
scribed ;  that  the  first  file  moves  straight  to  the  front ; 
that  the  other  files  never  march  less  than  six  paces  be- 
fore obliquing,  and  do  not  make  more  than  a  quarter- 
turn  to  the  right  or  to  the  left^  in  order  to  rejoin  the  column. 

7* 


78  THE  PLATOON. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  : 

1.  By  files  from  the  left.  2.  March. 

Direct  marcli  in  column  by  iile. 

The  troopers  should  keep  their  horses  straight, 
and  march  at  a  free  and  equal  gait ;  they  should 
keep  their  eyes  to  the  front,  and  continue  in  the 
direction  of  the  column,  so  as  to  perceive  only  the 
trooper  who  marches  before  them,  to  march  at  the 
same  gait  with  him,  preserving  always  the  distance 
of  two  feet  from  head  to  croup,  that  his  own  horse 
may  not  tread  upon  the  heels  of  the  horse  in  front. 
The  distance  should  be  recovered  gradually  when 
lost. 

The  greater  the  depth  of  the  column,  the  more  attenr 
tion  should  the  instructor  pay  to  the  equality  of  the  gaits, 
and  the  t^reservation  of  the  distances. 

Change  of  direction. 

To  change  the  direction,  the  instructor  commands: 

Head  of  column — Right  (or  left.) 

At  which  the  assistant  instructor  orders  : 

Right  (or,  left) — Turn. 

At  the  word  turn,  the  leading  file  turns  to  the 
left,  (or  right,)  over  an  arc,  or  circular  path  of  three 
yards,  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  original 
one.     All  turn  in  succession  at  the  same  point. 


THE   PLATOON.  79 

To  halt,  and  to  commence  the  marcli  in 
column. 

The  column  marching,  to  halt  it  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Column.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  stop  to- 
gether in  the  direction  of  their  file-leaders  and  at 
their  distances,  taking  care  to  prevent  their  horses 
from  stepping  back. 

To  move  off,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Column  forward.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  move  off 
steadily  together. 

The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  wishes 
it  to  commence  the  move  at  a  trot,  he  commands: 

Column  forward^  trot — March. 

The  order  may  then  be  given  either  to  walk,  or 
the  halt  may  be  ordered. 

Individual  oblique  marcli. 

The  column  marc!  ing  by  file,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Left  (or  riglii)  ohllque.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes 
a  quarter-turn  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward  in  his 
new  direction,  all  following  parallel  lines,  and  regu- 


80  THE   PLATOON. 

lating  themselves  towards  the  right,  in  order  to 
keep  on  the  same  line,  and  to  preserve  their  dis- 
tances on  that  side. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  return  to  the  ori- 
ginal direction,  by  a  quarter-turn  to  ths  right,  in 
advancing,  and  move  forward  in  the  direction  of 
their  file-leaders. 

The  platoon  marclimg  in  column  by  file, 
to  form  it  to  tlie  front,  to  the  left,  or 
on  right,  into  line. 

The  column  marcliing  right  in  front,  to  form  it  to  the 
front  into  line,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.  4.  Eight — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 
Z.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  continues 
to  march  straight  forward.  The  others  oblique  im- 
mediately to  the  left,  march  in  this  new  direction, 
and  each  file  makes  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  on 
coming  opposite  the  place  he  is  to  occupy  in  the 
platoon. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  paces,*  the 
instructor  commands  halt.     At  this  command,  it 

*This  is  increased  to  30  paces  (yards)  in  the  squad- 
ron drill;  it  is  often  much  diminished,  especially  w^hen 
obstacles  interfere. 


THE   PLATOON.  81 

halts  square  to  the  front ;  the  other  files  come  up 
and  form  successively  on  the  left  of  the  first,  and 
dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

Tlie  iastructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  im- 
mediately after  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the 
last  file  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  Fnnit  into  line;  2.  March; 
3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5.  Front. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  into 
line  upon  its  left  flank,  the  instrvtctor  commands  : 

1,  Left  into  line,         4.  Right — Dress. 

2,  March.  5.  Front. 

3,  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to 
the  left  and  moves  straight  forward ;  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  on,  and  at  2  paces  before  arri- 
ving opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the 
platoon,  they  turn  successively  to  the  left. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  paces,  the  in- 
structor commands  HALT.  At  this  command  it 
halts;  the  other  files  come  up  and  form  successively 
on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  im- 
mediately after  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the 
last  file  is  aligned. 

He  observes  that  the  troopers  turn  exactly  upon  the 
point  indicated,  and  before  arriving  at  it  do  not  incline 
to  the  side  of  tlie  formation. 


82  THE  PLATOON. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  in  line  on 
the  right  flank,  the  movement  is  executed,  following  the 
same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  com- 
mands:  1.  Right  into  line ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Halt;  4.  Left 
— Dress  ;  5.  Front. 

When  necessary,  the  front  may  be  made  to  the  left  or 
right  in  less  time  and  space,  by  the  commands.  Front, 
Halt. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  in  line 
upon  the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank, 
the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  On  right  into  line.  4.  Right — DiiESS. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to 
the  right  and  moves  straight  forward ;  the  other 
files  continue  to  march  on,  and  each  turns  succes- 
sively to  the  right,  at  one  pace  beyond  the  point 
where  the  one  preceding  turned. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands  halt.  At  this  command  it 
halts;  the  other  files  come  up  and  form  succes- 
sively on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  im- 
mediately after  halt,  and  commands  front  when  the 
last  file  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  in  line 
upon  the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  left  flank 
the  movement  is  executed,  following  the  same  princi- 
ples, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  On 
lejt  into  line;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5. 
Front. 


THE   PLATOON.  83 

In  ordering  "  On  right  (or  on  left)  into  line,  strong  em- 
phasis is  laid  on  the  word  On,  to  prevent  the  men  from 
mistaking  this  for  the  previous  movement. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  twos  or  by 

fours. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  B^  twos  (or  hi/  /ours.)  3-.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  or  four 
files  of  the  right  move  straight  to  the  front ;  they 
are  followed  by  the  other  files,  who  move  off  when 
the  haunches  of  the  horse  of  the  rear  rank  are  on 
a  line  with  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank.  These  files  march  straight  forward  6  paces, 
execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right  by  trooper,  and 
march  in  this  direction  until  they  meet  the  column, 
when  they  take  their  places  in  it  by  making  a  quar- 
ter turn  to  the  left. 

The  command  guide  left,  is  given  immediately  after 
that  of  MARCH,  that  the  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  of  twos  or  fours,  who  becomes  guide  of  the  col- 
umn, may  take  at  once  a  point  of  direction. 

After  breaking  by  twos.  No.  two  and  four  being  guides, 
keep  their  eyes  to  the  front.  After  reaching  the  column, 
Nos.  one  and  three  dress  upon  them. 

After  breaking  by  fours,  Nos.  four  become  guides  of 
each  rank. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted, following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  by  twos  from  the  left  (or  by 
fours;}  2.  March;  3.  Guide  right. 


84  THE   PLyi^TOON. 

Direct  marcli  in  column  by  twos  or  by 

fours. 

The  principles  of  the  direct  march  in  column  by  file, 
are  applicable  to  the  column  by  twos  or  by  fours. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank  of  twos 
(or  fours)  is  guide  of  the  column;  he  keeps  his 
eyes  to  the  front,  moves  straight  forward,  and 
marches  so  that  the  troopers  of  his  rank  may  be  at 
1  pace  from  the  croup  of  the  sub-instructor's  horse. 
The  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  of  the  other  ranks, 
who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  preserves  the  head  direct, 
and  keeps  at  the  distance  of  2  feet  from  his  file- 
leader,  and  in  the  same  direction  ;  the  other  troop- 
ers of  each  rank  look  occasionally  towards  the 
guide,  in  order  to  align  themselves  and  regulate 
upon  him  their  rate  of  march.  They  feel  lightly 
the  boot  towards  that  side,  and  yield  to  all  pres- 
sure coming  from  it.  When  the  march  is  by  fours, 
they  resist  all  pressure  coming  from  the  opposite 
direction. 

When  the  platoon  marches  left  in  front,  the  guide  is 
to  the  right,  and  in  other  respects  the  troopers  conform 
to  the  same  principles. 

Change  of  direction. 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  right  or 
left  in  front,  the  instructor  commands: 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right). 
At  this  command  the  assistant-instructor  commands  : 


TEE  PLATOON.  85 

1.  Lcjt — Turn.  2.  Forward. 

At  tlie  first  part  of  tlie  first  command,  which  is 
hft^  the  left  trooper,  who  is  pivot,  prepares  to  turn 
at  the  same  gait,  the  trooper  of  the  opposite  side  to 
increase  his.  The  walk  is  accelerated,  but  the  trot 
is  avoided,if  possible,  until  ordered. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  turn, 
the  first  rank  of  twos  or  fours  turns  to  the  left. 
The  pivot  turns  at  the  same  <2:ait,  describing  an 
arc  of  a  circle  of  Jive  paces.  The  trooper  on  the 
opposite  side  turns,  increasing  the  gait;  the  other 
troopers  turn  the  head  towards  the  marching  flank, 
to  regulate  their  rate  of  march,  feeling  at  the  same 
time  lightly  the  boot  on  the  side  of  the  pivot. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  troopers  who 
had  increased  the  gait  resume  the  precise  pace  at 
which  they  were  before  moving,  and  the  head  of 
the  column  marches  straight  forward  in  the  new 
direction. 

Each  rank  executes  the  same  movement  on 
arriving  upon  the  ground  where  the  first  has  turned. 

The  assistant-instructor  shonld  give  the  command /e/i 
in  sufficient  time  to  command  turn,  when  he  is  at  three 
paces  from  the  point  indicated  for  the  change  of  direction; 
he  executes  his  movement,  lengthening  slightly  the  gait, 
without  leaving  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  regulating 
himself  upon  the  marching  flank,  so  as  to  give  the  com- 
mand FORWARD  at  the  instant  the  front  rank,  having  ex 
ecuted  a  quarter  of  a  wheel,  is  in  a  direction  perpendi- 
cular to  the  former  one. 

When  the  changes  of  direction  are  to  be  executed  at  the 
angles  of  a  limited  ground,  and  the  column  is  marching 
by  fours,  the  assistant-instructor  commands  :  1.  Left  (or 

8 


86  THE   PLATOON. 

right) — Turn  ;  2.  Forward,  without  waiting  for  the  com- 
mand Head  of  column  to  the  leH  (or  to  the  right.) 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  in- 
structor halts  it^  as  prescribed. 

To  commence   the  march,   the  instructor  commands : 

1.    Column  forward.  S.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  in- 
structor commands : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes 
a  quarter-turn  to  the  left. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank,  who  is 
guide  of  the  column,  moves  straight  forward  in  the 
new  direction,  and  parallel  to  the  assistant-instruc- 
tor. The  trooper- on  the  left  of  each  of  the  other 
ranks,  who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  moves  forward  also 
in  the  new  direction,  observing  the  guide  of  the 
column  so  as  to  keep  on  the  same  line,  and  in  a 
parallel  direction  with  him. 

The  other  troopers  move  forward,  looking  occa- 
sionally to  the  left  so  as  to  align  themselves  upon 
their  guide.  Each  one  places  the  left  knee  behind 
the  right  knee  of  the  man  on  the  left,  and  the  head 
of  his  horse  opposite  the  lower  part  of  the  neck  of 
the  horse  on  his  left.  The  troopers  march  thus,  in 
each  rank,  during  the  oblique  march. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  conform  to  what 
IS  prescribed,  for  the  column  by  files. 


THE   PLATOON.  87 

If  the  troopers  become  disunited  dining  the  oblique 
nnarch,  they  should  rejoin  the  guide  of  their  rank,  gain- 
ing more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side,  so  as  not 
to  lose  their  alignment  nor  retard  those  who  march  be- 
hind them.  If  the  guide  of  any  rank  ceases  to  be  on 
theline  of  the  guide  of  the  column,  he  lengthens  or 
shortens  the  pace,  without  changing  the  direction  in 
order  to  recover  his  place. 

To  rectify  the  distances,  the  degrees  of  obliquity,  and 
to  be  assured  that  the  guides,  as  well  as  the  other  troop- 
ers, are  in  the  same  direction,  the  instructor  halts  the 
column  at  the  commands:  1.  Column;  2.  Halt.  The 
column  is  put  again  in  motion  in  the  oblique  direction 
at  the  comjuands :  1.  Column  forward  ;  2.  March. 

Tlie  platoon  marcliiiig  in  column  by 
twos  or  by  fours,  to  form  it  to  tbe 
front,  to  the  left,  or  on  rigbt,  into  line. 

The  platoon  marching  in  co'Iumn  right  in  front,  to 
form  line  to  the  front,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.         4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  continue  to  march  forward ;  the  other  ranks  of 
twos  (or  fours)  oblique  to  the  left,  march  in  this 
direction,  and  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right  on 
coming  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in 
the  platoon. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands  halt.  At  this  command, 
they  halt  square  to  the  front;  the  other  files  come 


88  THE   PLATOON. 

up  and  form  successively  on  their  left,  and  dress  to 
the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — Dress  im- 
mediately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  when 
the  last  rank  of  twos  or  fours  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Front  into  line;  2. 
March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5.  Front. 

Tlie  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  lineuj^n 
its  left  flank,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Left  into  line.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  turn  to  the  left  and  move  straight  forward ; 
the  other  ranks  of  twos  (or  fours)  continue  to  march 
on,  and  at  3  paces  before  arriving  opposite  the  place 
they  are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon,  turn  successively 
to  the  left. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands,  halt.  At  this  command, 
the  first  files  halt ;  the  others  come  up  and  form 
successively  on  their  left,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  im- 
mediately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  when 
the  two  (or  four)  last  files  are  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
its  right  flank,  the  movement  is  executed  following  the 


THE  PLATOON.  89 

same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands: 
1.  Right  into  line ;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  if// — Dress; 
5.  Front. 

The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
the  prolongation,  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  On  right  into  line  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  turn  to  the  right  and  move  straight  forward ; 
the  other  ranks  of  twos  (or  fours)  continue  to  march 
on,  and  each  turns  successively  to  the  right,  at  3 
paces  beyond  the  point  where  the  preceding  rank 
has  turned. 

When  the  first  files  have  marched  20  paces,  the 
instructor  commands,  halt.  At  this  command,  the 
first  files  halt  square  upon  the  line ;  the  other  files 
come  up  and  form  successively  on  their  left,  and 
dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  conimand  right — dress,  im- 
mediately afer  that  of  halt,  and  commands  front  when 
the  two  (or  four)  last  files  are  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  to  form  line  upon 
the  prolongation  und  in  advance  of  its  left  flank,  the 
movement  is  executed  following  the  same  principles, 
but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  On  left  into 
line;  2.  March  ;  3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5.   March. 

The  foregoing  explanations  have  been  given  for  move- 
ments twos  or  by  fours,  in  orJer  to  avoid  repetition  ;  but 
tliey  are  executed  by  fours  only  after  obtaining  the  ne- 
cessary precision  in  the  exercises  by  twos.  When  these 
8* 


90  THE   PLATOON. 

movements  have  been  executed  with  regularity  at  the 
walk,  they  arc  repeated  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

To  form  tlie  platoon  to  the  left  in  one 

rank. 

The  platoon  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  ilie  instruc- 
tor coniniands  : 

1.  Left  into  single  rank.         4.  Halt. 

2.  March.  5.   Right — Dress. 

3.  Front  6.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  moves 
forward  6  paces,  dressing  by  the  riglit ;  the  trooper 
on  tlie  left  of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  left  and 
moves  forward ;  he  is  followed  by  all  the  other 
troopers  of  that  rank,  who  execute  successively  the 
same  movement. 

At  the  command  front,  the  trooper  on  the  left 
of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  rights  and  the  other 
troopers  successively,  when  they  have  arrived  nearly 
opposite  the  places  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  rank. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  on  the  left 
halts,  and  successively  the  others,  on  arriving  abreast 
of  him. 

At  the  command  Right — Dress,  all  the  troopers 
of  the  rear  rank  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  6th  command,  which  is  front,  turn  the 
head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  3d  command,  whicli  is  front, 
the  moment  that  one-third  of  the  rear  rank  in  column 
have  passed  the  front  rank  ;  he  commands  ri^ht — duess, 
when  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  luis  fronted. 


THE   PLATOON.  91 

Manual  of  arms. 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  the  troopers  execute 
at  a  halt  the  manual  of  arms. 

To  form  the  platoon  to  the  right  in  two 
ranks. 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  the  instructor  desig- 
nates the  trooper  who  is  to  be  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  also  the  one  to  be  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank, 
and  commands  : 

1.  Right  into  two  ranks.  3.  Rigid — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  moves 
forward  6  paces,  dressing  by  the  right  j  the  trooper 
on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  turns  to  the  right  as 
soon  as  the  front  rank  has  passed,  and  moves  for- 
ward obliquing  to  the  right;  when  he  is  nearly  in 
rear  of  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank, 
he  fronts  by  turning  to  the  left.  All  the  other 
troopers  execute  successively  the  same  movement, 
placing  themselves  exactly  behind  their  file-leaders, 
and  at  their  proper  distances. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  all  the  troopers 
align  themselves  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

« 

Tlic  instructor  gives  the  command  right — dress,  when 
the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  has  tinned  to 
the  front. 


92  THE   PLATOON. 

The  exercise  being  finished,  the  troopers  are  ordered 
to  dismount  and  file  off". 

At  the  command  prepare  to  dismount,  the  assistant 
instructor  moves  12  paces  to  the  front,  and  faces  the 
platoon  by  a  turn-about  to  the  left ;  at  the  same  com- 
mand the  file-closer  reins  back  4  paces,  and  dismounts 
with  the  platoon. 

To   form  twos  and  fours  at  the  same 

gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in 
front,  to  form  twos,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Form  twos,  2.  jMarch. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  continues 
to  march  on,  and  halts  when  it  has  marched  10 
paces ;  the  second  file  obliques  to  the  left,  and 
comes  up  abreast  of  the  first;  on  arriving  there,  it 
halts  and  dresses  to  the  right.  All  the  other  files 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  Nos.  2  and  4 
executing  their  movement  in  the  same  manner,  but 
successively,  and  when  Nos.  1  and  3,  upon  which 
they  should  form,  have  nearly  arrived  at  their 
proper  distances,  and  are  about  to  halt. 

The  i)latO'»n  marchin<;  in  cohimn  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to   form  fours,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  fours.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  first  files  con- 
tinue to  march  on,  and  halt  when  they  have 
marched  10  paces;  the  two  following  files  oblique 
to  the  left,  and  come   up   abreast  of  the  two  first; 


THE   PLATOON.  93 

on  arriving  there,  they  halt  and  dress  to  the  right. 
All  the  other  files  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward, Nos.  3  and  4  executing  their  movement  in 
the  same  manner,  but  successively,  and  when  Nos. 
1  and  2,  upon  which  they  should  form,  have  nearly 
arrived  at  their  proper  distance  and  are  about  to 
halt. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  trot,  the  Ibnnation  of  twos 
and  fours  at  the  same  gait  is  executed  following  the  same 
principles.  The  first,  or  two  first  files,  past  to  the  walk, 
at  the  command  march;  the  others  continue  to  maich 
at  the  trot,  until  they  have  arrived  abreast  of  those  on 
which  they  should  form;  then  they  pass  to  the  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  gallop,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted following  the  same  principles.  The  first,  or  two 
first  files  pass  to  the  trot  at  the  command  march  ;  the 
others  continue  to  march  at  the  gallop,  until  they  have 
executed  their  formation  ;  then  they  pass  to  the  trot. 

When  twos  or  fours  are  formed  at  the  trot  or  at  tJie 
gallop,  the  guide  is  announced  as  soon  as  the  first  files 
have  doubled.  In  executing  the  same  movements  at  a 
walk,  as  the  head  of  the  column  halts,  the  guide  is  not 
announced. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  these  movements 
are  executed  following  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

To  break  by  twos  and  by  file  at  tlie 
same   gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  twos,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  B^  twos.        2.  March.         3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  hy  twos,  all  the  troopers  pre- 
pare to  halt,  except  Nos.  1  and  2  of  the  leading  files. 


94  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  Nos.  1  and  2  of  the 
leading  files  continue  to  march  at  the  same  gait; 
all  the  others  halt.  Files  3  and  4  of  the  leading 
rank  oblique  to  the  right  the  moment  they  are 
passed  by  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank 
of  Nos.  i  and  2,  and  place  themselves  in  column 
behind  them. 

Each  rank  of  fours  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  files  1  and  2  breaking  as  soon  as 
files  3  and  4  of  the  rank  which  precedes  tliem  have 
V commenced  obliquing,  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

Files  1  and  2,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate 
their  gate,  so  as  to  preserve  their  distances ',  and 
files  3  and  4  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as  not  to 
constrain  the  movements  of  files  1  and  2. 

'Tlie  platoon    marching   in    column  by  twos,  right  in 
frontj'to  break  by  file,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Bi/Jile.  2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  jile^  all  the  troopers  prepaire 
to  halt  except  the  right  file  of  the  leading  rank  of 
twos. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  file  of  the 
leading  rank  of  twos  continues  to  march  at  the  same 
gait,  all  the  others  halt.  The  left  file  of  this  same 
rank  obliques  to  the  rii2;ht  the  moment  it  is  passed 
by  the  croup  of  the  rear  rank  horse  of  No.  1,  and 
places  itself  in  column  behind  the  first  file. 

Each  rank  of  twos  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  files  1  and  3  breaking  as  soon  as 
files  2  and  4  who  precede  them  have  commenced 
obliquing  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 


THE   PLATOON.  ^  95 

Files  1  and  3,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate 
their  gait  so  as  to  have  their  distances.  Files  2 
and  4  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as  not  to  con- 
strain the  movements  of  files  1  and  3. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  by  twos  m 
by  file  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  ;.  the  right  files 
of  the  leading  rank  continue  at  the  trot ;  all  the  otliers  take 
the  walk  at  the  command  march,  and  resume  the  trot  in 
order  to  enter  the  column  ;  when  the  column  is  at  the 
gallop,  the  files  which  are  to  break  take  the  trot  at  the 
command  MARCH,  and  afterwards  resume  the  gallop  on 
entering  the  column. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  files  which  break,  halt, 
change  gait,  and  put  themseWes  again  in  motion,  with 
steadiness;  that  they  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as  not 
to  retard  the  movements  of  those  which  only  march  for- 
ward, and  that  they  retake  successively  their  distances, 
their  directions  and  their  original  gait. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed,  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  By  twos  (or  by  file)  from 
the  left-,  2.  MARCa.  If  the  column  marches  by  twos,  the 
guide  is  indicated  to  the  right,  immediately  after  the 
command  MARCH. 

To  form  twos  and  fours,  doubling  the  gait, 

The  platoons  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in 
front,  to  form  twos  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Form  twos — trot.  3    Guide  left 

t.  March. 

At  the  command /orw  twos — trot^  all  the  troopers 
prepare  to  take  the  trot,  except  the  leading  file. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  take 
the  trot,  except  the  leading   file ;  the  second  file 


96  THE   PLATOON. 

obliques  to  the  left,  and  comes  up  abreast  of  the 
first;  on  arriving  there  it  takes  the  walk ;  all  the 
other  files  continue  to  march  forward  at  the  trot. 
Files  4  and  2  execute  their  movement  in  the  same 
manner,  but  successively,  when  3  and  1,  upon  whom 
they  are  to  form,  have  nearlv  arrived  at  their  dis- 
tance, and  are  about  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

The  platoon  marcliiug  in  cohimn  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  form  fours  the  ins^tructor  commands  : 

\.  Form  fours — trot.  3.  Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command ybrm/bwr.s — trot,  all  the  troop- 
ers prepare  to  take  the  trot,  except  the  two  leading 
files. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  ta.ke 
the  trot,  except  the  two  leading  files ;  the  two  fol- 
lowing files  oblique  to  the  left,  and  come  up  abreast 
of  the  two  first;  -on  arriving  there  they  resume  the 
walk  ;  all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  forward 
at  the  trot.  Files  3  and  4  execute  their  movement 
in  the  same  manner,  butsuccessively,  when  files  1  and 
2,  upon  whom  they  are  to  form,  have  nearly  arrived 
at  their  distance,  and  are  about  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

When  the  cohimn  is  at  the  trot,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted on  the  same  pvinciph?s.  At  the  command  march, 
aU  the  troopers  pass  to  the  gallop,  except  the  files  at  the 
head  of  the  cohimn,  and  resume  the  trot  wlien  tlicir  for- 
mation is  executed. 

When  the  cohimn  is  at  the  gallop,  the  movement  to 
form  twos  or  fours  is  always  executed  at  the  same  gait. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is 
executed,  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  ;  1.  Form  twos  (or  form  fours) — 
trot;  2.  March;  3.   Guide  right. 


THE   TROOPER.  97 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  first  file  to  oblique 
does  so  iinniediately  after  the  coiTimand  MARCH  ;  that  the 
gait  is  doubled  with  ivioderatiou:  that  the  formation  ex- 
tends itself  successively  from  the  head  to  the  rearof  the 
column,  the  files  who  march  straight  forward  keeping 
their  horses  well  in  hand  to  prevent  tlieir  following  those 
which  oblique;  he  observes  also  that  the  files  which 
oblique  do  so  a  little  before  arriving  at  their  distance 
particidarly  in  marching  by  fours  ;  and  that  they  never 
]mss  beyond  the  alignn»ent  of  those  on  whom  they  are  to 
form. 

To  break  b^    twos  and  by  file  doubling 
tlie  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  instruc- 
tor commands : 

1.  By  twos — trot.  3.   Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  twos — trotj  files  1  and  2  of 
the  leading  rank  of  fours  prepare  to  trot. 

At  the  command  march,  they  commence  the 
trot ;  all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at  the 
walk  ;  files  3  and  4  take  the  trot  successively  and 
oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves  in 
column  behind  files  1  and  2. 

The  movement  being  terminated,  the  instructor  orders, 
the  walk. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  file  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  file — trot,  2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file — trot,  the  right  file  of 
the  leading  rank  of  twos  prepares  to  trot. 
9 


98  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  it  commences  the  trot ; 
all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at  the  walk  ; 
files  2  and  4  assume  the  trot  successively  and 
oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves 
behind  files  1  and  3  in  the  column. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  doubling  tlie 
gait,  the  iiiiStructor  commands  :  1.  By  twos  (or  by  file) — 
gallop  ;  2  March  ;  which  is  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  movement 
to  break  by  twos  or  by  file  is  executed  at  the  same  gait. 

In  these  morements,  the  instructor  observes  that  the 
head  of  the  column  changes  ga-it  with  moderation,  and 
that  the  troopers  who  follow  do  not  permit  their  horses 
to  move  off  before  the  moment  prescribed. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  i? 
executed,  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  By  twos  (or  by  file)  from  th£ 
left — trot  ;  2.  March.  If  the  cohinin  is  to  march  by  twos, 
the  guide  is  indicated  to  the  right,  immediately  after  thg 
command  MARCH. 

As  it  is  important  for  the  precision  and  regularity  of 
these  movements  that  the  troopers  should  not  forget  their 
numbers,  the  instructor  should  assure  himself  of  it  from 
time  to  time. 

Direct  marcli  of  the  platoon  in  line. 

The  principles  of  the  direct  march  give  the  troopers 
the  means, 

1st.  Of  preserving  the  alignments  in  marching,  without 
being  disunited. 

2d.  Of  not  closing  too  much,  and  of  recovering  the  re- 
quired distances  when  they  have  closed. 

3d.  Of  not  opening,  and  of  closing  upon  each  other 
again  when  they  have  opened. 


THE   PLATOON.  99 

4th.  Of  not  throwing  the  guide  out  of  his  direction, 
and  of  i)enniitiiig  him  to  return  to  it  if  he  has  been 
forced  out. 

The  most  important  point  in  the  direct  march 
being  to  keep  the  horses  straight  in  the  ranks,  it  is 
indispensable  that  the  troopers  shouki  preserve  the 
head  direct. 

To  keep  themselves  aligned,  the  troopers  should 
feel  lightly  the  boot  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the 
guide,  and  march  at  an  equal  gait. 

TJbe  troopers  should  yield  to  all  pressure  coming 
from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming 
from  the. opposite  side. 

The  guide  should  always  march  at  a  free  and 
steady  gait,  and  change  it  with  steadiness  in  order 
to  avoid  irregularity  in  the  ranks. 

If  the  .troopers  are  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  align- 
ment, too  near  to  or  too  far  from  the  man  on  the 
side  of  the  guide,  they  move  from  or  approach  him 
gradually,  and  in  gaining  ground  to  the  front. 

When  the  guide  feels  himself  thrown  out  of  his 
direction,  he  extends  his  arm  to  the  front  to  in- 
dicate that  there  is  too  much  pressure  towards  him, 
the  troopers  give  a  glance  to  the  guide,  relieve 
him  .and  straighten  their  horses  as  soon  as  he  is 
relieved. 

The  corporal  of  the  flank  opposite  to  the  guide,  is  not 
required  to  preserve  the  head  direct.  He  aligns  himself 
upon  the  guide  and  the  gener^il  front  of  the  platoon. 

The  guide  is  commanded  alternately  to  the  right  and 
to  the  left,  that  the  troopers  may  have  the  habit  of  dress- 
ing equally  towards  either  direction. 

When  the  platoon  is  halted,  the  alignment  is  ordered 
|t^  towards  the  side  of  the  guide. 


100  THE   PLATOON. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  exercise  tlie  platoon  at 
the  direct  march,  it  is  conducted  to  the  extremity  of  a 
ground  of  sufficient  extent  to  admit  of  its  marching  some 
time  without  changing  the  direction. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  tlie  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Open  files  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right?) 

2.  March. 

3.  Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers,  except 
the  right  file,  passage  to  the  left,  as  prescribed,  the 
second  trooper  straightens  his  horse  andhaltsas  soon 
as  he  has  gained  an  interval  of  1  pace  between  him- 
self and  the  trooper  of  the  right. 

Each  of  the  other  troopers  executes  the  same 
movement,  regulating  the  interval  by  the  trooper 
on  his  right. 

The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  follow  their  file- 
leaders,  and  keep  at  their  proper  distances. 

The  instructor  orders  the  alignment  the  moment  the 
second  trooper  from  the  right  has  attained  his  interval. 

The  troopers  being  aligned,  the  instructor  indicates  to 
the  guide  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  a  fixed  point  in  a 
direction  |)erpendicular  to  tlie  front  of  the  platoon;  he 
instructs  him  to  take  an  intermediate  point,  never  to 
lose  sight  of  these  two  points,  in  order  to  keep  himself 
always  in  the  proper  direction,  and  to  select  a  more 
distant  point  as  he  approaches  the  one  nearest  to  him. 

To  give  a  point  of  direction,  the  instructor  places  him- 
self exactly  behind  the  right  file,  or  the  left  file,  and  in- 
dicates to  the  trooper  of  the  front  rank  an  object  on  the 
ground  which  is  immovable  and  can  be  distinctly  seen, 
such  as  a  house,  a  steeple,  a  mill,  a  tree  ;  the  trooper  of 
the   rear    rank    keejis  himself  always  in  file  and  at  his 


THE   PLATOON.  101 

proper  distance,  so  tliat  tlie  front  rank  man  will  conceal 
from  hirn  the  point  of  direction  indicated. 

To  march  the  platoon  forward,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoon    forward, 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left.^ 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  move 
straight  forward,  at  the  same  gait  with  the  men  on 
the  side  of  the  guide. 

As  the  troopers  are  not  boot  to  boot,  they  should 
give  a  glance  from  time  to  time  towards  the  guide. 

Durinjjj  the  march  tlie  instructor  is  sometimes  at  the 
side  of  the  guide,  to  assure  himself  that  the  troopers 
march  on  the  same  line;  and  sometimes  beliind  the 
guide,  to  observe  that  he  follows  the  direction  indicated. 

To  halt  the  platoon,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Platoon.         8.  Right  (ov  Left) — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  Halt,  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align  them- 
selves. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  troopers  having  been  sufhciently  exercised  in 
marching  with  cpen  files,  the  instructor  halts  the  platoon, 
and  commands  : 

1.  Close  files  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 

2.  March. 

3.  Right  (or  lefil — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

9* 


102  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  except 
the  right  file  passage  to  the  right,  as  prescribed,  and 
resume  their  places  boot  to  boot. 

After  having  dressed  the  platoon,  it  is  marched  with 
files  closed. 

The  troopers  march  straight  forward,  feeling 
lightly  the  boot  towards  the  side  of  the  guide. 

When  the  troopers  begin  to  manage  their  horses  pro- 
perly at  the  ivalk,  they  are  required  to  open  and  close 
files,  marchingat  thesamegait,  takingcare  not  to  repeat 
these  movementstoo  often,  but  to  make  them  march  some 
time  after  having  opened  the  files,  before  closing  them, 
and  after  having  closed  the  files,  before  opening  them  ; 
for  this  purpose  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Open  files  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right.) 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  all  the  troopers  except 
the  right  file  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  left,  at 
the  same  time  advancing,  and  preserving  their  j 
alignment;  when  they  are  at  one  pace  from  the 
man  on  the  right,  they  straighten  their  horses  and 
move  forward. 

To  close  files,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Close  files  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.y 

2.  March.  ^ 

This  movement  is  executed  following  the  samel 
principles,  but  by   inverse  means.     Each  trooper^ 
should  close  the  leg  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent 
his  horse  from  pressing  against   the  one  on  which 
he  closes. 


THE   PLATOON.  103 

Tl:e  files  are  always  opened  towards  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide,  and  closed  upon  him. 

These  movements  having  been  executed  to  the  right 
and  to  the  left  in  marching  at  (he  walk,  they  are  repeated 
at  the  trot,  passing  frequently  from  the  walk  to  the  trot 
and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk. 

The  platoon  is  then  exercised  in  commencing  the  trot 
from  a  halt,  and  in  halting  while  marching  at  this  gait. 

Counter-marcli. 

The  platoon  having  arrived  at  the  extremity  of  the 
ground,  in  order  to  change  the  direction  the  instructor 
commands : 

^    1.    Counter-march — hy  the  right  flank. 

2.  By  file  to  the  right. 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  counter-march — hy  the  right 
Jlank,  the  assistant  instructor  places  himself  facing 
to  the  rear  at  6  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  and  in 
such  a  position  that  the  trooper  who  is  to  be  placed 
on  his  left  may  find  himself  in  the  direction  of  the 
left  file  of  the  platoon.  The  file-closer  places  him- 
self on  the  right  of  the  platoon,  facing  to  the  right, 
the  croup  of  his  horse  1  pace  from  and  on  the  line 
of  haunches  of  the  horses  of  the  rear-rank,  in  order 
to  mark  the  wheeling  point. 

At  the  command  march,  the  trooper  on  the  right 
of  each  rank  turns  to  the  right,  the  rear-rank  man 
joining  in  his  movement  the  front-rank  man  ;  they 
then  wheel  together  to  the  right,  the  latter  length- 
ening a  little  his  gait;  they  pass  before  the  file- 


104  THE   PLATOON. 

closer,  very  near  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the 
rear-rank,  and  are  followed  by  the  other  troopers, 
who  execute  successively  the  same  movement,  taking 
care  to  pass  over  the  same  ground. 

When  the  first  file  is  within  two  paces  of  the  assistant- 
instructor,  who  indicates  tlie  j)ointon  which  it  is  to  form, 
the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Front.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  commands  front  and  halt,  the  first  file 
turns  to  the  left  and  halts,  the  trooper  of  the  rear- 
rank  taking  care  to  slacken  the  pace  and  place 
himself  exactly  behind  his  file-leader.  All  the 
other  files  execute  successively  the  same  movement. 

At  the  last  command,  which  is  front,  turn  the 
head  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  J'ight — dress  imme- 
diately after  that  of  halt,  and  commands  FRONT  when  the 
last  file  is  aligned. 

The  assistant-instructor  and  file-closer  return  to  their 
places. 

The  counter-march  is  executed  by  the  lefr,  on  the 
same  principles,  at  the  comnuinds  :  1.  Cimnter-march — 
by  the  left  flank  :  2  By  file  to  the  left:  3.  March.  And 
afterwards  :  1,  Front  :  2.  Halt  :  3.  Left — Dress  :  4.  Front. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  execute  with 
steadiness  their  turns  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  that 
they  place  themselveson  a  line  parallel  to  theone  origin- 
ally occupied  by  the  platoon. 

The  counter-march  should  be  generally  executed  ai^Ae 
trot.  For  this  purpose,  after  the  second  command,  the 
instructor  indicates  the  gait. 


THE  PLATOON.  105 


Wheelings. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  wheels  :  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot  and  the  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

Tlic  wheel  is  always  on  njixed  pivot,  except  when  the 
command  is  right  (or  left) — turn. 

The  troopers  should  execute  this  movement  without 
disuniting,  and  without  ceasing  to  observe  the  alignment. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  conductor  of  tlie  marching 
flank  should  measure  with  his  eye  the  arc  of  the  circle 
he  is  to  pass  over,  so  that  it  may  not  be  necessary  for  the 
files  either  to  open  or  close.  He  turns  his  head  occa- 
sionally towards  the  pivot;  if  he  perceives  that  the 
troopers  are  too  much  crowded,  or  too  open,  he  increases 
or  diminishes  grachuilly  the  extent  of  his  circle,  gaining 
more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side. 

Each  trooper  of  the  front  rank  should  describe  his  cir- 
cle in  the  ratio  of  the  distance  at  which  he  may  be  from 
the  pivot.  As  these  ditlerent  arcs  are  all  passed  over  in 
the  same  time,  it  is  necessary  that  each  trooper  shouhl 
slacken  his  pace  in  proportion  to  the  ilistance  from  the 
marching  flank. 

During  the  wheel,  the  troopers  should  turn  the  head 
slightly  towards  the  marching  flank,  to  regulate  tlie  ra- 
pidity of  their  march  and  to  keep  themselves  aligned; 
they  should  also  feel  lightly  the  boot  on  the  side  of  the 
pivot,  in  order  to  remain  closed  to  that  side.  They  should 
nevertheless  yield  to  pressure  coming  from  the  pivot,  and 
resist  that  from  the  opposite  direcflfen.  The  horses  are 
slightly  turned  towards  the  pivot,  in  order  to  keep  them 
upon  the  circular  line  they  have  to  pass  over. 

When  the  trooj)ers  have  ojiened,  they  should  approach 
the  pivot  insensibly,  diminishing  their  circle  by  degrees, 
gaining  more  ground  to  the  front  than  to  the  side.  In 
this  case,  they  give  alternately  a  glance  to  the  pivot  and 
to  the  marching  flank,  taking  care  not  to  force  the  pivot. 

When  the  trooi)ers  have  closed  too  much,  they  should 
endeavor  to  correct  the  faidt  gradually,  increasing  their 


106  THE   PLATOON 

circle  by  lief^jrecs,  and  painiMg  more  ground  to  the  front 
than  to  the  side.  For  this  purpose,  they  give  alternately 
a  glance  to  the  marching  flank  and  to  tlie  pivot,  taking 
care  to  feel  liglitly  the  boot  towards  the  side  of  pivot. 
^  In  every  kind  of  wheel  the  troopers  should  cease 
wheeling,  and  retake  the  direct  inarch  at  the  command 
FORWARD,  at  whatever  point  of  the  wheel  they  may  be  ; 
it  is  necessary  to  observe,  also,  that  the  flanks  which  be- 
come pivots,  or  marching  flanks,  do  not  slacken  or  aug- 
ment the  pace  before  the  command  of  execution. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The. object  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  is,  when  the 
platoon. forms  a  part  of  the  squadron,  to  pass  from  the 
order  of  battle  to  the  order  of  column,  and  from  the  order 
of  column  to  the  order  of  battle. 

The  trooper  who  forms  the  pivot  of  the  wheel  turns 
upon  his  own  ground,  without  advancing  or  reiuing-back 
and  without  passing  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  so  that 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  his  horse  remains  always  on  the 
same  point.  Thus,  in  wheeling  to  the  right,  the  shoulders 
of  the  pivot  horse  describe  an  arc  of  circle  in  passing 
from  left  to  right,  while  the  haunches  describe  another 
in  passing  from  right  to  left. 

The  trooper  at  the  pivot  should  tiun  his  head  slightly 
towards  the  marching  flank,  that  he  may  continue  aligned 
on  tlie  conductor  of  Aat  flank. 

When  the  platoon  is  marching,  the  pivot  halts,  and  the 
marching  flank  executes  its  movement  at  the  same  gait 
as  before  the  wheel. 

If  the  instructor  indicates  a  new  gait,  in  order  to 
wheel,  the  marching  flank  wheels  at  this  gait ;  all  the 
other  troopers,  who  regulate  the  rapidity  of  their  march 
in  accordance  with  their  distance  from  the  marching 
flank,  take  freely  the  new  gait  at  the  command  forward. 

When  the  platoon  is  halted  after  a  wheel  on  a  fixed 


THE   PLATOON.  107 

pivot,  the  alignment  is  always  ordered  toward  tlie  side 
of  the  marching  llanjc ;  but  as  tlie  pivot  should  never 
move  from  its  place,  the  marching  flank  should  come  up 
abreast  of  it. 

When  the  platoon  is  marched  forward  after  a  wheel 
on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  guide  is  ordered  on  the  side  of  the 
marching  flank,  immediately  after  the  command  for- 
ward, unless  the  movement  of  the  platoon  in  the  squad- 
ron requires  the  contrary. 

The  wheelings  are  executed  at  first  in  single  rank  ;  for 
this  purpose,  the  front  rank  is  marched  forward,  and 
halted  when  arrived  at  a  distance  from  the  rear  rank 
equal  to  double  its  iront;  the  file-closer  remains  at  his 
place;  the  assistant  instructor  places  himself  behind  the 
front  rank;  each  of  them  observes  the  rank  behind 
which  he  is  placed. 

The  ranks  being  aligned,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  right  (or  left)  wlicel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  put  them- 
selves in  motion^  turning  the  head  towards  the 
marching  flank.  The  non-commissioned  officer  who 
conducts  this  flank  marches  at  a  icalk,  measuring 
with  the  eye  the  extent  of  the  circle  he  is  to  pass 
over,  that  neither  opening  nor  closing  may  be 
caused  in  the  rank,  and  that  the  troopers  may 
keep  aligned.  The  pivot  man  turns  upon  his  o'wn 
ground,  regulating  himself  upon  the  marching 
flank. 

The  instructor  directs  the  troopers  to  avoid  as  far  as 
practicable,  alt  pressure  in  the  ranks,  which  would  cause 
confusion  on  extended  fronts  and  at  rapid  gates. 

When  the  platoon  has  executed  several  wheels,  to  halt 
it,  the  instructor  commands: 


108  THE  PLATOON. 

1.  Platoon.  3.  Left  (or  ri<jht) — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  straighten 
their  horses  and  lialt  with  steadiness. 

At  the  command  hft  (or  right) — dress,  they 
align  themselves  towards  the  side  indicated. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

Tlic  two  ranks  are  tlien  marched  forward,  preserving 
between  them  the  same  distance,  and  niaile  to  recom- 
mence the  wlieel.  Wlien  the  insiructor  wishes  the  pla- 
toon to  take  tlie  direct  march,  he  commands 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  left  (or  right.') 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 
pivot  resumes  the  gait  at  which  it  was  previously 
marching. 

All  the  other  troopers  straighten  their  horses, 
and  the  two  flanks  move  forward  at  the  same  gait, 
conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

At  the  connnand  guide  left  (or  right,)  the 
troopers  regulate  their  movement  towards  the  side 
indicated. 

When  the  troopers  have  executed  several  wheels  to 
the  right  and  to  the  left,  interrupted  occasionally  by  direct 
marches,  and  when  the  hort;es  become  cahii,  the  instruc- 
tor causes  theiri  to  pass  to  the  trot ;  after  several  wheels 
at  the  trot,  they  resume  the  walk. 

If  the  platoon  is  wheeling  to  the  right,  and  the  in- 
structor wishes  it  to  change  the  wheel  to  the  left  without 
halting  he  commands  : 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  left  wheel.        2.  March. 


THE    TLATOON,  109 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  flank  halts, 
and  becomes  the  pivot.  The  ii;j;ht  flank  assuming 
the  gait  at  which  the  left  flank  was  marching, 
moves  forward  and  describes  a  circle  proportionate 
to  the  extent  of  the  front.  All  the  other  troopers 
straighten  their  horses,  and  guide  them  so  as  to 
pass  over  new  circles  in  the  opposite  direction. 

Wlien  the  tiocipcrs  bejxin  to  wheel  regularly,  the  in- 
structor requires  the  conductors  of  the  inarching  fianks 
to  regulate  the  gait  so  as  to  arrive  together  in  line  and 
in  column. 

The  troopers  being  sufiiciently  exercised  at  the  wheels 
in  single  rank  at  the  walk  and  the  trot,  the  ranks  are 
closed  and  the  M-heels  exectited  by  platoon,  following 
the  same  gradation. 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  riglit  (or  left')  wheel. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  of  the 
front  rank  execute  this  movement,  as  prescribed. 
The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  turn  the  head  and 
carr}'  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank,  so  that 
each  one  may  be  out  of  the  direction  of  his  file 
leader  by  two  troopers.  For  this  purpose,  the  mo- 
ment the  wheel  commences,  each  rear  rank  man 
executes  a  qunrferturn  to  the  hft^  sustaining  the 
haunches  of  his  horse  with  the  right  leg,  when  the 
wheel  is  to  the  right,  (or  a  qnartcr-turu  to  the  right, 
sustaining  the  haunches  of  his  horse  with  the  left 
leg  when  the  wheel  is  to  the  left,)  keeping  during 
the  wheel  in  the  direction  of  his  new  file-leader,  and 
remaining  at  the  distance  ot  2  feet  from  the  front 
rank.  The  two  rear  rank  men  on  the  marchinc: 
10 


110  THE   PLATOON. 

flank,  who  are  without  file-leaders,  should  describe 

their  circle   without  being  farther  outside    of  the 

front  rank  than  is  necessary,  and  be  able  to  resume 

their  places  behind  their  file-leaders  easily.  During 

the  wheel,  they   should  regulate   their  gait  so  that 

the  rear  rank,  which  aligns  itself  upon  them,  u:ay 

be  at  its  proper  distance. 

« 
To  stop  the  wheel,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Platoon.         3.  Left,  (or  right) — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  i^latoon,  the  rear  rank  men 
straighten  their  horses  and  return  to  the  direction 
of  their  file-leaders. 

At  the  command  halt,  all  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  command  left  (or  right) — Dress,  they 
align  themselves  towards  the  side  indicated. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  platoon  is  then  marched  to  the  front,  and  made  to 
repeat  the  same  movement. 

Wlien  the  instructor  wishes  the  platoon  to  resume  the 
direct  march,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.  2.   Giude  left  (or  right. 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 
rear  rank  men  replace  themselves  behind  their  file- 
leaders,  and  march  straight  forward. 

The  platoon  wheeling  to  the  right,  to  wheel  to  the 
opposite  side  without  halting,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Platoon  in  circle  left  wheel.         2.  March. 


THE    PLATOON.  Ill 

At  the  command  platoon  in  circle  left  toJicd,  the 
rear  rank  men  return  to  the  direction  of  their  file- 
leaders. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  men 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  the  rear  rank  men 
carry  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank. 


The  instructor  gives  the  command  MARCH,  the  moment 
die  rear  rank  men  have  taken  up  the  direction  of  their 
file-leaders. 

To  give  the  troopers  the  habit  of  correcting  faults,  the 
jTivot  man  is  directed  to  bear  against  the  rank,  so  that 
the  other  troopers  feeling  the  pressure  from  that  direction, 
may  leaa'n  to  gain  ground  towards  the  marching  flank. 
The  pivot  is  then  directed  to  gain  ground  in  the  opposite 
direction,  vvliicli  would  require  the  other  troopers  to  ap- 
proach him  gradually. 

When  the  troopers  have  acquired  in  the  execution 
of  these  movements,  at  the  iralk^  the  intelligence  and 
skill  necessary  to  avoid  confusion,  they  are  repeated  at 
the  trot. 

The  platoon  being  halted,  to  place  it  in  a  direction 
perpendicular  to  the  original  front  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoon  right  (qy  left)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt.  * 

4.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  of  the 
wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  wken  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  terminated  its  wheel. 


112  THE   PLATOON. 

The  platoon  hoin;?  haltetl,  to  face  it  to  the  rear,  the 
instrnciur  ooinnuinds  : 

1.  Platoon  right-ahout  (ox  hft-ahoiif)  wheel. 

2.  March. 
8.  Halt. 

4.  Left   (or  riglit) — DrejsS. 

5.  Front. 

AVhich  is  executed  following  the  principles  just 
prescribed,  the  platoon  passing  over  a  half  circle. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  completed  the  half  circle,  and 
the  ])latoon  is  oji  a  line  parallel  to  the  orijjinal  front. 

The  platoon  bpin^r  halted,  to  place  it  towards  its  right 
in  a  direction  oblitjue  to  the  original  front,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Platoon  right  half  (or  left  half)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel 
on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  halt,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  nearly  completed  its  half-wheel  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left. 

1  Before  dressing  the  })latoon,  the  trooper  on  the  march- 

-is     ing  flank  is  made  to  come  up  abreast   of  the  |)ivot  man, 
f      so  that  the  other  troopers  will  not  hav*j  to  rein-back  in 
order  to  align  themselves. 

The  ])latoon  being  on  the  march,  the  same  movements 


^■■. 


THE   PLATOON,  113 

are  executed  at  tbe  commands:  1.  Platoonright  (or  hft) 
wheel,  right-ahoat  (or  h/t-about)  wheel  right-half  (or  left- 
half)  ivheel;  2.  March  j  3,  Forward;  4,  Guide  right  (or 
kft.) 

At  the  command  march,  the  wheeling  flank 
wheels  at  the  gait  at  which  the  platoon  was  march- 
ing; the  pivot  flunk  hults. 

At  the  third  command,  which  is  FORWARD,  the 
pivot  resunios  its  original  pace,  and  the  two  flanks 
move  forward  at  the  same  gait. 

These  movements  being  properly  executed  from  a  halt 
anil  at  the  walk,  are  repeated  tj^  the  trot* 

To  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

The  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot  is  employed  in  the 
successive  changes  of  direction  in  column. 

In  this  wheel  the  object  of  the  moveable  pivot  is  tv 
leave  by  dej^rees  the  ground  on  which  the  movement 
commences,  by  advancing  in  the  new  direction. 

The  conductor  of  the  marching  flank  should  increase 
his  g'aitand  describe  his  arc,  of  circle  so  as  to  cause  the 
files  neither  to  open  nor  close.  The  pivot  describes  an 
arc  of  Jive  pares,  slackening  the  gait.  In  eaeh  rank  the 
troopers  from  the  centre  to  the  marching  flank  increase 
the  gait  ])rogressively,  so  that  the  centre  man  preserve? 
the  gait  at  which  the  platoon  was  marchi\ig.  The  troop- 
ers from  the  centre  to  the  pivot  slacken  the  gait  progres- 
sively. At  the  end  of  the  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot, 
the  jjortio)!  of  the  rank  which  had  augmented  its  gait 
shoidd  flatdcen  it,  ami  that  which  had  slackened  its  gait 
should  augment  it.  All  the  troopers  straighten  their 
horses;  the  marching  flank  and  the  pivot  resume  the 
gait  at  which  they  originally  marched. 

The  platoon  being  on  the  march,  and  supposed  to  be 
10* 


114  THE  PLATOON. 

iho  head  of  the  cohinin,  to  cause  it  to  change  direction^ 
the  instructor  commands: 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right.) 
At  tin's  commaud,  the  assistant  instructor  commands  : 
1.  Left  (or  right) — TURN.  2.  FORWARD. 

At  the  first  part  of  the  first  coniniaud,  which  is- 
left  (or  right,)  the  pivot  prepares  to  slacken,  and 
the  maching  flank  to  augment  the  gait. 

At  the  second  part  of  the  same  eonimantl,  Avlnch 
is  TURN,  the  platoon  turns  to  the  left  or  to  the- 
right,  the  pivot  slackening  its  gait,  in  describing  a?* 
arc  of  fve paces  }  the  marching  flank  augments  its 
gait,  and  regulates  itself  by  the  pivot  during  the 
whole  of  the  wheel. 

At  the  last  command,  which  is  forward,  all  the 
troopers  straighten  their  horses,  the  pivot  and 
marching  flank  moving  forward  in  the  gait  at  which 
the  platoon  was  originally  marching. 

I'iie  troopers  not  liaving  been  exercised  to  wlieel  at 
the  gallop  on  a  fixed  pivot,  they  are  made  to  u'hecl  on  a 
moveaWe  jjivot  only  in  marching  at  the  ivalk,  that  the 
marching  flank,  which  s^houhl  increase  its  gait  will  have 
to  take  only  the  trot. 

To  exercise  the  troopers  in  wheeling  af  the  gallop  on  a 
lixed  pivot,  the  progression  established  Cor  the  exercise 
al  the  ivalk  and  at  the  trot  is  followed,  except  that  inten- 
tional faults  are  not  committed  in  order  to  be  corrected, 
;»nd  that  the  platoon  is  always  halted  before  changing 
flic  tliroction  of  the  wheel. 

The  instructor  changes  the  gait  frequently,  and  a  voids 
Sailoping  too  long  to  the  same  hand. 


THE   PLATOON.  115 

The  platoon  is  exercised  also  to  wheel  at  the  trot  anil 
at  the  galloj),  in  setting  out  from  a  halt,  and  to  halt  while 
wheeling  at  these  gaits. 

Individual  oblique  marcli. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
ground,  towards  one  of  its  flanks,  without  changing  the 
front,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Ri'Dht  (or  Ic/t)  oblique.  2.   MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  execute 
all  at  the  same  time  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right,  so 
that  the  head  of  each  horse  may  be  opposite  the 
lower  part  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  on  his  right, 
and  that  the  right  knee  of  each  trooper  may  be  in 
rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  trooper  on  his  right. 
The  first  movement  being  executed,  the  troopers 
move  forward  in  the  new  direction,  regulating 
themselves  upon  the  guide. 

When  the  platoon  has  obliquetl  sufficiently,  the  in- 
structor commands  : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  straighten  their 
horses  and  move  forward,  regulating  themselves 
upon  the  guide. 

In  the  oblique  march,  the  guide  is  always  on  the  oF)- 
liqningside,  without  being  indicated  ;  and  after  the  com- 
mand forward,  the  guide  returns,  without  indication, 
to  the  side  on  which  it  was  originally. 

When  the  troopers  are  not  closed  they  should  increase 
progressively  the  gait,  in   order   to    approach  the  side 


116  THE   ILATOON. 

towards  which  they  march  ;  they  should  insensibly 
slacken  the  {^ait  if  tiiey  are  too  much  clo:?ed.  or  more 
advanced  than  the  flanlc  towards  which  tiiey  oblique. 
All  these  movements  are  executed,  gainin;^  more  ground 
to  the  front  than  to  the  &ide. 

The  platoou  marching  at  the  ivnlh  to  execute  the  ob- 
lique (it  the  trot,  the  iiistnictor  conunaiuls  :  1.  Right  (or 
left)  oblique — trot:  2.   March. 

When  tlie  platoon  has  obliqued  snfliciently,  the  in- 
striutor  commands  :  Forwaud. 

The  guide  observes  particularly  to  commence  the  trot 
without  precipitation. 

The  same  course  is  observed  if  the  platoon  is  marching 
at  thetrot^  and  the  object  is  to  oblique  at  the  gallop. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  fours  or  by  twos,  at  the  same 
gait. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Bf/  fours  (or  hi/  twos'). 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  coniniand  MARCH,  the  four  (or  two)  first 
files  of  tlic  ri^ht  continue  to  luarch  forward  at  the 
sanne  gait ;  the  other  files  halt  and  break  succes- 
sively, by  fours  (or  by  twos)  as  prescribed,  in 
breaking  from  a  halt. 

Tiie  platoon  n)avchin<<  in  line,  to  break  it  by  file  th< 
movement  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  the  firsj 
file  only  continuing  to  march  forward. 

The  platoon  marching  at  the  trot,  is  broken  on  the  sair 


THE  PLATOON.  117 

principles,  the  first  files  continuing  to  march  at  the  same 
fiait,  all  the  otlier  files  assume  the  walk  at  the  command 
MARCH,  and  resume  the  trot  as  they  break  from  the  pla- 
toon. 

The  same  course  isobserved  when  the  platoon  marches 
nt  the  gullop ;  the  first  files  continue  to  march  at  that 
gait,  the  others  re^^ume  the  trot  at  the  command  MARCH, 
and  resume  the  gallop  as  they  commence  to  oblique. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted fallowing  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse- 
means,  at  the  commands:  1.  By  fours  {ox  by  twos)  frovi  the 
left ;  2.  March  ;  3.   Guide  right. 

The  platoon  marcliiug  in  column  by 
twos  or  by  fours,  to  form  it  at  tKe 
same  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  in  front,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1    Form  platoon.      2.  March.       3.   Guide  right. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  front 
into  line.  • 

The  platoon  marching  in  column  at  the  trot,  right  in 
front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Form  platoon.     2.  March.      8.    Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  tlie  two  (or  four)  first 
^\q.s -pass  to  the  walk  ;  the  other  files  continue  to 
march  at  the  same  ptit,  oblique  immediately  to  the 
left,  march  straight  forward  in  this  direction,  make 
a  quarter-tnrn  to  the  right  on  coming   opposite  the 


118  THK   PLATOON. 

place  thi'V  arc  to  occupy  in  tlie  platoon,  and  pass 
(o  thr  xcdll:  on  arrivii)L'  upon  the  aliLMinicnt  of  the 
first. 

At  tlie  connnand  Guide  rijiu  they  dress  towards 
tljc  right. 

When  the  command  is  at  the  gallop,  tluj  iMiHoim  i> 
formed  on  tlie  sjamc  principles.  The  two  (or  four)  tir^it 
liles  take  the  trot,  at  the  coiiunainl  MAitCK  :  tlie  other 
files  comiiine  to  march  at  thf  gallop,  mul  take  the  trot  on 
arriving  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 

When  the  column  is  marching  by  file,  the  platoon  is 
formed  ofi  the  same  priiKnjile?. 

Tlu'  coluaini  marching  left  in  frvint,  the  plat<xjii  is 
formed  on  the  snme  principles,  hut  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  command:  1.  Form  platoon ;  '2.  Marc!I -,  3.  Guide 
left. 

The  platoon  mardiing  in  line,  to  ln-eak 
it  by  fours  or  ]>y  twos,  doubling  the 
gait. 

• 

The  instructor  commands: 

1.  }ii/   fours   (or  hy  ticoi) — trot. 

2.  Mahch. 

3.  'fiui'ffc  Uft. 

At  the  comniand  march,  tlic  four  (or  two)  first 
files  of  the  ri<rht  take  thv  trot ;  the  others  continue 
to  iiiarcli  at  (he  iniUc,  and  take  successively  tin  trot 
when  they  oblicjue  to  the  rii^ht.  in  order  to  enter 
the  column. 


THE   PLATOON.  119 

The  platoon  marching  at  the  trot,  the  instructor  coni' 
mands : 

1.  J5y  fours  (or  hi/  tiios) — gallop. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide,  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  by  lile^  the 
iTiovement  is  executed  on  the  same  principles^ 

When  tiie  platoon  marches  at  the  gallop,  it  is  always 
broten  without  doubling  the  gait. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at 
the  commanlls  :  1.  By  fours  (or  by  twos)  from  the  left — 
(7-ot  (or  gallop)  ]  2.  March  ;  3.   Guide  right. 

The  platoon  raarcliiiig  in  column  hj 
twos  or  by  foui^s,  to  form  it,  doubling 
the  gait. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  right  in  front,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Form  platoon — trot. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  (or  four)  first 
files  continue  to  march  forward  at  the  paine  .^ait; 
the  other  files  take  the  trot,  oblique  immediately  to 
the  left,  march  in  this  direction,  make  a  qnarter- 
turn  to  the  right  on  cominrr  opposite  the  place  they 
are  to  occupy  in  the  platoon,  and  pass  to  the  ivalk 
on  arriving  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 


120  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  command  guide  rijht,  they  dress  towards 
the  right. 

The  platoon  marching  in  column,  at  the  trot,  right  in 
front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1 .  Form  platoon — gallop, 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  the  phitoon  is  always 
formed  at  the  same  }iait. 

When  the  column  is  marchin<;  by  file,  the  platoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles. 

The   column    marching   left   in    front,   the   ])latoon  is 
formed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by   inverse  means, 
at  the  commands  :   ].  Fonn  platoon — trot  (ov  gallop);  2.' 
March  ;  3.  Guide  left. 

Movements  by  fours,  tlie  platoon  being 
in  column  or  in  line. 

The  platoon  being  in  column,  riyht  in  front,  the  in- 
stiuctor  commands : 

1.  B^  fours — left   (or   right)   icliccl. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  rank  of  four  exe- 
cutes its  wlieel  to  the  lel't,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples oF  tlie  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  Nos.  4  turn 
upon  themselves,  sustaining  with  the  left  leg  the 
liaunches  of  their  horses,  in  order  not  to  constrain 
the  movement  of  the  rank  immediately  behind 
them  ;  all  the  troopers  regulate  themselves  towards 
the  marching  flanks. 


THE    PLATOON.  121 

The  movement  being  nearly  completed  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Halt. 

2.  Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

3.  Front. 

At  the  comiiiand  halt,  the  troopers  straighten 
their  horses  and  halt  with  steadiness. 

In  this  movement,  the  front  and  rear-rank  execute, 
separately,  a  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  Each  rank  of  fours 
belonging  to  the  rear-rank  is  placed  at  tlie  side  of  the 
rank  of  fours,  composed  of  its  file  leaders.  When  the 
movement  is  terminated,  the  platoon  is  in  one  rank. 

The  platoon  being  in  one  rank,  it  is  put  again  in  col- 
umn by  the  commands  presciibed.then  the  troopers  of  the 
rear-rank  are  placed  in  front  of  their  file-leaders.  In 
executing  again  two  wheels  to  the  left  by  fours,  the  platoon 
is  put  in  its  natural  order. 

In  the  first  wheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  the  leading  rank  of 
fours  should  execnte  its  movement  slowly,  in  order  to 
give  the  others  time  to  execute  theirs;  but  in  the  sec- 
ond \vheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  the  last  rank  of  fours,  which 
becomes  head  of  the  column,  should  execute  its  move- 
ment in  lengthening  a  little  the  gait,  so  as  not  to  retard 
the  rear  of  the  column. 

Tlie  platoon  being  in  column,  and  having  executed  a 
wheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  which  puts  it  in  a  single  rank, 
to  face  it  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Bi/  fours  hft-ahout  (or   right-ahout)  ivheel. 

2.  Marcu. 

At   the  command  ivfARCii,  each   rank   of  fours 
wheels  to  the  left-about  on  the  principles  prescribed 
ior  the  wheel  to  the  left  by  fours. 
11 


122  THE    PLATOON. 

To  hall  after  being  wheeled  about,  the  instructor  coiu- 
mancls  : 

1.  Halt. 

2.  Ryjht  (or  left) — Dress. 

3.  Front. 

To  put  the  platoon  again  in  coluniii  in  the  natural 
ortier,  the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed  a  wheel  to  the 
left  by  fours. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  movement  is 
executed  as  prescribed,  observing  that,  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  the  pivots  halt  immediately  and  turn 
upon  themselves,  supporting  with  the  left  leg  the 
haunches  of  their  horses. 

The  movement  being  nearly  terminated,  the  instructor 
coiMmands  : 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  left^. 

At  the  first  command,  which  is  forward,  the 
pivots  and  all  the  other  troopers,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  direct  march,  regulate  themselves 
towards  the  guide. 

The  platoon  marching  in  colimm,  and  having  made 
one  wheel  to  the  left  by  fours,  whii-h  puts  it  in  single  rank, 
the  instructor  causes  lo  be  executed  a  wheel  to  the  left- 
about  (or  to  the  right-about)  by  fours ;  the  movement 
being  nearly  terminated,  he  commands: 

1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  riijht  (ov  left). 

To  p\it  tlie  J  latoon  again  in  column  in  the  natural  order, 
the  instructor  causes  to  be  executed  a  irhecl  to  the  left  (or 
to  the  right)  by  fours,  and  indicates  the  guide  to  the  left. 


THE   PLATOON.  123 

The  platoon  marching  in  cohimn  by  Jours,  rif<ht  in 
front,  to  cause  it  to  march  to  the  rear,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  By  fours  left-ahout  (or  right-about^  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  right  (or  left^. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed, 
observing  that  the  ranks  of  fours  should  finish  the 
movement  at  the  same  time  )  that  they  should  com- 
mence the  last  half  of  the  wheel  gently,  regulating 
themselves  upon  the  last  rank  of  fours,  which  be- 
coming the  head  of  the  column,  lengthens  the  gait 
so  as  not  to  retard  the  others.  After  this  move- 
ment, the  troopers  of  the  rear-rank  are  placed  in 
front  of  their  file-leaders. 

To  put  the  cohimn  again  in  the  natural  order,  the  in- 
structor causes  to  be  executed  a  icheel  to  the  right-about 
(or  to  the  left-about)  by  fours. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  right  or  towards  its  left,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  fours  right  (or  left^  icheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left  (or  right'). 

The  platoon  having  icheeled  to  the  right  hy  fours, 
the  troopers  are  formed  upon  a  front  of  eight. 
Each  rank  of  fours  having  executed  the  movement 
separately,  the  four  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  find 
themselves  on  the  right  of  the  four  troopers  of  the 


124  THE    TLATOON. 

front  rank.*     It  is  the  reverse  if  the  movement  is 
executed  by  the  left. 

TliPi  f)latoon  having  wheeled  to  the  rifrlil  (or  to  the  left) 
by  fours,  and  bein^  upon  a  front  of  oii^ht,  to  chanize  ihc 
cUrecticn,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Head  of  column  to  the,  left  (or  to  the  right^ 

At  this   command  the    assistant-instructor  commands : 

1.  Left  (or  ri/jfht) — Turn.         2    Forward. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  each  rank  of 
eight  wheeling  upon  the  same  ground  with  the  first 
as  they  reach  it. 

To  put  the  j)hitoon  again  in  lino,  the  inj^tructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Bi/  fours  left  (or  rijht)  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Rifjht  (or  left) — Bress. 

5.  Front. 

•When  it  is  necessary  to  break  a  platoon  by  fours, 
and  there  is  not  sufRcient  space  in  front,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  By  fours  right  (or  left)  wheel.      4.  March. 

2.  March.  f).  Guide  left  (or  right.) 

3.  By  fours. 

At  the  second  command,  the  platoon  wheels  to  the 
right  by  fours.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  lirst  set  of 
fours  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  moves  forward ; 
when  the  croups  of  their  horses  are  opposite  the  men  of 
the  set  of  fours  of  the  rear  ranlc  on  their  right,  this  set 
turn  their  horses'  heads  to  the  lelY,  and  by  an  oblique 
ni:n-(di  cover  their  front  rank  men  ;  and  so  on  succes- 
sively. The  sets  of  fours  of  the  front  rank,  take  care 
not  to  leave  inore  space  between  tliem,  and  the  set  of 
jburs  of  the  front  rank,  which  precedes  them,  than  is 
sufficient  to  admit  the  set  of  fours  from  the  rear  rank. 

This  movement  to  the  left  is  executed  by  inverse  means. 


THE   PLATOON.  125 

The  platoon  haviiifj;  wheeled  to  the  right  (or  to  the  left.) 
by  fours,  and  being  formed  upon  a  front  of  eight,  to  march 
to  the  rear  in  this  order,  the  instructor  causes  to  be  exe- 
cuted a  wheel  la  the  right  or  left-ahout. 

The  jilatoon  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  march  to  tlie 
rear,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  B^  fours  left-ahout  (or  right-ahout^  wheel. 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  riijht  (or  left>). 

After  this  movement,  the  rear  rank  is  before  the 
front  rank,  and  the  ranks  of  fours  are  inverted 
throughout  the  platoon. 

In  the  march  to  the  rear,  the  platoon  conforms  to  the 
principles  of  the  direct  march.  The  instructor  requires 
the  same  precision  as  when  they  march  in  the  natural 
order. 

Tlie  platoon  is  faced  tothefrontb}''  the  snme  movement. 

Before  commencing  the  movements  byybwrs,  the  in- 
structor assures  himself  that  the  troopers  know  tlieir 
numbers,  and  that  those  of  the  rear  rank  are  at  their  jiro- 
per  distance.  He  observes  that  the  pivots  do  not  slacken 
the  gait  at  the  jireparatory  command  ;  that  they  Imlt  and 
turn  without  reining  back,  at  the  command  march  ;  that 
they  gain  ground  to  neither  side,  and  sustain  the  haun- 
ches of  their  horses,  regulating  themselves  ujjon  the 
inarching  flanks;  finally,  that  the  men  on  the  marching 
flanks  turn  their  horses  slightly  towards  the  pivots,  and 
that  they  commence  and  close  the  niovement  gently. 

In  the  flank  movements,  the  assistant-instructor  places 
himself  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  abreast  of  the  leading 
rank  of  eight.     The  file-closer  turns  to  the  right  (or  to  the 
left),  and  marches  at  his   place   when  the  ])laloon  is  in  , 
line. 

In  the    wheels  to  the   right  or   Icft-about.   the  platoon 
being   in    line,    tlie    assistant-instructor    and    iile-closer 
wheel  about  separately,  and  are   placeil,  the  assistant- 
11* 


126  THE  PLATOON. 

instnirtor  bt'liiiid  tlie  centre  of  tlie  platoon,  tlie  file- 
closer  ill  front  of  the  centre  of  the  rear  rank  become  tlie 
front. 

The  movement^  by /ouj's  .should  be  execnted/ofAf  n'g'/i^ 
and  to  the  Icfl  aliernaiely,  and  at  all  the  i^aits,  except  the 
gallop. 

When  the  colninn  is  marching  rij^ht  in  front,  it  wheels 
by  Ion rs  to  the  le/t-about ;  and  when  left  in  front,  it 
wheels  by  fonrs  to  the  right-abont. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line  with  open  ranks,  and 
the  files  one  pace  apart,  the  tro(ipers  are  made  to  exe- 
cute the  manual  of  arms. 

The  platiton  marching  in  column  by  file,  the  troopers 
having  the  distance  of  r?  j)aces,  the  instructor  causes  the 
exercise  of  the  sabre  to  be  executed. 

Tiie  exercise  being  terminated,  tiic  troopers  are  or- 
dered to  dismount  and  file  ofi". 


To  charge  by  platoon. 

To  charge  by  platoon,  the  instructor  orders  the  sabre 
to  be  drawn.  The  platoon  is  commanded  by  the  as- 
sistant-instructor, that  the  instructor  juay  be  able  to 
move  where  ever  he    can  best  observe  the  faults. 

The  opposite  line  is  marked  out  'JOG  pai'cs  to  the  froiit. 
by  two  trt)0|)ers,  the  distiince  of  the  i'ront  of  the  plaioon 
apart,  and  lacing  each  other. 

To  eommiMice  the  move,  the  rl^sislallt-iu^t^n^;t()r  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoo'n  forward. 

2.  Guide  rlyht  (or  left). 
o.  March. 

When  the  platoon  has  marched  20  paces,  the  assis- 
tant-instructor commands  : 

1.   Trot.  2.  March. 


THE   PLATOON.  127 

At  60  paces  further,  he  coniinands  : 

1.   Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  80  j)aces  further,  he  commands  :  Charge. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  of  both  ranks 
take  the  position  of'r««8c — sabre.  They  give  hand 
and  lengthen  the  gallop,  without  losing  control  of 
their  liorses  or  disuniting. 

When  the  platoon  arrives  at  20  paces  fioni  the  troop- 
ers who  trace  the  new  line,  the  assistant-instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention. 

2.  Platoon. 

3.  Halt. 

4.  Rir/ht  (or  Irjt) — Dress. 

5.  Front. 

At  the  command  attention,  the  troopers  carry 
the  sabre  to  the  shoulder. 

At  the  command  j^/a toon,  they  take  the  trot. 

At  the  command  halt,  they  stop. 

At  the  command  riyht — Dress,  they  align  them- 
selves to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  troo[)crs  shouhl  be  exercised  at  the  cliarge  with 
the  greatest  care,  without  being  required  to  repeat  it  too 
ol'ten. 

Tlie  instructor  requires  i/?e  grt^Zo^  to  be  kept  up;  he  sees 
that  the  troopers  preserve  ease  in  the  ranks,  tliat  they 
hoUlalight  hand,  t^o  tliat  the  horses  not  being  constrained 
in  their  movements  niiiy  not  become  too  restive.  He 
observes  that  the  troopers  carry  the  upper  part  of  tlie 
body  a  little  forward,  in  order  to  aid  tlie  impulsion,  re- 
maining at  the  same  time  well  seated,  which  gives  them 


128  THK    PLATOON. 

a  facility  in  coiuliuMinii  their  Ik^tscs  and  usiiijr  the  sabre  ; 
finally,  thnl  tiu*  icairanic  lvC'Pj)>at  its  jji-oper  distance.  It 
is  bftUT,  htivvovcr,  that  the  rear  rank  siioidd  have  too 
mnch  ihan  too  litil<^  room. 

Tlif  inslnictor  r.\[)l;nns  to  thi*  troopers,  that  it  is  in 
keeping'  their  horses  in  liand,  in  ennsing  tlieni  to  feel 
from  time  to  time  the  elfect  of  the  bit,  in  moving  paral- 
lel to  the  lin»dv  files,  and  remaining  always  abreast  of 
them,  that  the  shock  of  the  ehtiige  beeomes  the  great- 
f-t.  Finally,  the  instrncior  directs  the  troopers  not  tt) 
ehangi;  the  gait  bel()rc  the  conimaiul,  anil  to  lengthen 
the  galloiT  only  at  the  commaml  charge. 


Rallying. 


To  exercise  the  troopers  in  r;iliying,  the  j^latoc^n  is 
fornietl  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground,  the  sabres  are 
drawn,  and  the  signal  le  disperse  is  sounded  ;  at  this  sig- 
nal, th(,>  troojiers  disperse  and  charge  as  forages;  the 
insinu-tor  and  the  flank  files  remain  in  place,  to  mark 
out  the  rallying  point.  When  the  troopers  have  marched 
150  or  200  paces,  the  instructor  orders  the  rally  to  be 
sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  troopers  irhrri  fo  fhrlr/f-ahovt, 
rejoin  the  platoon  by  the  shortest  line,  and  resume 
their  ])lac'e.^  in  the  ranks. 

'J'lie  rallyinu-  should  he  executed  rapidly,  but 
without  noise,  the  troopers  entering  the  ranks  al\va3's 
by  the  rear. 

As  soon  as  two-thirds  of  tlie  troopers  have  joined,  the 
iristnu'tor  commands  the  platc^on  to  move  forward.  Tlio 
lirst  time,jlie  platoon  is  rallied  at  the  trot,  and  then  at 
the  gallof).  This  movement  is  repeated  without  retain- 
ing the  flank  flies  ;  in  this  case  the  Iroojjers  rally  behind 
the  instructor. 


THE   PLATOON.  129 


Skirmishing. 

The  platoon  being  supposed  to  form  a  ]){irt  ot  the 
sqiuidion,  it  is  disj)ersod  nsskirinisheis,  in  onler  to  cover 
the  front  and  the  flanks  of  the  squadron. 

The  i)lato#n  being  in  line  at  the  extremity  of  the 
ground,  the  instructor  en  uses  the  schabraques  tobe  raised, 
the  liolsters  uncovered,  and  the  arms  loaded  ;  he  marches 
the  phitoon  forward,  and  when  he  wishes  to  disjjcrse  the 
trooi)ers  as  skirmishers,  he  commaruls: 

1.  Six  files  from  r'ujlit — as  skirmishers.^ 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  file-closer  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  six  files  of  the  left,  of  whom  he 
takes  command. 

These  six  files  are  destined  to  support  the  skir- 
mishers and  to  relieve  them. 

At  the  command  march,  the  file-closer  com- 
mands HALT,  to  the  six  files  of  the  left,  and  causes 
them  to  draw  the  sabre. 

At  the  same  command,  the  six  files  of  the  right 
continue  to  march  forward;  after  going  ten  paces, 
they  disperse  as  skirmishers,  extending  themselves 
so  as  to  cover  the  supposed  front  of  a  squadron, 
passing  beyond  each  of  its  flanks.  The  right  troop- 
er obliques  to  the  right,  the  left  trooper  to  the  left. 
The  troopers  of  tlie  rear  rank  come  up  as  soon  as 

*  Half  the  platoon  skirmish,  while  the  other  half  re* 
main  as  a  support;  if  possible,  let  each  platoon  have  a 
juininium  of  16;  then  8  files  wo\dd  skirmish  with  8  in 
reserve. 


130  THE    PLATOON. 

possible,  ubreast  of  the  front  niiik,  each  one  placing 
hiinf-elf  on  the  left  of  his  file-leader,  and  as  soon  as 
they  arc  in  line,  all  take  the  position  of  a/frajue — 
CARIUNE,  or  raise — j'lsToL.  They  continue  to 
march  until  the  signal  half,  No.  2. 

The  instructor  causes  the  halt  to  be  sounded  wlien  tlie 
skiiiriisliers  are  at  100  or  150  paces  liom  the  reserve. 

The  troopers  keep  at  5  paces  apart,  regulating 
themselves  towards  the  guide  during  the  whole 
time  they  act  as  skirmishers. 

The  assistant-instructor  places  himself  in  rear  of  tlie 
.skirmishers,  in  order  to  superintend  their  movements. 

The  chief  of  the  platoon,  followed  by  his  trumpeter, 
places  himself  hall"  way  between  the  sUirmit^iiers  and 
the  reserve  ;  he  moves  along  the  line  wherever  he  thinks 
his  presence  most  necessary.  The  reserve  ami  the 
skirmishers  execute  their  movements  at  the  signals  of 
the  trumpeter  who  follows  the  oUicer. 

If  the  chief  of  the  platoon  wishes  tlie  skirmishers  to 
move  forward,  he  causes  the  forward^  No.  1,  to  be 
sounded  ;  each  skirmisher  moves  forward,  regulating 
his  movements  b>  those  of  the  guide,  and  preserving  his 
interval-  the  reserve  follows  iliem,  keeping  at  its  proper 
distance. 

To  move  the  skirmishers  towards  the  right,  ?o //<«•  r//j-/i/, 
No.  4,  is  sounded  ;  each  trooper  turns  to  the  right  and 
juarches  in  the  direction  of  those  wlio  precede  him, 
taking  care  to  jjreserve  his  distance;  the  reserve  also 
turns  to  the  right. 

To  face  the  skirmishers  again  to  the  front,  to  the  hft^ 
No  3,  is  soumled  ;  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  turn 
to  the   left. 

To  n)ove  the  skirmishers  towards  the  left,  to  the  left^ 
No.  'J,  is  stiuiuled  ;  e;udi  skirmisher  turns  to  the  left  and 
marches  in  the   direction  of  those   who   i)recede   him, 


^        THE   PLATOON.  131 

taking  care  to  preserve  Iiis  distance.  The  reserve  also 
turns  to  the  left. 

To  face  the  skirmishers  again  to  tlie  front,  to  the  right, 
No.  4,  is  sounded;  the  skirnii>;hers  and  the  reserve  turn 
to  tlie  right. 

It",  after  having  turned  to  the  right,  the  instructor 
wishes  the  skirmislicis  to  move  towards  the  opposite 
side,  he  orders  the  about,  No.  5,  tij  be  sounded  ;  the  skir- 
mishers and  tlie  reserve  turn  to  the  left-about^  and  move 
forward. 

If,  after  liaving  turned  to  the  left,  the  instructor 
wishes  the  skirmishers  to  move  towards  the  opposite 
side,  he  causes  the  (ibout,  No.  5.  to  be  sounded  ;  the  skir- 
mishers and  the  reserve  turn  to  the  right-about,  and  move 
forward. 

During  the  flank  movements,  if  the  troopers  are  to 
continue  tiring,  they  leave  the  cohnnn  and  face  the  ene- 
my lor  ti)at  purpose.  As  soon  as  they  have  fired,  they 
resume  tlieir  phices  in  tlie  column,  doubling  the  gait. 

The  skirmishers  are  marching  to  the  front  or  at  a  halt ; 
if  the  instructor  wishes  the  line  to  move  to  the  rear,  the 
chief  of  platoon  orders  the  retreat  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
signal,  tlie  troopers  of  the  front  rank  move  forward  5 
paces,  fire,  then  turn  to  the  Ivft-about,  in  order  to  move  to 
the  rear,  and  retire,  loading  their  pieces.  When  they 
have  marched  50  paces,  or  more,  if  necessary,  the  chief 
of  platoon  causes  Me  a6oM/,  No.  5,  to  be  sounded.  At 
this  signal,  the  troo[)ers,  who  were  retiring,  face  to  the 
front  by  turning  to  the  right-about.  The  troopers  wlio  are 
in  the  first  line  fire  and  turn  to  the  left-about,  retire,  load- 
ing their  pieces,  pass  in  the  intervals  of  the  line  which 
is  in  rear,  move  f>0  paces  farther,  and  face  to  the  front 
at  the  signal  the  about,  No.  .'). 

Tlie  troopers  of  the  lino  which  is  in  rear,  move  5 
paces  to  the  front  the  moment  the  troopers  who  retire 
pass  into  their  intervals;  they  then  commence  tiring  by 
the  Hank  indicateil. 

The  alternate  movement  of  the  two  lines  continues  as 

long  as  the  skirmishers  move  to  the  rear.     When  the  in- 

"structor  wishes  the  retreat  to  cease,  the  chief  of  platoon 

orders /ortt-arrf,  No.  1,  to   be  sounded.     The  skirmishers 


Ii2  TIIK    TM,ATOON. 

who  are  in  rear  move  iij),  tifjuljlin;^  ilie  gjut.  alironst  of 
thosf  ll)(?  most  advanced,  and  all  iiinrcli  forward  until 
tlif*  si'^nal  tohdlt^  No.  2,  is  soundt-d. 

Ifllie  in.^lrnctor  wislies  the  wliolt;  line  of  .skirmishers 
to  retire  at  once,  he  orders //le  o/>o«/,  No.  5, tobe sounded. 

Tlie  reserve  retires  and  faces  to  the  front,  refjnlatinij 
its  movement  by  that  of  the  skirniisilier.s,  so  as  to  n^maiu 
always  at  OU  paces  from  the  .second  line.  It  executes 
its  rear  movement  at  the  moment  the  retreating?  line 
pa-ses  into  the  intervals  t)f  the  line  whiith  moves  for- 
ward. 

The  rallyinj?  of  skirmishers  is  always  made  on  the 
point  occupied  by  the  officer. 

T(»  rady  the  skirmislicrs,  the  officer  [ilaces  hiinself 
habitually  in  front  of  the  reserve,  and  causes  the  rally , 
No.  <),  to  be  sounded.  At  this  siixnal,  the  skirmislicrs 
tnrn-ahnuL  rally  on  the  reserve  by  tiie  shortest  route,  and 
draw  the  sabre. 

Il"  the  officer  is  not  with  the  reserve  when  the  rally. 
No.  6,  is  sounded,  the  skirmishers  rally  upon  him,  ami 
the  reserve  comes  uj)  and  joins  them.  The  troopers 
are  thus  exercised  to  rally  upon  any  point  whatever  of 
the  line. 

If  a  defile  is  presented  in  advance  of  the  front  of  the 
line,  and  orders  are  ^ivcn  to  pa~s  it,  the  troopers  who 
are  cip[)()Site  first  enter  it;  they  are  followed  nt-somo 
distance  by  the  other  troopers,  who  turn  by  trooper  to 
the  left  an<l  to  the  rii^ht^  in  onler  to  put  tliemselves  in 
file. 

As  soon  as  th(^  first  have  i)asscd  the  defile,  they  mf>ve 
50  or  ()(J  paces  t<>  the  front;  the  others  (rome  up  abreast 
of  them  oblirpiiiijr.  those  of  the  ri|^ht  to  the  rif^ht,  and 
those  of  the  left,  to  the  left.  Tlie  reserve  enters  the  de- 
file when  the  first  skiitnishers  have  reconnoitred  it. 

If  the  skirmishers  are  to  pass  a  defile  placed  in  rear, 
they  commence  by  Hpproachinj;  it;  when  the  reserve  is 
at  a  suitable  distance  it  passes  rapidly,  and  posts  itself 
50  or  r>0  j)ace.s  from  and  on  the  side  of  the  passajre. 

The  two  troopers  who  are  on  the  fiank, /ur;i-«6o»^  to  the 
left.  nn)\  e  to  the  rear  so  as  to  arrive  together  at  the  en- 


THE    PLATOON.  133 

tvjinco  of  the  defile,  which  tlicy  p;iss  immediately.  They 
are  Ibllowed  closely  by  the  other  troopers,  who  execute 
succes^sively  the  same  movement;  tlie  centre  troopers, 
who  cover  the  defile,  enter  it  the  last. 

At  the  f^'oinji  out  ol' the  deJile,  the  two  troopers  who 
are  in  front  turn,  one  to  the  left,  and  the  other  to  the 
right;  an  I  when  all  the  troojjers  have  passed  the  de- 
file, they  stop  at  the  signal  to  halt,  No.  2,  and  face  to  the 
front. 

The  in.itructor  sometimes  rallies  the  skirmishers  im- 
mediately after  having  passed  the  defile,  either  to  the 
iVont  or  to  the  rear. 

These  movement?  are  at  first  executed  at  the  walk,  then 
at  the  Irot,  and  finally  a!  the  gallop.  When  the  troopers 
have  learned  to  peiforin  these  movements  well,  they  are 
exercised  at  them,  in  execnting  the  manual  of  arms,  and 
in  firing;  and  finally,  with  the  overcoats  rolled  and  car- 
ried over  the  shoulder.  When  the  troopers  are  at  the 
gallop,  and  the  instructor  wishes  them  to  pass  to  the  trot, 
lie  orders  the  trot.  No.  7,  to  be  sounded  ;  when  they  are 
at  the  trot,  and  he  wishes  them  to  pass  to  the  walk,  he  or- 
der.-; the  halt,  No.  2.  and  then  iUe  for  tear  d.  No.  J,  to  be 
sounded. 

To  commence  or  to  cease  firing,  the  s.gnal  issonvulcd. 
All  the  troopers  do  not  fire  at  once,  but  one  after  an- 
other, commencing  on  the  side  of  the  guide.  They  af- 
terwards continue  firing  without  waiting  for,  or  being 
governed  by  each  other.  Each  rear  rank  man  has  an 
nnder.-tanding  with  his  file-leader  that,  as  far  as  jiracti- 
cable,  the  piece  of  one  may  be  always  chargeil  while  the 
other  is  loading;  the  troopers  of  the  same  file  should 
give  a  mutual  support  to  each  other. 

When  tlie  j)latoon  skirmishes  without  gaining  ground 
to  the  front,  the  skirmishers  should  nevertheless  k(?ep  in 
motion  always;  each  trooper  of  the  front  rank,  after 
having  fired,  moves  some  steps  to  the  rear,  at  the  same 
time  loading  his  ])iece:  and  as  soc»n  as  he  returns  to  the 
line,  the  rear-rank  man  of  the  same  file  fires,  and  moves 
in  his  turn  to  the  rear. 
11 


134  THE   PLATOON. 

In  tlip  rlinrijo  as  f()rager«,  the  men /nf  the  rpar-raiik 
approach  within  one  or  t\V(i  paces  of  their  file-leaders, 
to  be  able  to  .support  each  other  mntually. 

A.S  soon  as  the  skirmishers  charge,  the  reserve  moves 
lurwnrd  to  support  llicni. 

The  skirmishers  retire  by  turnin^-nhout  to  the  left,  and 
facte  aj;ain  to  the  front  by  turniug-about  to  the.  right. 
When  tiiey  have  re-formed  in  platoon,  they  return  the 
l)istol  to  the  holster,  or  drop  the  ca.bine,  and  draw  tiie 
sabre. 

To  relieve  skirmishers,  the  instructor  commands  to 
the  reserve  : 

1.  Six  files  from  I'ft — as  shirmishers. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  tlic  reserve  disperses 
and  moves  up  upon  the  line  of  old  skirmishers. 
The  right  trooper  of  the  front-rank  passes  on  the 
right  of  the  right  skirmisher  of  the  front  rank ; 
the  right  trooper  of  the  rear  rank  on  the  right  of 
the  right  skirmisher  of  the  rear  rank,  and  so  on 
throughout,  each  one  passing  to  the  right  of  the 
one  he  relieves,  and  5  paces  beyond  him.  The  old 
skirmishers  turn-ahont  and  rally  nt  a  ijallop  on  the 
officer,  who  during  the  movement  is  placed  at  the 
point  wnere  the  six  files  now  become  the  reserve 
should  re-lbrm. 

The  non-comniissioned  officer  who  commanded 
the  six  files  of  the  left  now  takes  command  of  the 
six  files  of  the  right. 

Iftliere  arc  two  non-commissioned  oirioers  with  the 
])lat()on,  each  one  follows  the  portion  of  the  platoon  to 
which  he  i.s  attached. 


THE   PLATOON.  135 

Dragoons. — The  drai;nons  liavin<?  been  sufficiently 
exercised  in  all  the  movements  of  sivirmishin<i-,  will  be 
taught  to  dismount  and  form  with  celerity  to  fight  on 
foot. 

At  the  commencement,  all  the  movements  of  this  in- 
struction will  be  decomposed,  in  order  to  make  them 
better  understood. 

The  platoon  being  in  line,  the  instructor  commands: 

Prepare  to  fight — On  foot. 
]  time^  A  motions. 

1st.  At  the  last  i)art  of  the  command,  wliich  is  ON 
FOOT,  prepare  to  dismount  as  prescribed. 

2d.  Execute  what  is  prescribed, /o  dismount;  Nos.  4, 
of  each  rank,  will  remain  mounted. 

3(1.  Return  to  the  ranks  as  prescribed,  face  to  the 
right,  pass  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  over  the  head 
of  the  horse,  seize  the  extremity  of  the  reins,  with  the  left 
hand,  seize  them  again  with  the  right  hand,  6  inches 
from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  tlie  nails  upwards;  face  to 
the  front,  and  hook  up  the  sabre  without  letting  go  the 
reins. 

4th.  Face-about  to  the  right,  seizintr  the  reins  with  the 
left  hand,  6  inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  the 
nails  downward,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  extremity  of 
the  rein  ;  Nos.  3,  of  each  rank,  give  the  reins  to  Nos.  4, 
who  remain  mounted  ;  Nos.  2  and  I  engage  the  end  of 
the  reins  with  both  hands,  in  the  head-stall  of  the  bri- 
dle ofthe  horse  which  is  on  the  left,  [massing  them  under 
the  nose-band  ami  the  cheek-piece  of  the  bridle,  and 
tying  them  in  a  si  p  knot,  so  that  each  horse  may  be 
about  one  foot  from  the  one  to  which  he  is  tied  ;  face 
again  to  the  front  by  the  right,  unsling  the  carbine,  and 
come  to  a  carry. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

Dragoons — Into  line. 
1   time. 


136  THE   PLATOON. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  into  line, 
move  twelve  paces  to  tlie  front,  turning  the  back  upon 
the  phuoon  of  horses ;  half  the  rear  rank  pass  to  the 
right  I)y  the  right  llnnk,  the  otlun-  half  to  the  left  by  the 
left-flank,  and  placestheinselves  behind  their. file-leaders. 

Nos.  4,  who  remain  on  horseback,  have  charge  of  the 
dismoinited  horses;  they  take  tlie  em]  of  the  reinsof  the 
first  dismounted  horse  in  the  left  hand,  holding  them 
near  the  bit  with  the  right  hand,  the  nails  downward  ; 
an  assistant-instructor,  or  file-closer  of  the  platoon,  re- 
mains with  the  dismounted  horses  to  direct  them. 

The  dragoons  having  been  sulFicientiy  exercised  at 
the  ditiereni  movements  of  this  instruction,  will  be  re- 
quired to  execute  them  rapidly  without  stopping  at  the 
several  motions,  and  at  the  single  cornmaml.  prepare  to 
fight  on  foot,  given  by  the  instructor. 

The  two  ranks  being  formed,  tlie  platoon  M-ill  be  con- 
ducted where  it  is  to  fight  on  foot,  and  will  there  ma- 
nauvre  as  light  infantry.^ 

The  dismounted  horses  will  also  be  exercised  in 
changing  position,  by  marching  by  rank  and  by  fours. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  dragoons  to  remount, 
he  will  rally  them  if  they  are  dispersed  as  skirinishers. 

The  platoon  being  rallied  and  formed,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

Dragoons,  about — Face. 

He  conducts  the  platoon  rear  rank  in  front;  having 
come  within  12  paces  of  the  horses,  he  commands  : 

Dm  goons — M  ount. 

At  this  comnumd,  the  dragoons  return  to  their  horses 
rapidly,  without  alarming  them;  they  sling  carbine, 
mount,  and  draw  the  sabre. 

The   command,  dragoons — mounts  at  the  commence- 

*Drctgoons  are  armed  with  good  long  range  guns,  and 
should  be  as  expert  in  the  light  infantry  as  in  cavalry 
tuclics;  the  best  bt>ok  is  that  of  Col.  Hardee. 


THE   PLATOON.  137 

ment,  will  be  executed  in  4  motions,  and  from  a  halt, 
that  the  troopers  may  better  uiuierstand  it.  For  tins 
purpose,  the  platoon  beinjj  rallied  and  marchinjf  with  the 
rear-rank  in  front,  is  halted  12  paces  from  the  horses  ; 
the  instructor  then  commands: 

Dragoons — Mount. 

1  time,  4  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  mount, 
sling  the  carbine. 

2.  Rejoin  the  horses,  the  rear-rank  men  passing  to  the 
left  and  right,  as  prescribed  in  dismounting;  untie  the 
horse,  pass  the  reins  over  the  neck,  imhooU  the  sabre, 
and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper  before  mounting. 

3.  Execute  the  two  times  o^ prepare  tomowit. 

4.  Execute  the  two  times  of  mount,  adjust  the  reins, 
return  to  the  ranks,  and  draw  the  sabre. 

To  sling   and   nnsling  tbe   carbine  (or 
short  rifle.) 

The  piece  being  at  the  dragoon's  right  side,  but  on  the 
ground,  that  is,  at  the  order  arms,  the  command  is  : 

Sling — Carbine. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  whicli  is  carbine. 
raise  the  carbine  perpendicularly  with  the  right  hand, 
ami  place  it  in  the  left  hand,  which  seizes  it  below  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  extended,  the  barrel  to  the  front; 
incline  the  carbine  to  the  right,  that  the  rings  may  hang 
down,  the  left  hand  as  high  as  and  opposite  to  the  neck; 
slip  the  swivel  to  tlie  front  with  the  right  hand,  the 
Thund)  pressing  upon  the  short  side  to  open  it,  insert  it 
in  the  rings. 

12* 


138  THE   PLATOON. 

2.  Seize  the  carbine  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand,  let  it  go  willi  the  left  hand,  whieh  is  dropped 
by  the  side  ;  pass  the  carbine  behind  the  back,  lowering 
the  )nnz/,le,  push  the  butt  to  the  rear,  and.drop  the  right 
hand  by  the  side. 

Unsling — Carbine. 

1  time,  2  motions. 

1.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  wliich  is  carbine, 
seize  the  carbine  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand,  raise  it,  seize  it  again  with  the  left  hantl  below  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  extended,  the  hand  as  high  as, 
and  o])posite  to  the  neck  ;  incline  the  carbine  to  the 
right,  free  the  swivil  from  the  rings  with  the  right  hand, 
and  push  the  swivil  to  the  rear. 

2.  Seize  the  carbine  with  the  right  hand,  above  and 
near  the  left  hand;  bring  it  down,  turning  it  at  the  same 
time,  and  resume  the  position  of  order. 

To  leap  the  ditcli  and  the  bar. 

The  instructor  causes  the  troopers  to  leap  the  ditch 
and  the  bar  by  twos  and  by  fours,  and  then  by  platoon. 


To  leap  the  ditch. 


On  arriving  near  the  ditch,  give  the  hand  and  close 
tlie  legs,  to  force  the  horse  to  make  the  leap.  The  mo- 
ment he  reaches  the  ground,  raise  slightly  the  hand  in  or- 
der to  sustain  him. 


To  leap  the  Lar. 


On  arriving  near  the  bar,  rein  up  the  horse  sliglitly, 
and  close  the  legs.  At  the  moment  of  making  the  leap, 
give  the  hand,  and  elevate  it  slightly  as  soon  as  he 
reaches  the  ground  on  the  other  side. 


THE  PLATOON.  139 

The  trooper,  in  leaping,  should  cling  to  thejjorse  with 
the  thighs  and  calves  of  the  legs,  taking  care  to  lean  a 
little  forward  as  the  horse  is  in  the  act  of  springing,  and 
to  seat  himself  well  by  leaning  to  the  rear  at  the  moment 
the  horse  reaches  the  ground. 

Each  trooper,  after  having  made  the  leap,  continues 
to  move  at  the  trot,  and  takes  his  place  in  the  rank 
which  is  formed  thirty  paces  beyond  the  obstacle, 
taking  care  to  pass  to  the  walk  just  before  halting. 

During  the  first  days  of  this  exercise,  the  troopers  leap 
withont  arms. 

When  the  troopers  have  leaped  without  arms,  they 
repeat  the  same  exercise  with  arms,  and  finally  with  the 
sabre  drawn. 

The  horses  employed  should  be  trained  and  accus- 
tomed to  leaping.  If,  however,  a  horse  refuses  to  leap, 
the  instructor  aids  the  trooper  with  a  whip. 

Remark. — The  last  four  lessons  belong  to  the  drill  of 
the  trooper,  but  in  most  cases  may  be  deferred  until  the 
close  of  the  platoon  exercises. 


L 


CAVALRY  TACTICS, 


FJ^Tirr  THcii^iD. 


Drill  of  tijc  Squiibr0n. 

A  Squadron  is  composed  of  4  platoons,  and  is 
the  proper  tactical  unit  of  Ctivalry. 

As  the  Cavalry  phitoon  always  contains  12  or  16 
FILES,  and  is  subdivided  into  fours,  the  Squadron 
is  always  (in  rank  and  file)  a  mvltlph  of  4  and  of 
either  VI  or  IG.  The  rmik  and //A- strictly  include 
those  only  who  are  counted  or  tuhl  off'iw  the  fours. 

If  the  number  of  troopers  is  sufficient,  tlie  platoon 
of  10  files  is  preferable;  for  then  there  will  be  in 
each  platoon  sub-divisions  of  8  troopers,  called  sec- 
tions. 

Platoons  of  12  are  not  divisible  into  sections,  for 
the  cavalry  Beet  ion  requires  2  fours. 

Two  platoons,  containiniz;  24  or  82  files,  forming 
a  cotiifKini/,  division^  or  hdff-sqnadron,  is  drilled  on 
the  same  principles  as  the  complete  squadron;  for 
which  purjiose,  officers,  guides  and  file-closers  will  be 
posted,  as  in  the  S(juadron  formation. 


THE  SQUADRON.  141 

The  senior  officer  is  1st  Captain  and  Chief  of 
the  squadron  ;  the  next  in  rank  is  2d  Captain.  He 
is  charged  with  the  alignment  and  supervision  of 
the  rear-rank  and  filc-clusers. 

The  lat  Litutenanl   commands   the   1st  phitoon. 

The  Lieutenant  2d  in  rank  commands  the  4th 
platoon. 

The  Lieutenant  3d  in  rank  commands  the  2d 
platoon. 

The  Lieutenant  4th  in  rank  commands  the  3d 
platoon. 

The  number  of  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  of  a  squadron  is  22,  viz.  :  6  officers,  8  ser- 
geants and  8  corporals.  Vacancies,  if  any,  must 
be  filled  from  the  next  lower  grade.  In  assigning 
positions,  the  Chief  will  be  styled  No.  1,  the  2d 
Capt«ain  No.  2,  and  so  on  to  the  8th  corporal,  who 
will  be  No.  22. 

The  positions  in  line   of  battle   are  as 
follows : 

No.   1,   1  yard  in   front  of  centre  of  squadron. 

No.  2,  3       "       rear  '' 

No.   3,   1        "        front  "  Ist  platoon. 

No.  4,   1        "  •'  "  4th         " 

No,  5,   1       '•  •*  •'  2(1  " 

No.  6,   1       "  "  •'  3d  " 

No.  7,   1        "        rear  of  3d  file  from  right  of  squadron. 

No.  8,   1       ^'  •'  "  K-ft 

No.   9,  on  right  of  squadron — not  counted. 

No.    10,  on  left  "  '■  " 

No.   11,  "  1st  platoon— is  counted. 

No.   12,  on  right  of  2d       "  '• 


142  THE   SQUADRON. 

No.   13,  on  left  of  3(1  jilatocn — is  counted. 

No.    14,  on  ri{.'bt  of  Itli        '■ 

No.   15.  "  1st       "  " 

No.   U),  on  left  but  one,  1st  platoon — is  counted. 

No.    17,  on  right  "     2d 

No.   IS,  on  left  of  2d  platoon — is  counted. 

No.   19,  onriglitofSd        '• 

No.  20,  on  left  but  one,  3d  platoon — is  counted. 

No.  21,  on  right         "     4th     " 

No.  22,  on  left  of  4th  platoon — is  counted. 

Femark. — The  commander  may  post  liis  Corporals 
from  right  to  left,  either  by  their  height  or  according  to 
rank. 

Positions  in  columns  of  twos  and  fours. 

No.  1,  4  yards  from  iiank,  on  side  of  guides,  abreast 
centre  of  squadron. 

No.  2,  4  yards  from  flank,  opposite  the  guides,  abreast 
centre  of  squadron. 

No.  3,  1  yard  in  advance  of  the  leading  files  of  squad- 
ron. 

Nos.  4,  5  and  G.  1  yard  Irom  the  flank,  on  fide  of 
guides,  abreast  the  front  files  of  their  [)latoons;  this  is 
when  the  7-igfit  is  in  front. 

When  the  left  is  in  front,  No.  4  heads  the  column,  and 
Nos.  3,  5  and  G.  are  one  yard  to  the  rifiht  of  the  column, 
and  aljreast  of  their  leading  files  ;  Nos.  1  anil  2  being 
on  the  right  and  left,  at  4  yard?  distance. 

Nos.  7  and  8  (fllc-cIosers)  one  yard  from  the  flank, 
oppo.>ite  to  the  guides,  and  abreast  the  centre  of  their 
platoons. 

Nos.  11  and  12,  ^-c,  to  No.  22,  in  their  ])laces  as 
counted  in  the  twos  and  fours. 

For  the  order  in  column  of  platoons  and  divisions,  see 

PLATOON  DUILL. 

The  music  is  2;.'')  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre  when  in 
line  ;  the  same  distance  from  the  flank,  opposite  to  the 


THE    SQUADRON.  143 

guides,  when  in  column,  until  ordered  to  the  front  or 
rear  by  the  commandiiij<  otlicer.  One  or  more  trump- 
eters, as  may  be  ordered,  accompany  the  commaruJerof" 
the  squadron. 

The  captain  comnianding  causes  the  officers  to  al- 
ternate in  the  command  of  tlie  platoons,  that  they  may 
become  familiar  with  all  ihe  positions    in  tlie  squadron. 

He  observes  ihe  >ame  course  with  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  and  gives  them  sometimes  the  command 
of  a  platoon,  to  enable  them  to  replace  an  officer,  should 
it  become  necessary. 

To  make  the  formation  in  line  better  understood,  they 
are  executed  ;it  first  from  a  halt.  In  this  case,  each 
platoon  performs  its  movements  separ.ately  and  succes- 
sively, at  the  command  of  its  chief,  on  receiving  notice 
from  the  captain  commanding. 

Each  movement,  after  having  been  correctly  executed 
by  the  right,  is  repeated  by  the  left. 

When  the  squadron  has  acquired  calmness  and  confi- 
dence, and  one  article  is  well  understood,  this  article  is 
re[5eated  with  sabres  drawn,  and  alternately  at  all  the 
gaits,  except  the  wheels  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  to  the  right- 
about, and  to  the  left-about  by  fours,  the  rounter-march,  the 
wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot  by  squadron,  the  individual 
oblique  marches  when  inarching  by  squadron,  which  are 
executed  only  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot. 

The  second  captain  is  charged  with  the  alignment  of 
the  rcar-ranic  and  the  rank  of  file-closers  :  he  resumes 
hi^s  place  in  line  at  the  command  front. 

The  captain  commanding  moves  wherever  Iiis  pres- 
ence is  most  required;  the  trcjopers  are  re(|uired  to  ob- 
serve absolute  silence,  and  all  rectifications  are  done  by 
signs,  or  in  a  low  voice. 

The  squadron  being  formed  in  two  ranks  opened,  the 
non-commissioned  officers  and  troopers  at  the  head  of 
their  horses,  the  chief  of  platoon  mounted,  at  10  paces 
from,  and  facing  the  centreof  their  platoons,  the  captain 
commanding  commands  : 


144  THE    SQUADRON. 

^'1.  Altaition.  3.  Fkont. 

'1.    Riyla — JJRESS. 

He  tliLMi  cuiiiniands  : 

In  each  platoon — and   in  <  uch    rank — CoUNT  {l>^^ 
FOURS. 

At  t.liis  conmuind,  the  troopers  count  off  in  the 
four  platoons  at  once,  conmiencinj^  on  the  right  of 
each  rank. 

The  captain  commanding  llicn  gives  the  conima)uI  to 
mount. 

At  the  command  form — ranks,  tlie  chiefs  of 
platoon  move  JbrAvard,  face  to  the  front  by  tvrnhuj 
to  tlie  rlyht-ahouty  and  place  thenl(^clvos  before  the 
centre  of  their  platoons,  the  croup  of  their  horses 
one  pace  from  the  liead  of  the  horses  of  the  front- 
rank.     The  fi  e-closers  follow  the  rear-rank. 

Successive  align ra en t  of  platoons  in  tlie 
squadron. 

The  sqiiailioii  Ix'ini;  in  line,  tlic  capiaincommaiuiiiig 
places  the  tvvo  n()u-e()mmi.-tJit)Me(i  ollic-ers.  j)iin*'ipal  jriiitles 
of  the  iij>ht  and  lell,  up(jn  a  line  parallel  to  the  liont  of 
the  .squadron,  at  IJO  paces  IVom  the  particular  {^nidi's,  and 
facing  cacl)  other  as  if  they  were  placed  on  iulermediaie 
jioints. 

On  receiving  notice  frotn  the  captain-commanding,  the 
ciiief  of  the  first  platoon  commands:  1.  Platoon  funi'urd  ; 
'2.  Guide  right ;  3.  March. 

*The  orderly  sergtant  calls  the  loll  and  reports  the 
number  of  absentees  to  the  commanding  officer,  as  soon 
as  the  sqnailron  is  formed. 


THE    SQUADRON.  145 

At  the  command  march,  the  pintoon  moves  forward; 
at  one  pace  fiom  the  point  wliich  n)arks  the  new  align- 
ment, the  cliief  of  the  platoon  commands:  1.  Halt.  2. 
Right — Dress. 

At  the  comniand  halt,  the  chicfof  the  platoon  and  the 
particular  jiviide  of  the  right,  continue  to  march  on  and 
establish  themselves  immediately,  tlie  latter  bringing  the 
head  of  his  horse  against  the  boot  of  the  principal  giiide 
of  the  right. 

The  first  platoon  being  correctly  aligned,  the  first 
captain  commands : 

1.  Bi/  platoon — Rigid — Dress. 
,      2.  Front. 

At  the  first  comniand,  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  commands:  1.  Platoon  forward ;  2.  Guide 
right;  3.  March.  The  platoon  having  arrived 
abreast  of  the  file  closers  of  the  platoon  which  forms 
the  base  of  the  alig-nment,  he  commands:  1.  Halt  ; 
2.  Right — Dress,  and  at  the  same  time  moves  for- 
ward on  the  line  of  the  chief  of  that  platoon. 

At  the  command  halt,  tlie  platoon  stops.  At 
the  command  Rigid — Dress,  all  the  troopers  move 
forward  toii:ether  upon  the  alignment. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  executes  successively  the 
same  movement,  commanding  march  when  the  one 
who  precedes  him  has  commanded  halt. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  left,  at  the  command 
HALT,  from  the  chief  of  the  fourth  platoon,  brings 
up  the  head  of  his  horse  against  the  boot  of  the 
principal  guide  of  the  left. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
manding commands :  Front. 

This  alignment  being  correctly  executed,  itis  repeated, 
giving  the  new  base  of  alignment  a  direction  oblique  to 

13 


146  THE   SQUADRON. 

tlic  front  of  the  squadron.  For  tliis  purpose,  thccliiefof 
the  first  platoon,  on  receiving  notice  from  tlie  captain- 
commaiidini;,  moves  liis  platoon  24  paces  forward,  causes 
it  to  execute  a  hall-wheel  to  the  riglit  at  the  conttnands  ; 

1.  Right  half — Wheel;  2.  Fouward;  an<l  after  march- 
ing it  G  paces  in  the  new  direction,  he  halts  and  aligns  it 

The  ftrst  platoon  being  correctly  aligned,  the  lirst 
captain  commands  : 

1 .  Bj/  2'>Jcitoon — Right--^Y)K}iS9. 

2.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  movcii>ent  is  executed 
successively ;  each  chief  of  phitootr  moves  straight 
forward,  and  comiDande:  1.  Riyht  Art//^— W.hkel  ; 

2.  Forward,  so  that  hi.%  platoon  may  finish  its 
wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  ut  the  moment  the  right 
arrives  opposite  the  left  of  the  platoon  whieh  pre- 
cedes it. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands :  Front. 

The  captain  commanding  causes  these  different  align- 
ments to  be  executed  by  the  left,  following  the  same 
princij)les,  but  by  inverse  iTieans. 

To  open  and  close  tlie  ranks. 

To  open  the  ranks,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Rear  rank  open  order. 

2.  March. 

3.  Right — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 
The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  rein  back  G  paces; 


THE    SQUADRON.  147 

and  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  at  the  command  march, 
move  forward  6  paces,  and  face  the  centre  of  their 
platoons  by  turning  to  the  left-ahouU 

To  close  the  ranks,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Rear  rank  dose  orde^; 

2.  March. 

S.  Right — Dress. 
4.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon 
drill.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  move  forward  at  the 
command  march,  face  to  the  front  by  a  turn  to  the 
right-about,  ^n^  piatse  themselves  opposite  the  centre 
of  their  platoons. 

To  break  tlie  squadron  by  fours. 

The  squadron  being  inlinCjlhe  first  captain  command?  ■ 

1.  B J/  fours.  3.  Guide  left, 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon places  himself  in  front  of  the  four  files  of  the 
right,  the  right  particular  guide  places  himself  on 
his  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  first  files 
march  straight  forward,  and  are  followed  by  all  the 
other  files  who  break  successively,  as  prescribed  in 
the  platoon. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  break  with  the 
four  first  files  of  their  platoons,  keeping  abreast  of 
them  and  at  one  pace  from  the  fiank  of  the  column 


148  TUE    SQUADRON. 

on  the  side  of  the  guide,  each  rank  of  fours  prcserv- 
intr  between  them  the  distance  of  2  feet. 


•o 


Change  of  direction. 

The  column  marching  in  column  by  four^,  right  in  front, 
TO  change  the  direction,  the  first  captain  cominuncls  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  to  the  right.) 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon? 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  con  form inj^  to  what  is 
indicated  for  the  assistant-instructor. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by 
fours,  to  form  it  to  the  front,  to  the 
left,  or  on  right  into  line. 

1  he  squadron  marching  in  cohinm  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  the  iirst  captain  connnands  : 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  first  files  con- 
tinue to  march  8trai<!;ht  forward  ;  when  they  have 
marched  oO  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands  :  Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  first  files  halt  square 
to  the  front,  the  particular  guide  of  the  right  re- 
turns to  the  right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other 
tiles  come  up  successively,  and  without  the  com- 
mands of  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  form  to  the  left  and 
and  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 


THE   SQUADRON.  149 

The  first  captain,  who  moves  to  the  right  flank 
after  the  command  march^  commands  the  align- 
ment when  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands 

HALT. 

The  second  captaia  moves  also  to  the  right  flank, 
after  the  command  march,  in  order  to  rectify  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank  and  of  the  file-closers. 

As  soon  as  the  chiefs  of  platoon  arrive  upon  the 
line,  they  place  themselves  at  the  centre  of  their 
platoons  and  align  themselves. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  left  returns  to  the 
left  of  the  squadron,  when  the  four  last  files  arrive 
upon  the  line. 

The  first  captaiii  commands  FRONT,  wlien  the  four  last 
files  are  aligned. 

The  cohtmn  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  inline 
on  its  left  flank,  iKe  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  JLeft  into  line.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  leading  files 
turn  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward  ;  when 
they  have  marched  30  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  commands :  Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  leading  files  halt, 
and  the  particular  guide  places  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other  files  come 
up  successively,  and  without  the  command  of 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  form  to  the  left  and  on 
the  alignment  of  the  first,  observing  to  keep  in 
the  same  direction,  before  turning  to  the  left^  so 
13* 


150  THE  SQUADRON. 

as  not  to  approach  the    new  line  until  the  proper 
time. 

The  tirstand  second  captains,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, and  the  particular  guide  of  the  left,  con- 
form exactly  to  what  is  prescribed  for  ihejront  into 

line. 

« 

The  column  marcliing  ri^jht  in  front,  to  form  lino  upon 
the  piolo-iig;»tion  and  in  advance  of  lis  ri^jht  IktnU,  the 
first  captain  cominantls  : 

1.  Oil  right  into  line.  3.  RiyJil — Drkss. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  four  leading:  files 
turn  to  the  right,  and  march  straight  forward;  when 
they  have  inarched  HO  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  commands :  Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  leading  files  halt, 
and  the  right  particular  guide  takes  his  place  on 
the  right  of  the  squadron.  All  the  other  files  con- 
tinue to  march  forward,  and  come  up  successively 
without  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
forming  to  the  left  and  upon  the  alignment  of  the 
first,  observing  to  keep  themselves  square  in  the 
same  direction  before  turning  to  the  right,  so  as 
not  to  approach  the  new  line  before  the  proper 
time. 

The  first  and  second  captains,  tlie  chiefs  of 
platoon,  and  the  loft  particular  guide,  conform 
exactly  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  front  into  line. 

The  sfjuadron  is  broken  by  the  left,  at  the  commands  i 
I.   By  fours  from    the    left;  2.    March;  3.    Guide  right. 
When  the   principles  of  the  direct  march  in  column  by 


THE   SQUADRON.  151 

fours,  the  changes  of  direction,  the  obliques,  and  the 
different  fonnalions  in  line  are  firmly  impressed,  all 
these  movements  are  executed  at  the  trot,  and  then  at  the 
gallop. 

To  regulate  the  rapidity  of  the  gaits. 

When  the  marches  and  formations,  prescribed  above, 
have  given  sufficient  uniformity  and  precision  to  the  gait, 
the  captain  commanding  will  reguh^te  their  rapidity. 
For  this  purpose  he  measures  oti"  two  distances,  each 
about  1,000  paces,  and  causes  them  to  be  passed  over 
successively  at  all  the  gaits,  to  assure  hinjselfthat,  at  the 
walk,  from  100  to  110  paces  is  passed  over  per  minute, 
at  the  trot,  from  200  to  240  per  minute,  and  at  the  gallop, 
about  300  paces  per  minute. 

Wher)  the  rapidity  of  the  gaits  has  been  properly  de- 
termined, the  squadron  is  required  to  pass  successively 
from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  and 
if  the  column  becomes  disunited  at  the  gallop,  it  resumes 
the  trot,  and  then  the  walk. 

When  the  squadron  has  acquired  precision  and  regu- 
larity in  the  formations  at  the  different  gaits,  tlie  captain 
commanding  exercises  the  squadron  in  breaking  by  fours 
from  a  halt,  at  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop. 

In  very  even  ground,  the  distance  above  indicated  may 
be  passed  over  in  a  shorter  time,  but  the  rapidity  of  the 
gaits  should  be  increased  only  under  extraordinary  cir- 
cumstances. 


To  form  the  squadron  iii  one  rank,  and 
to  form  it  in  two  ranks. 


To  form  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  and  to  re-form  it  in 
two  ranks,  the  captain  commanding  confortns  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

The  formation  ol"  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  is  employed 


152  THE    SQUADRON. 

for  iunpect ions :  in  thi?  case,  the  ofTirers  pns?  to  the 
light  of  tlic  sqijudron,  and  after  t))ern.  the  non-commis- 
!?ionc(l  otficers,  trooper?,  and  trumpeters,  according  to 
tlieir  raid<.  _ 

The  squadron  heiufs;  in  line,  to  form  it  in 
column  with  distance. 

The  first  cajjtain  coiuinands  : 

1.  Platoons  right  ichecl. 

2.  March. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  pla- 
toon prepares  to  step  off  promptly,  and  the  pivot  to 
turn  upon  its  own  ground. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  principles  of 
the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  marching  flanks  tak- 
ing; care  to  stciD  off  and  wheel  toirethcr. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  marching  flanks  and 
all  the  troopers  halt  at  the  same  instant,  those  of 
the  rear  rank  resuming  their  places  behind  their 
file-leaders. 

The  first  captain  commands  halt,  when  the  platoons 
have  nearly  completed  the  wiiccls. 

Tlje  chiefs  of  platoon,  witliont  leaving  the  centre  of 
their  platoons,  observe  that  the  movement  is  correctly 
executed;  aller  the  wheels,  if  any  guide  linds  himself 
not  in  tlie  direction  of  the  one  preceding  him.  lie  should 
not  endeavor  to  correct  his  position  until  after  the  march 
is  commenced. 

During  the  movement,  the  particidar  guide  of  the  left 
passes  as  iilc-closer  behind  the  second  file  fr^mi  the  left 
nfihi-  finifili  platoon. 


THE    SQUADRON.  153 

The  fiift  captain  assures  himself  that  each  officer  and 
non-commissioned  officer  preserves  the  place  assigned  to 
him  in  this  order  of  column. 

To  maAjli  in  column  with  distance. 

The  squadron  being  \i\  open  column,  right  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands: 

1.  Column  forward. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  platoons  put  them- 
selves in  motion  at  the  same  time. 

Before  the  column  commences  the  march,  the  first 
captain  gives  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  a  point  of 
direction  ;  this  non-commissioned  officer  selects  inter- 
mediate points,  so  as  to  be  sure  of  marching  straight. 
The  fixed  object  given  to  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon, 
is  also  pointed  out  to  the  guide  of  the  second.  These 
two  non-commissioned  officers  preserve,  during  the 
march,  the  direction  which  has  been  given  to  them. 

The  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  platoons  keep  ex- 
actly in  the  same  direction. 

Changes  of  direction  by  successive  wheels. 

In  the  open  column,  the  changes  of  direction  are  exe- 
cuted by  successive  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot,  so  that 
the  march  of  the  column  may  not  bo  retarJed.  The  arc 
of  circle  described  by  the  pivots  should  be  of  ^i  paces. 

The  column  being  in  march,  to  change  the  direction, 
the  first  captain  commands: 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  or  halfkfi  (or  to  the 
right  or  half-right. 


1.^4  TOE   SQUADRON. 

At  tliis  cuinniani],  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
couiniands  :  ].  Lrft — Turn  j  '2.  Forward;  which 
is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  upon  a 
moveable  pivot.  ^ 

Each  chief  of  platoon  p;ives  the  same  commands 
successively,  so  that  his  platoon  may  turn  upon  the 
same  s-round. 

In  this  change  of  direction  while  marchiiii^j,  the 
principal  guide  of  the  right,  at  the  connnand  head 
of  column  to  the  Iff t,  moves  rapidly  to  the  side  of 
the  pivot,  and  places  himself  so  that  the  head  of 
his  horse  will  mark  the  centre  point  of  the  are  de- 
scribed by  the  pivots. 

All  the  platoons  commence  their  wheel  at  2J 
paces  before  arriving  abreast  of  the  head  of  the 
horse  of  the  principal  guide  of  the  right,  so  as  to 
prevent  the  column  from  being  thrown  out.  This 
non-commissioned  officer  resumes  his  place  when 
the  last  platoon  has  couipleted  its  wheel. 

Imrnctliiitely  after  hiivinij  clianjjed  the  dircctioa  of  the 
coliinin.  tlie  iiist  caiMiiiii  {^ivcs  a  iit'W  point  of  direction 
to  liic  guide  of  the  lirst  platoon. 

The  exact  preservation  of  distanees.  after  the  chnn^e:« 
of  direction,  depends  upon  the  equality  of  the  increase 
given  to  the  gait  l)y  the  marching  flanks;  it  is  then  im- 
portant that  the  leading  ]datoon  should  tnrn  neither  too 
rapidly  nor  too  slowly,  and  that  each  platoon  should 
regulate  the  rapidity  of  its  wheel  upon  that  of  the  one 
whicdi  precedes  it. 

VVJHMi  the  (diange  of  direction  is  executed  from  the  side 
opposite  to  the  guide,  the  pivot  becoiues  llir  <niid(>  rlmiutr 
the  wiicel. 


THE    SQUADRON.  155 

Individual  oblique  marcli. 

The  squadron  marching  in  colnmn,  with  (lij^tnncc, 
right  in  fro.it,  to  canse  it  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of 
its  flank.*,  withont  changing  tlic  front  of  tlie  column,  ihe 
first,  captain  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each 
platoon,  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

The  guides  of  the  three  last  platoons  pay  atten- 
tion to  march  on  the  same  line,  to  preserve  their 
distances,  and  keep  it  in  a  direction  exactly  parallel 
to  that  of  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon. 

•To  resnme  the  primitive  direction,  tlie  first  captain 
commands : 

Forward. 

Which  is  executed  at  the  same  time,  in  each 
platoon. 

When  the  oblique  march  is  executed  towards 
the  side  opposite  to  the  guide,  the  file-closers  pre- 
serve their  places,  notwithstanding  the  change  of 
guide. 

Change  of  gait,  being  in  column  with 
distance. 

The  oohimn  is  made  to  pass  from  the  walk  to  the  troty 
and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk^  and  when  tlie  platoons  exc- 


156  THE    SQUADRON. 

cute  these  changes  of  gait  wiih  luiirorniity  ainl  steadi- 
ness, tlie  {-(thnnn  is  made  tc>  cuiiinience  the  niareh  at  a 
trot.  an<l  to  halt  while  marching'  at  the  trot. 

The  first  captain  observes  that  the  platoons  halt,  step 
off,  and  change  the  gait  at  the  same  instant. 

He  directs  the  head  of  the  column  sometimes  to  in- 
crease or  diminish  the  gait  slightly,  without  command,  to 
judge  of  the  attention  of  the  guides,  and  to  hnhituHte 
them  to  conforming  to  the  movements  of  the  guides  who 
precede  them. 

To  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  by  file; 
to  form  twos,  fours  and  platoons  at 
tbe  same  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  fours  at  the  same  gait,  the  first 
captam  commands  : 

1.  B J/ fours.  3.    Guide  Icjt. 

li.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  this  officer,  and  the  particular 
guide  of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed, 
in  breaking  by  fours  from  a  halt. 

At  the  command  makch,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
and  the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command: 
Halt. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  by  fours,  in 
sufficient  time  to  command  MARCH,  the  moment 
the  four  last  files  of  the   preceding  platoon   com- 


THE    SQUADRON.  157 

mence  their  oblique  movement  in  order  to   enter 
the  column. 

The  s(iiia(lron  marchin":  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  twos,  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.  7?y  twos.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  order  to  break  by  fours,  and  give  the 
commands:  Halt,  and  then — 1.  B2/  twos;  2. 
March,  so  as  to  cause  no  confusion  in  the  column. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  break  by  file  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  %  file.  2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  in  order 
to  break  by  twos,  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
placing  himself  behind  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 

The  squadron  marching  in  cokimn  witli  distance,  at 
the  trot,  right  in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  at  the  same 
gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  jBi/  fours.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  this  ofiicer,  and  the  particular 
guide  of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed 
in  breaking  the  squadron  by  fours  from  line,  and 
the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command  : 
Walk. 

14 


158  THE   SQUADRON. 

At  the  com:i:anJ  MAiicii,  repeated  by  all  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  first  platoon  breaks  by  fours, 
and  ihc  throe  last  platoons  take  the  walk. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  by  fours — 
trot,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  when 
the  four  last  files  of  the  prccecdin^  platoon  com- 
mence their  oblique  movement  in  order  to  cuter  the 
column. 

The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by 
twos  and  by  file. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop^  these  ir.ovemcnts 
are  executed  on  tlie  principles  just  prescribed,  the  whole 
column  except  the  four  firj^t  files  passing  to  the  trot  and 
resuming  successively  the  gallop,  as  the  files  break  in 
order  to  enter  the  column. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in 
front,  to  form  twos  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Fonn  twos.  2.  March, 

At  the  command  form  (was  and  march,  suc- 
cessively repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  platoon  executes  its  movement  as  prescribed  in 
the  platoon  drill ;  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
who  commands  halt,  after  having  marched  10 
paces. 

The  three  other  platoons  continue  to  march  by 
file,  and  execute  successively  their  formation  at  the 
commands  of  their  chiefs,  who  do  not  command 
MARCH,  until  the  first  files  of  their  platoons  arrive 
at  their  proper  distance. 


THE    SQUADRON.  159 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in 
front,  to  foini  platoon  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Form  fours.  2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed^  in  order  to  form 
twos- 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  to  form  platoon  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands  : 

1.  Form  platoons.  2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands:  Form  'platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  the  particular  guide  of  ihe  right 
places  himself  on  the  right  of  this  platoon,  which 
forms  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon  drill;  the  chief  of 
the  platoon  commands  halt,  after  having  marched 
20  paces. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  in  column 
by  fours,  and  form  successively  at  the  commands  : 
1.  Form  platoon  ;  2,  March,  given  by  their  chiefs 
in  sufficient  time  to  command  halt,  when  the  four 
first  files  of  their  platoon  arrive  at  6  paces  from  the 
platoon  which  precedes. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  iro\,  the  same  principles  are 
conformed  to,  except  that  instead  of  halting  the  two  or 
four  first  files  of  the  first  platoon  pass  to  the  walk.,  at  the 
command  march  given  by  their  chief.  The  otiier  platoons 
continue  to  march  at  the  /?"o/,  and  execute  thiMr  move- 
ment at  the  same  gait,  the  two  or  four  first  liles  of  each 
platoon  passing  also  to  the  walk.,  at  the  coniuiand  mauch 


IGO  THE    SQUADRON. 

given  by  their  chiefs,  when  they  arrive  at   their  proper 
distance. 

When  the  cohmin  is  at  tlie  gallop,  to  form  twos,  fours, 
&c.,  the  same  principles  are  observed,  the  two  or  four 
first  files  of  each  platoon  passing  to  the  trot  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  given  by  iheir  chief. 

When  these  formations  are  executed  at  the  trot,  an<l  al 
the  gallop,  the  guide  is  aimounced  by  the  first  captain  as 
soon  as  the  first  files  have  doubled,  or  the  first  platoon  is 
formed;  in  the  last  case  only,  each  chief  of  platoon  re- 
peats the  command  of  the  guide  as  soon  as  his  platoon  is 
formed. 

In  these  formations  at  the  ivalk,  the  guide  is  not  an- 
nounced, as  the  head  of  the  column  halts. 

To  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  by  file  ; 
to  form  twos,  fours,  and  platoons ; 
doubling  the  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  break  by  fours,  doubling  the  gait,  the  first 
captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours — trot.       2.  March.       3.    Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  tliis  officer  and  the  particuhir  guide 
of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed  in 
breaking  by  fours  from  line. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  breaks  by  fours,  as 
prescribed  in  the  platoon  drill. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  at  the 
walk ;  their  chiefs  command  successively  hy  fours 


THE    SQUADRON.  161 

— trot,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  the 
moment  the  four  hist  files  of  the  preceding  phitoon 
commence  their  oblique  movement,  in  order  to  en- 
ter the  column. 

These  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by  twos 
and  by  file. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot^  to  break  at  the  gallop, 
the  same  principles  are  observed,  at  the  coninmnds  : 
1.  By  fours — gallop  ;  2.  March;  3.  Guide  left. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  these  movements  are 
always  executed  at  the  same  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  file  to  form  twos, 
doiibling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  twos — trot.     2.     March.     3.    Guide  left. 

At  the  command/on/i  tiuos — trot  and  March, 
successively  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, this  platoon  executes  its  movement  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  platoon  drill,  and  the  particular  guide 
of  the  right  moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  three  last 
platoons  command  :  (rot.  At  the  command  march, 
repeated  by  them,  the  three  last  platoons  take  the 
irof. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command  :  Form 
twos,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  the 
moment  the  first  file  of  their  platoons  is  nearl}'  at 
its  proper  distance;  the  first  file  then  passes  to  the 
2cal/c. 

14* 


162  THE    SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  nmrchini;  in  column  by  twos,  to  form 
fours,  doubling  tlie  gait,  the  lirsi  Captain  commands: 

1,  Form  fours — trot.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

"Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed  in  order  to 
form  twos. 

TIjc  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  to  form 
platnon,  doubling  the  gait,  tlie  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  platoons — trot.  3.    Guide  left, 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fi.rst  pla- 
toon commands  :  Form  platoon — trot. 

The  chiefs  of  the  tliree  last  platoons  command 
trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  first  platoon  forms  as  prescribed  in  the 
platoon  drill,  and  the  particular  guide  of  the  right 
places  himself  on  the  right  of  this  platoon. 

The  three  last  platoons  take  the  trot,  and  form 
successively  at  the  coniinand  form  platoon,  given 
by  their  chiefs  in  sufficient  time  to  command 
MARCH,  when  the  four  first  files  arrive  at  their  pro- 
per distance  from  the  platoon  which  precedes  them; 
then  these  four  first  files  take  the  ivat/:. 

The  lirst  captain  commands  ^uidc  left  when  the  lirst 
platoon  is  formed,  and  gives  a  ])oiiitof  direction. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  repeals  successively  the  ("om- 
inand  of  the  guide  as  soon  as  his  platoon  is  Ibrmed. 

When  tlie  column  is   at   the  trot,  these  foiiiritio'i -^  arc 


THE     SQUADRON.  163 

executed  at  the  gallop,  following  the  same  principles, 
at  the  command:  1.  Form  twos,  or  form  fours,  or  for77i 
platoons — gallop  ;  2.  March. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  these  movements 
are  execut«il  as  prescribed,  in  forming  at  the  same  gait, 
the  head  of  the  column  passing  to  the  trot  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH. 

The  foregoing  movements  arc  employed  in  passing 
defiles,  the  first  captain  placing  himself  always  at  the 
head  of  his  squadron  in  order  to  direct  the  movements 
of  it  according  to  the  localities.  If  it  happens  that  the 
chiefs  of  the  last  platoons  do  not  hear  the  command, 
they  conform  imnieiliately  to  the  movements  of  the  pla- 
toons which  precede  them. 

The  squadron  marcliing  in  column  with 
distance,  to  face  it  in  tlie  opposite 
direction,  and  to  face  it  again  to  the 
front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right  in 
front,  the  tirst  captain  commands  : 

1    Platoons  left -about  ivliccl.  2.   M  ARC  II. 

At  the  first  coinmand,  the  trooper  on  the  left  of* 
each  platoon,  who  becomes  the  pivot,  prepares  to 
halt,  without  however  slackening  his  pace. 

At  the  conimantl,  March,  the  pivots  halt,  and 
the  marching  flanks  wheel  at  the  gait  in  which  the 
column  was  marching,  regulating  themselves  upon 
the  outer  flank  of  the  platoon  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  so  as  to  complete  the  first  half  of  the 
movement  at  the  same  instant. 


k 


164  THE     SQUADRON. 

The  marchinp:  flanks  are  then  governed  by  the 
phitoon,  wliicli  becomes  the  head  of  the  eolumn 
after  tlie  movement  is  comijletod. 

The  nutvcment  bein^'  iie;irly  firii>he(l.  tlic  first  captain 
commands: 

1.  Forward.  2.   (kiidc  right. 

Dining  this  movement,  the  particnlnr  j^uiile  of  the  left 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  fourth  platoon;  the 
particular  guide  of  the  right  takes  his  place  as  file- 
closer  in  rear  of  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  the  other  file-closers  pass  to  the  side 
oppot^ite  to  the  guide. 

To  cause  the  sfjiiadrou  to  resume  its  prinsitive  direc- 
tion, the  first  captain  commands:  1.  Platoons  right-about 
wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  :left ;  which 
is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  wheel-about  is  usually  commanded  towards  the 
t-idc  of  the  guide;  it  may,  however,  be  towards  the 
other  side  when  it  becomes  necessary. 

To  halt  the  columu. 

The  column  being  on  the  nuindi.  to  halt  it,  the  first 
captain  commands: 

1.   Column.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command^  all  tlic  platoons  prepare 
to  halt. 

At  the  coiiiniand  halt,  all  the  platoons  halt  at 
the  same  time. 

After  the  coniniaiid  HALT,  there  should  be  no  movement 


THE    SQUADRON.  165 

.n  the  platoons,  the  distances  and  directions  should  be 
corrected  only  in  marching. 

The  first  captain  places  himself  behind  the  guide  of 
the  second  platoon,  to  see  if  the  guides  of  the  first  and 
second  platoon  have  marched  upon  the  point  indicated  ; 
he  also  observes  if  the  prescribed  distances  have  been 
preserved.  If  they  have  not  been,  and  if  the  guides 
have  not  marched  upon  the  point  indicated,  the  column 
is  put  again  in  march,  in  order  to  correct  their  distances 
and  direction. 

To  form  line  on  the  left. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  its  left  flank,  the  first  captain 
conmiands  : 

1.  Left  into  line  wheel.         4,  Right — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  moves  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  direction 
of  the  guides  of  the  column,  at  the  distance  of  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  facing  the  side  towards  which 
the  line  will  be  formed. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squadron  wheels 
into  line,  the  trooper  on  the  left  flank  of  each 
platoon  serving  as  pivot,  and  turning  upon  his  own 
ground. 

The  first  captain  commands  halt,  the  moment 
the  marching  flanks  have  nearly  completed  their 
movement,  and  then  right — dress. 

At  this  command,  all  the  platoons  align  them- 
selves. 


166  THE  SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands  front. 

During  the  wheel,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
left  resumes  his  place  in  line. 

The  first  captain,  after  liavinp  commanded  left  into  line 
wheel,  assures  liiniself,  before  commanding;  march,  that 
the  particular  jrnlde  of  the  rij^ht  is  exactly  upon  tlie 
direction  of  the  guides  of  the  column. 

Immediately  after  commanding  HALT,  he  moves  rapidly 
to  the  right  flank  of  the  squadron,  to  observe  that  the 
pivots  execute  their  movements  properly,  and  that  the 
officers  and  troopers  align  themselves  correctly. 

The  particular  guide,  who  moves  upon  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  guides  of  the  colunm,  should  take  rather  too 
much  ground  than  not  enough.  The  conductor  of  the 
marching  flank  of  the  leading  platoon  should  align  him- 
self upon  this  guide,  without  endeavosing  to  approach 
him. 

To  form  the  squadron  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  the  first  captain  commands  :  1.  Platoons  left  wheel ; 

2.  March;  3.  Halt;  which  is  executed  as  prescribed, 
when  rigltt  in  front,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  )narch  in  column  with  distance,  left  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands  :  1.  Column  forward  ;  2.  March  ; 

3.  Guide  right  ;   which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  when 
the  column  has  the  right  in  front. 

Tlie  changes  of  direction  by  successive  wheels,  and 
the  individual  oblique  march,  when  the  column  has  the 
left  in  front,  are  executed  on  the  same  principles  as 
when  the  right  is  in  front;  except,  that  in  tiie  changes 
ol  direction,  it  is  the  vrincij)al  guide  of  the  left  who 
marks  the  ))oint  of  the  wlieol,  placing  himself  as  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  principal  guide  of  the  right, 
when  the  right  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  made  to  break  by  fours,  by  ttoos,  aiul  by  file, 
to  form    twos,  fours ^  and  platoons,  at  the    same   gait,  or 


THE  SQUADRON.  167 

douMing  the  gait,  following  the  principles  prescribed 
when  the  right  is  in  front,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  break  by  fours,  twos,  &c.,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands :  1.  By  fours  (  or  by  twos ,  or  by  file  )  f7-om  the  left  ; 
2.  March. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  same 
principles  are  followed  as  when  the  right  is  in  front,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

The  squadron  marching  in  cohuiin  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  halt  it,  conform  to  the  principles  prescribed 
when  the  Dght  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  lx?ing  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  the  right,  the  first  captain 
commands:  1.  Right  info  line  wheel;  2.  March;  3. 
Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5.  Front. 

To  break  by  tbe  right  to  inarch  to  the 

left. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoons  break  hy  the  right — to  march  to  the 
left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  commands;  1.  Platoon Jorward;  2.  Guide 
left. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  marches  10  paces 
to  the  front,  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward  at 
the  commands :     1.  L(ft — Turn;  2.  Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth,  command :  1.  Platoon 


108  THE    SQUADRON. 

forward ;  2.  Guide  hft;  when  the  chief  of  the 
pUitoon  on  their  right  comnmnds  march;  and  they 
command  MAUCii,  when  the  cliief  of  that  platoon, 
after  liaving  turned  to  the  left,  commands  :  For- 
ward. 

To  form  line  to  tlie  right  l)y  inversion. 

The  squadron  marching  in  open  column,  right  in  front, 
to  form  it  in  line  upon  its  right  flank  by  inversion,  the 
first  capt.iin  changes  the  guide;  for  this  purpose,  he 
commands  : 

Guide  right. 

The  second  captain  passes  by  the  rear  of  the  column 
to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides  ;  the  first  captain  passes 
hy  the  head  of  the  column  to  tlie  side  of  the  new  guides, 
rectifies  their  direction,  then  halts  the  cohimn  an(i  com- 
mands : 

1.  B}/  inversion  right  into  line  ichcel. 

2.  March.  4.  Left — Dress. 

3.  Halt.  5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  as  in  forming  line  on  the  left. 

During  the  movement,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
left  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  platoon, 
and  the  particular  guide  of  the  right,  who  moves  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  new  guides  of  the  column, 
remains  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  cohimn,  right  in  front, 
tljc  first  captain  commands:  1.  Platoons  left  wheel; 
2.  March:  3.  Halt  (or  Forward);  4.  Guide  left. 


THE    SQUADRON.  160 

The  first  captain  passes  to  tlie  side  of  the  guides,  the 
second  caj)taiii  passes  to  the  opposite  side. 

The  sfpiadron  may  also  be  put  in  line  in  natiual  order, 
by  wheeling  the  platoon  to  the  left  (or  to  the  7-i<ihl)  about. 
The  second  captain  follows  the  nrarchin<!;  flank  of"  the; 
platoon  behind  which  he  is  placed. 

The  sqnadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left  to 
march  to  the  right,  on  the  principles  ])rescril)ed,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  Platoons  break  by 
the  left — to  march  to  the  right ;  2.  March. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  formed  in  line  on  its  left  flankby  inversion, 
(after  having  changed  the  guide  and  haltedthe  column,) 
on  the  ])rinciples  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  nieans,  at 
the  commands:  1.  By  inversion  left  into  live  wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right — Dress;  5.  Front. 

To  put  the  sqnadron  again  in  column,  left  in  front,  the 
first  captain  commands:  1.  Platoon  right  wheel;  2. 
March;  3.  Halt  (or  Forward);  A.  Guide  right. 

The  scjnndron  may  also  be  put  in  natural  order,  by 
wheeling  the  platoons  to  the  right  (or  left)  about. 

To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  to 
march  to  the  left 

The  squadron  weing  in  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands :  • 

« 

1.  Platoons  break  hy  the  right  to  the  rear — to 
march  to  the  left. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  tlie  first  pla- 
toon commands  :  Platoon  right-about  wheel- 
15 


170  THE    SQUADRON. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  tlie  first  platoon,  this  platoon  executes  its  wheel 
to  the  right-ahout ;  when  nearly  terminated,  it^ 
chief  commands:  1.  Forward;  2.  (hiidc  left; 
and  after  marchin<j:  10  paces  straight  forward,  he 
commands  :  1.  Riyht — Turn  ;  2.  Forward. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively 
those  of  tic  third  and  fourth,  command:  Flutoon 
right-about  wheel,  when  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on 
their  right  commands  march,  and  they  command 
march,  when  that  platoon  has  passed  over  three- 
fourths  of  its  first  wheel. 

To  form  on  risrht  into  line. 

o 

The  pqiiiidron  marcliinj^  in  column  witli  distanco. 
right  in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  the  prolonijation  and 
in  advance  ofits  right  flank,  the  first  captain  commands  ; 

1.  On  right  info  line.  3.    Guide  right. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Right. 

At  the  command  march^  ho  commands,  Turn  ; 
the  platoon  turns  to  the  right  and  moves  forward 
at  the  command  Forward  ;  whMi  it  has  marched 
30  paces,  its  chief  commands  Halt,  and  then 
Right — Dress. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  forward, 
without  approaching  the  line ;  as  soon  as  each  one 
arrives  abreast  of  the  fourth  file  from  the  left  of 
the  platoon  which  should  be  on  its  right,  its  chief 
commands:  1.  Right — Turn;  2.  Forward;  this 


THE  SQUADRON.  171 

platoon  then  directs  itself  towards  the  place  it  is  to 
occupy  in  line,  and  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  file- 
closers,  its  chief  commands  Halt,  and  then  Right — 
Dress. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands.  Front. 

To  form  on  left  into  line  by  inversion. 

Tlie  squadron  inaroliing  in  column  with  distance, 
right  in  front,  to  form  it  in  Hue  upon  the  prolongation 
and  in  advance  of  its  left  flank,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  B(/  inversion  on  left  into  line. 

2.  March. 

8.    Guide  left. 
4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands  Left. 

At  the  comn)and  march,  he  commands  Turn  ; 
the  platoon  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward 
at  the  command  forward;  when  it  has  marched 
80  puces,  its  chief  commands,  Halt,  and  then 
Left — Dress. 

The  other  platoons  continue  to  march  forward, 
without  approaching  the  line;  as  each  platoon  ar- 
rives abreast  of  the  fourth  file  from  the  right  of 
the  platoon  which  should  be  on  its  left,  its  chief 
commands:  1.  iy^;/i'-^TuKN  ;  2.  Forward;  this 
platoon  directs  itself  towards  the  place  it  is  to  oc- 
cupy in  line,  and  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  file- 
closers,  its  chief  commands,  Halt,  and  then  Left — 
Dress. 


172  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  tlie  first  captain 
commands  :  Front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the  left  to 
the  roar  to  uiarfli  to  the  rij^ln,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  mean^,  at  the  commands — 1. 
Platoons  break  by  the  left  to  the  rear — to  march  to  the 
right  ;  "2.  March. 

The  squaciron  marching  in  cohmin  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  on  llie  prolongation  and  in 
atlvance  ofits  left  tlanlc,  follow  tlie  principles  jn-e^cribed. 
l)nt  by  invers^e  means,  at  the  conimands:  1.  On  left  into 
line  J-  2    March;  '3.  Guide  left ;  4.  FuoxT. 

The  sqnadron  marching  in  colnmn  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  upon  the  prolongation  and  in 
advance  of  its  riglit  fiank,  conform  to  the  principle.*; 
j)reseribed,  bat  by  inverse  moan?,  at  the  commands — 1. 
By  inversion  on  right  into  line ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  right  ; 
4.  Front. 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  lir^t  captain  commands: 

1.  Bi/  platoons  to  the  front  !^ 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commuiids  :  Platoon  foncttnl,  and  the  chiefs 
of  the  three  other  platoons :  Platoon  riylit  half- 
ivheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  ofii- 

*The  words  '7o  the  front ^^^  arc  superfluous  ;  it  is  better 
to  command  :  By  platoons,  March,  Guide  left. 

\ 


THE    SQUADRON.  173 

cers,  the  first  platoon  moves  forward  ;  its  chief  re- 
peats the  indication  of  the  guide. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  p]at(5on,  when  their 
half-ichcel  to  the  right  is  executed,  commands  :  1. 
Forward  -,  2.  Guide,  left,  and  then  marches 
straight  forward.  When  the  left  of  his  platoon 
arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  platoon  which  pre- 
cedes, he  commands:  1.  Left  half-wheel;  2. 
March  ;  3.  Forward,  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

The  first  captain  does  not  announce  the  guide  until 
the  first  platoon  has  broken  to  the  front;  and  he  gives 
the  guide  a  jooint  of  direction. 

To  form  front  into  line. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  it  in  line  upon  the  head  of  the  cohunn, 
the  first  captain   commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.    Guide  ri<jht. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands :  Platoon  forv-ard.  and  the  chiefs 
of  the  three  other  platoons  command  :  Platoon  left 
half-ivhecl. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  first  platoon  moves  forward  ;  its  chief 
repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide,  and  when  it 
has  marched  30  paces,  he  commands:  1.  Halt; 
2.  Right — Dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  platoon,  when  the  left 
half  wheel  is  executed,  commands  :  1 .  Forward  ; 
15* 


174  THE   SQUADRON. 

2.  Guide  rl(jht,  and  marches  straight  forward. 
When  the  right  of  his  phitoon  arrives  opposite  the 
left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes,  hecouiuiands :  1. 
Ri(lht  half  ulirtd ;  2.  FORWARD;  and  when  he 
arrives  abreast  of  the  file-closer:  1.  Halt;  2.  Right 
— Dress. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  tirst  captain 
commands  :  Front. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  column  is  on  the  march  ;  in  this  case,  the  chief  of 
the  fir!-t  phitoon,  continuing  to  march  on,  does  not  com- 
mand/;i«/oo)i/oru'ar</,  nor  MARCH,  but  repeats  the  indi- 
cation of  the  guide. 

The  squadron  being  in  line;  it  is  broken  by  the  left  by 
]datoons  to  march  to  the  front,  on  the  principles  "jjre- 
s('ril:)ed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  tlie  commands:  1. 
By  the  left — by  platoons  to  the  front  j  2.  March;  3.  Guide 
right.^ 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  it  is  formed  in  line  on  the  Jieud  of  column,  fol- 
lowing the  principiss  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands:    1.  Front  into  line  ;  2.  March  ; 

3.  Guide  left;  4.  Front. 

This  fornuition  is  executed,  when  the  column  is 
marching,  as  pre.scribetl  above. 

To  break  hy  platoons  to  tlie  right,  and 
to  move  forward  after  the  wheel. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Platoons  right  wheel.  3.  FORWARD. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  left. 

*Ii  is  better  to  command,  By  platoons  from  the  left. 


THE   SQUADRON.  175 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  platoon 
prepares  to  step  off  promptly,  and  the  pivot  to  turn 
upon  itself. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  principles  of 
the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

At  the  third  command,  the  platoons  march 
straight  forward. 

Tlie  first  captain  commands  forward,  when  tlie 
wheels  are  nearly  completed,  and  gives  a  point  of  di- 
rection to  the  guide  of  the  column  ;  he  observes  that 
tlie  marching  flanks  step  off  at  the  same  instant,  wheel 
and  arrive  together  in  column,  and  tliat  the  pivots  com- 
mence tlie  march  together  at  the  command  forward. 

To  form  line  to  the  front  by  inversion. 

The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  to 
•form  line  by  inversion  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the. 
first  captain  commands : 

1.  By  inversion  front  into  line.  8.    Guide  left. 

2.  March.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Platoon  foruard ;  and  the  three 
other  chiefs  of  platoon  command.  Platoon  rigid  Jialf 
icJieel. 

^  the  command  MARCH,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for 
forming  front  into  line,  but  by  inverse  means. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when 
the  column  is  marching;  in  this  case,  the  cl^ief  of  the 
first  platoon  dues  not  command  platoon  fonoard.  nor 
march,  but  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 


176  THE    SQUADRON. 

The  sqiuulron  beinjj  in  line,  it  iribiolicn  In-  platoons  to 
llie  left,  in  order  to  move  forward  after  the  wheel,  fol- 
lowing the  jjrineiples  jireperibed,  but  by  inverse  means, 
Mt  the  commands  :  I.  Platoons  left  wheel;  2.  March;  3. 
Forward  ;  4    Guide  right. 

'I'Ijc  squadron  beinjr  in  eolunin  with  distance,  left  in 
iront,  to  Ibrni  line  by  inversion  upon  llic  head  ol"  tho 
lolumn,  follow  the  princij)los-jiist  prescribed,  but  by  in- 
verse means,  at  the  eotnmands:  1.  By  inrer&inn  front  into 
live;  12.  March;  .'{.  Cuidc  ris;ht :  4.  Front. 

This  formatiorj  is  executed  in  the  same  njanner,  when 
ihe  column  is  marching  ;  in  tiiis  case,  tiie  chief  of  the 
lirst  platoon  does  not  command  platoon  fnrvard,  nor 
MARCH,  but  repeats  the  indication  of  tlie  guide. 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  I'igbt,  head 
of  column  to  the  left  or  hall  left 

The  squadronbeing  in  lino,  the  lirst  captain  commands: 

1.  Platoons  ri'jhf  vh' 1 1 — h'lul  of  column  to  the 
left  or  half  left.  ' 

2.  March. 

o.  Forward. 
4.    Guide  left. 

At  the  coniniaiid  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  riyht. 

At  the  third  conunaiid,  the  chief  of  the  tirst  pla- 
toon commands,  1.  Jjeft — 'J'urn  ;  2.  Forward; 
the  other  platoons  move  on  and  turn  successively  at 
the  coninumd  of  their  chiefs,  on  the  ground  upon 
whicli  the  first  had  turned. 

'J'hc  fir-tcajMaiii  coniniands,  fouwaud.  when  tlu^  wheels 
are  nearly  completed,  and  gives  a  point  of  direction. 


THE    SQUADRON.  177 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the 
rear  of  the  column. 

The  sqiiatlron  beiiii:  in  column  with  dititance,  right  in 
front,  to  form  line  taoed  to  the  roar,  the  first  captain 
coinniands  : 

1.  Platoons  left  about  wheel.  4.  March. 

2.  March.  5.   Guide  left. 

3.  Front  into  line.  6.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  left  about. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
platoon,  which  becomes  the  head  of  the  column, 
when  its  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  commands : 
1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left;  and  when  it  has 
marched  80  paces,  1.  Halt;  2.  Xp/i!-— Dress. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons,  on  completing 
three-fourths  of  their  wheel,  command  :  1.  For- 
ward; 2.  Guide  left;  and  direct  themselves 
towards  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  line,  con- 
forming in  other  respects  to  what  is  prescribed  for 
front  into  line,  when  the  column  has  its  left  in  front. 

The  first  captain  <^omy\vAX\i\^.  front  into  line.  \x\  sufficient 
time  to  command  march,  and  Guide  left,  when  the  pla- 
toons have  completed  three-fourths  of  their  wheel. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  inver- 
'     sion,  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

The  scjuadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  and  ob.^taeles  are  pre:>ent(;d  upon  its  left  flanlc,  t(i 
form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain  commands: 


178  THE   SQUADRON. 

1.  Plafoous  riijlit-ahout  ichecL  4.  March. 

2.  Mahcii.  5.    f!uide  right. 
H.  Bi/ inversion  front  into  line.  6.   Front. 

At  the  second  coniuiand,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wlieel  to  the  right-ahout. 

At  the  fourth  coiiimand,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
platoon,  which  becomes  the  head  of  the  cohimn, 
when  its  wlieel  is  nearly  completed,  commands  : 
1.  Forward;  2.  Gnixh  right;  and  when  it  has 
marched  30   paces,  1.  Halt;  2.  Right — Drf>!?. 

The  chief  of  the  other  platoons,  at  three-fourths 
of  the  wheel,  command  :  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide 
right ;  and  direct  themselves  towards  the  place 
they  are  to  occupy  in  line,  conforming,  in  other 
respects,  to  what  is  prescribed  for  t^  inversion  front 
into  line,  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

The  squadron  beiiij;  in  line,  to  break  it  by  platoons  to 
the  left,  head  of  column  to  the  ripht  (or  half  right),  fol- 
low the  principles  i)rescribed,  but  by  inverse  nienns.  at 
the  commands  :  1.  Platoons  left  wheel — head  of  eolnmn  to 
the  right  (or  half  right);  2.  March;  3.  FoitWAun ;  4. 
Guide  right. 

The  squadron  being  in  cohnnn  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  to  Ibrm  line  faced  to  tlie  rear,  follow  the  principles 
prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1. 
Platoons  right  about  wheel :  2.  March;  3.  Front  into 
line;  4.  March;  T).   Guidt  right  :  6.  Front. 

The  squadron  bcin<j  in  column  with  distance.  left  in 
front,  and  obstacles  are  j>resented  on  its  ii;iht  flank,  to 
form  line  rfaced  to  the  rear,  follow  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commaJids  :  1. 
Platoons  left -about  wheel  ;  2.  March;  3.  By  inversion  front 
into  line  ;  4.  March;  5.   Guide  left  :  G.  Front. 


THE    SQUADRON.  179 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right,  head 
of  column  to  the  right  (or  half  right.) 

Tlie  squadron  being  i)i  line,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoons  right  icheel — head  of  column  to  the 
right  (or  half  right. ^ 

2.  March. 

3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes 
its  wheel  to  the  right. 

At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands  :  1.  Right — Turn;  2  Forward. 
The  other  platoons  move  on,  and  turn  successively 
at  the  command  of  their  chief,  on  the  same  ground. 

The  first  captain  commands  Forward,  when  the 
wljieels  are  nearly  completed  : 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  I'ear  on  the 
head  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  to  form  line  upon  the  hend  or  the  column  faced 
^0  the  rear,  the  first  captain  commands  :  > 

W 

1.  By  inversion  front  into  line.         3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 


Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  hy  invevsion 


1  ^  0  THE   SQUADRON. 

f'rant  into  linr^  rii/ht  w  fnjnt,  but  witliout  rectifying 
the  tilignnioiit. 

Till'  s(]u;\(lroii  being  ibnned,  the  tirst  captain  immedi- 
ately comiiianils  : 

1.  Platoon  kftahout  wheel.  4.   Right — Dress. 

2.  MarchT  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

To  form  line  faced  to   tlie  rear,  by  in- 
version, on  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right 
in  front,  and  obstacles  are  pret^ented  on  its  riglit  flank, 
to  form  line  upon  the  head  olthe  column,  faced  to  the 
rear,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.  3.    Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  front  into 
hne,  right  in  front,  but  without  rectifying  the  align- 
ment. 

The  squadron  being  formed,  the  lirst  captain  imme- 
diately commands  : 

1.  Platoons  right-ahout  wheel.      4.   Left — Dress. 

2.  March.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  by  platoons  to 
iht.'  left,  head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half  left,  follow  the 
X)rinciples  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means, at  the  com- 
mands .  1.  Platoons  left  ivheel — head  of  column  to  the  left 
(or  half  left)  \  2.  March  ;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right. 


THE   SQUADRON.  181 

The  squadron  beinii  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  to  fnrm  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  faced  to 
the  rear,  follow  the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  coinmands:   I.  By  inversion  front  into  line  ; 

2.  March;  3.  Guuh  ri<rht ;  and  the  squat!  ron  being 
formed,  1.  Platoons  righi-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3. 
Halt  ;  4.  Left — Dress  ;  5.  Front. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front,  and  obstacles  are  presented  upon  its  left  flank,  to 
form  in  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column  faced  to  the 
rear,  follow  the  principles  prescribed,  but  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  Front  into  line  ;  2.  March  ; 

3.  Guide  left;  and  the  squadron  being  formeil,  1.  Pla- 
toons  left-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Halt;  4.  Right — 
Dress  ;  5.  Front. 

All  these  formations  f  iced  to  the  rear  are  executed  in 
the  same  manner,  when  the  column  is  marching. 

Movements  by  fours,  the  squadron  being 
in  column  with  distance. 

The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in 
front,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  towards  its  left  ilank, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours  left  wheel  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.    Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  wheels  are  executed 
in  each  rank,  by  fours,  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

If,  instead  of  moving  forward,  after  having  wheeled  to 
the  left  by  fours,  the  first  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  col- 
umn, he  commands  :   Halt. 

To  take  a  direction  parallel  to  the  first,  and  return  to 
column  with  distance,  the  first  captain  commands  • 

16 


182  TDE  SQUADRON. 

1.  Ih/  Jofirs  riijht  uhrrl,  o.    1 1  ALT. 

2.  Makcii. 

Wliicli  is  t'xecuted  on  the  .«:umc  piiiici|ilc's,  Ixil 
by  inverse  means. 

If,  insteiul  nf  lialiiiip,  the  lii>i  cMptMiii  wishes  the 
column  to  inal-ch  lorward,  he  coinmaniJs:  I.  Forward; 
•2.   Guide  left. 

The  sqimdrnn  beiri}:  in  column  witfi  distancre,  ri^ht  in 
front,  it  is  caused  to  gain  p;roun(i  towards  its  rijilit  flank, 
by  the  command:*:  1.  By  Jours  light  w/iccl ;  'J.  March; 
3.  Forward  ;  A.  Guide  left ;  and  to  resume  tlie  primitive 
direction  at  the  commands:  1.  By  fours  left  wheel ;  2. 
March;  H.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left ;  (or  3.   Halt.) 

Tlie  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  ripht  in 
front;  to  cause  it  to  march  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain 
commands  : 

1.  Ih/  fours  left  about  icTieel      3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   fjuldr  rUjkt. 

At  the  comnianfl  MARCH,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted, in  each  rank,  by  fours. 

If,  in.slead  of  niovinii  forward  after  \\\c  wind  to  theleft- 
aboul  liy  fiiur.t,  \\\i^.  t'lrsX  capiain  wishes  to  halt  the  col- 
umn, he  commands  :  Halt. 

To  return  to  the  primiiive  direction,  ihe  first  cajjtain 
connnands : 

1.  By  fours  ri<jht-ahoat  wheel.  3.   Halt. 

2.  March. 

AVliicli  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  in- 
verse means. 


THE   SQUADRON.  183 

if  the  first  captnin  wishes  the  cohimn  to  march  for- 
ward, he  commands  :  1.  FoRWAun;  2.   Guide  left. 

In  all  the  movements  to  the  left,  anil  to  the  right  by 
fours,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  move  up  ahreast  of  the  first 
rank  of  their  platoons,  on  th(?  side  of  the  guide. 

The  lirst  and  second  c:>i)iains,  the  lileclosers,  and  the 
particidar  guides  of  tlie  right  and  leit  preserve  their 
places  after  the  tvhcel  to  the  left  or  right  by  fours  is  com- 
pleted, facing  in  the  new  direction, 

In  tlie  wheels  to  the  left  or  rightabout  by  fours,  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  march  behind  the  centre  of  tlieir  pla- 
toons, and  the  lile-elosers  in  front.  The  particular  guide 
of  the  right  is  on  the  left  of  his  platoon,  and  the  partic- 
ular guide  of  the  left,  in  front  of  his. 

During  the  inarch  by  llanlc.  the  first  captain  observes 
that  all  the  ranks  march  on  the  same  line,  regulate  their 
movements  towards  the  side  (if  the  guide,  and  preserve 
a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  first  platoon;  that  the 
troopers  keep  exactly  at  the  distance  of  two  feet  from, 
and  follow  those  who  precede  them  ;  he  observes  that 
the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  preserve  their  proper 
intervals  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  to  that  it  may  not  be 
necessary  to  correct  distances  when  the  squadron  returns 
to  the  order  in  column. 

The  movements  by  fours  are  executed  in  the  same 
manner,  when  the  column  is  marching. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  left 
in  front,  all  these  movements  are  executed  on  the  same 
principles. 

Direct  marcli  of  the  squadron  in  line. 

The  troopers,  to  keep  alisned,  shoidd  feel  lightly  the 
boot  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the  guide;  this  principle 
is  borne  constantly  in  mind,  as  it  is  the  only  means  of 
being  at  ease  in  the  ranks,  and  preserving  the  iirdividual 
alignment.  With  respect  to  the  general  alignment,  the 
non-commissioned  officers  and  flank  files  emleavor  to  re- 
main  aligned  between  each  other;  consequently   they 


184  THE    SQUADRON. 

wilt  not  be  require*!  to  keep  the  eyes  to  the  from,  but  from 
time  to  time  will  give  a  glance  townrds  the  guide,  in  or- 
der to  keep  on  the  same  line,  avoiding  to  carry  the  bridle 
hand  in  that  ilirection,  that  there  may  be  no  crowtling  in 
the  ranks. 

It  has  cilieaily  been  statcil  that  the  guide  of  a  troo]) 
should  never  put  himself  in  motion  suddenly;  the  guide 
of  the  sfjUJidron  should  then  coiunu.'nee  the  gaii  indieaied. 
slowly,  lie  slunild  also  pass  gradually  from  a  sl(iW  gait 
to  a  fjuick  gait,  and  frum  a  (juiek  to  a  slow  gait ;  this 
principle  is  applicable  also  to  the  troopers,  who  should 
correct  their  positions  with  respect  to  the  alignment  by 
degrees,  quickening  or  slackening  the  pace. 

The  direction  given  to  the  guide  having  a  great  in- 
fluence upon  the  regularity  ol'the  march,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  fixed  point  shoidd  be  always  chosen  in  a  direc- 
tion exactly  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  squadron: 
if  the  localities  do  not  i)ermit  the  particular  guide  to  take 
intermediate  jioints  sufliciently  prominent,  they  are  sup- 
plied by  the  tile-closers,  who  are  placed  lacing  the  guide, 
at  f)0  paces  apart;  they  replace  themselves  on  the  jiro- 
longation  of  the  same  direction,  as  the  squadron  reaches 
them. 

The  first  cajUain,  after  having  anuoimced  the  guide, 
moves  to  the  rear,  and  gives  him  a  fixed  point  of  direc- 
tion upon  which  the  squadron  is  to  march,  and  indicates 
it  also  to  the  noll-co^nmis^ioned  ollicer,  who  rej)laces  the 
])ariicular  guide  in  the  front  rank,  the  latter  serving  as 
an  intermediate  point  for  the  former.  The  fixed  point 
is  also  made  known  to  the  second  captain. 

The  first  captain,  if  he  thinks  proper,  may  charge  the 
second  captain  with  giving  the  direction. 

The  point  of  directioti  being  given,  the  first  captain 
moves  to  the  centre  of  his  sfjuadron,  and  faces  it,  to  as- 
sure himself  that  the  troopers  step  olf  together  at  the 
command  of  execution.  lie  afterwards  moves  wherever 
he  thinks  his  presence  is  most  recjuired. 


THE    SQUADRON.  185 

The  officers  should  remain  constantly  aliened  upon 
the  particular  guide  placed  on  their  line,  keep  at  one 
pace  from  tlie  centre  of  their  platoons,  and  march 
straight  forward;  for  it  is  upon  their  alignment  that  that 
of  the  squadron  depends. 

The  particular  guide,  who  marches  abreast  of  the 
officers,  should  march  always  at  an  even  gait,  so  as  not 
to  oblige  the  opposite  flank  to  increase  or  diminish  its 
pace. 

This  guide,  as  he  advances,  shoidd  take  new^  interme- 
diate points,  to  be  able  to  direct  himself  upon  the  given 
points  without  deviating. 

The  file-closer,  who  replaces  the  particular  guide, 
marches  so  that  the  latter  may  conceal  from  him  the 
given  point  of  direction.  He  should  keep  the  head  of 
his  horse  constantly  atone  pace  from  the  croup  of  the 
horse  of  the  guide,  and  inform  the  guide  if  he  departs 
from  t!«;e  given  point,  as  he  is  more  especially  charged 
with  the  direction  of  tlie  march. 

During  the  march,  the  second  captain  should  superin- 
tend the  guide  charged  with  the  direction,  and  for  this 
purpose  he  marches  at  10  or  15  paces  in  rear  of  this 
guide. 

If  after  commencing  the  march,  he  perceives  that  the 
troopers  carry  the  bridle  hand  to  the  left,  it  is  a  proof 
almost  certain,  that  the  point  of  direction  is  to  the  left  of 
the  peri^endicular  line;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  troopers 
are  obliged  to  open  to  the  right,  it  is  an  evidence  that  the 
point  of  direction  is  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicular  line  : 
the  second  captain  then  gives  a  point  of  direction  more 
to  the  right  or  more  to  the  lefc. 

The  second  captain  observes  that  the  rear-rank  men 
are  exactly  at  their  proper  distance,  and  that  the  file- 
closers  march  well  aligned. 

The  regularity  of  the  march  in  line  deprndiiig  much 
upon   the  attention    which   the   flank   files  pay  to  their 

16* 


186  THE   SQUADRON. 

alignment,  these  files  should  be  ;it  first  exercised  sepa- 
rately. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  anil  correctly  aligned,  thc- 
first  ca])tain  comtnands: 

1.  Flank  files  forward.  3,  March. 

2.  Guide  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  particular  guide  of 
the  right  moves  up  abreast  of  tlie  chiefs  of  platoon  ; 
he  is  immediately  replaced  by  tlie  file-closer  of  the 
first  platoon. 

At  the  command  marcti,  the  chiefs  of  jilatoon, 
the  flank  files,  (right  and  left  file  of  each  platoon,) 
and  the  particular  guides,  move  straight  forward, 
the  flank  files  preserving  between  each  other  the 
necessary  interval,  in  order  to  receive  the  troopers 
of  their  platoons,  and  when  they  have  marched  30 
paces,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Flunk  files.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
flank  files,  and  the  particular  guides,  halt. 

The  first  captain,  after  beiny  assured  that  the  ilnnk  files 
have  niarohcd  in  a  direction  perpendicular,  and  upon  a 
line  parallel  to  the  front  o(  the  squadron,  commands: 

1.  Squadron  for^card.  3.   March. 

2.  Guide  ritjht. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  flank  files  and  the 
squadron  move  forward. 


THE    SQUADRON.  187 

The  flank  files  and  the  squadron  having  marched  cor- 
rectly in  the  }iivcn  direction,  to  halt  thern,  the  first  cap- 
tain comiTiands  : 

1.  Squadron.  2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  squadron  and  the 
flank  files  halt. 

To  cause  the  platoons  to  re-enter  their  places,  the  first 
captain,  after  giving  notice  to  the  flank  files  to  stand  fast, 
commands : 

1.   Squadron  forward.  2.  March. 

And  when  at  one  pace  from  the  flank  files,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.  Squadron.  3.  Riijht — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  third  command,  the  particular  guide  and 
the  file-closer,  who  replaced  him  in  the  iront  rank 
of  the  squadron,  resume  their  places  in  the  line; 
the  troopers  return  to  their  intervals  together,  and 
dress  to  the  right. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  Front. 

This  exercise  having  been  executed  several  times  at 
the  walk,  is  repeated  at  the  trot. 

When  the  flank  files  have  become  habituated  to  regu- 
late their  mnvements  upon  each  other,  the  entire  squad- 
ron is  juarclied  in  line,  first  at  the  walk,  and  progress- 
ively at  the  trot  and  gallop. 


188  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  tqtiadron  being  in  line,  to  move  forward,  the  first 
captain   romniatttls: 

1,  Sfjuarfron  foricard.  3.  March. 

2.  Guide  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  particular  guide 
and  file-closer  of  the  first  platoon  coniorm  to  what 
is  prescribed. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squadron  moves 
forward. 

To  hah  tlie  squadron,  the  fir.§t  captain  cdtnnianils  : 

1.  Squadron.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  squadron  halts. 
At  the  third  command,  the  S(juadron  aligns  itself. 
The  squadron  being  aligned,   the  first  captain 
commands.  Front. 

The  squadron  inaiching  at  the  walk,  before  passing  to 
the  trot,  the  first  captain  assures  liiniself  that  the  point 
of  direction  is  gf»od.  and  thai  the  S(jiiadron  marches 
witli  unif  irrnity  atid  steadiness. 

When  the  s(]uadron  marches  steadily  at  the  trot,  it 
passes  to  the  gallop. 

The  first  captain  observes  tliat  the  troopers  kecj)  their 
horses  quiet,  and  do  not  quicken  the  gait  more  than  ne- 
cessary, a  common  fi^iult  in  the  march  at  the  gallop.  For 
this  purpose,  the  chiefs  of  phitoon,  the  guide  and  the 
fiardc  files  ])ay  alientiun  to  keep  their  hor.ses  at  an  even 
and  moderate  gallop. 

In  the  marches  at  the  /ro/,  and  particuhuly  at  tho  gal- 
lop, it  is  necessary  to  skicken  the  pace  as  .soon  as  any 
disorder  is  discovered. 

To  n)arcli  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  commences  at 
tli'^  rrdlk  :   then  passes  to  the  trot ;   the  same  progression 


THE   SQUADRON.  189 

is  observed  in  order  to  halt  when  marching  at  tlie  gal- 
lop; the  squadron  is  then  exorcised  in  moving  oflfrom  a 
halt  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop,  and  in  halting  when 
marching  at  tliese  gaits. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  in  marching  with  the  guide 
on  the  left,  as  with  the  guide  on  the  right. 

Counter-marcli. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite 
direction,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Counter-march  hjj  the  right  jianh. 

2.  By  file,  to  the  right. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
turn  to  the  right,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
placing  liimself  in  front  of  his  first  file ;  the  file- 
closers  turn  to  the  left,  and  pass  to  the  left  of  the 
squadron ;  those  of  the  second  division  abreast  of 
the  front  rank,  the  second  captain  on  their  left; 
those  of  the  first  division  abreast  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  particular  guide  of  the  right  places  himself 
promptly  behind  the  particu.ar  guide  of  the  left, 
facing  to  the  rear,  the  croup  of  his  horse  at  6  paces 
from  the  rear  rank. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

When  the  first  file  is  at  2  paces  from  the  particular 
guide  who  indicates  the  place  where  it  is  to  form,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Front.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 


190  THE   SQUADRON. 

The  filc-clo.sers  follow  the  movcuient,  and  resume 
tlicir  places  as  they  arrive  at  them. 

Afii'.r  liavirig  cnmmhnded  MARCH,  the  first  captain 
move's  ijipidly  to  ilie  flank  by  wliicli  the  movement  is 
exc'cnied.  in  order  to  direct  tl)e  liead  of  the  coliinin.  and 
to  re-form  the  sfjiiadron  to  the  rear  n])on  a  line  parallel 
to  tlie  one  it  at  tirst  occupied. 

At  the  commands  halt  and  ri(jhf — dress,  the 
second  captain  tnnisahouf  and  places  himsclt 
abreast  of  the  rear  rank  to  aliun  it. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  front.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  face  to  the  front  by  a  turn  io  the  hft. 

The  counter-nuiroh  t^hould  be  executed  generally  at 
the  trot.  For  this  purpose,  after  the  second  command, 
tlie  first  captain  indicates  the  gait. 

This  movement  is  executed  by  the  left  flank,  following 
the  same  |irinci]des,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  tlie  com- 
mands:  1.  C<mntcr-marvh  by  the  hft  flank  :  2.  By  file  to 
the  left ;  'i.  Marcu;  and  1.  Front;  2.  Halt;  3.  Left — 
Press;  4.  Front. 

Wbeeliners. 

The  principles  prescriboil  for  the  |)latoon,  are  ajjplioa- 
ble  to  the  squadron  wheeling  on  a  fixed  or  a  moveable 
pivot.  The  execution  of  it  becomes  niore  diflicult  as  the 
front  is  extended  ;  it  requires  on  the  part  of  officers  and 
troopers,  a  particular  and  constant  attention. 

During  the  wheel,  ihc  chiefs  of  platfion  keep  at  the 
centre  ol"  their  jjlatoons,  and  correctly  aliened  upon  each 
other,  keeping  their  horses  iii)on  the  arc  of  circle  more  or 
less  great,  in  j^roportion  to  their  distance  from  the  pivot. 
The  chief  of  the  platoon  On  which  the   wheel   is  made, 


THE   SQUADRON.  191 

regulates  himself  upon  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on  tlie 
marcliiiig  linnk,  observing  to  move  progressively,  as  the 
latter  advances  in  the  new  tlirection. 

The  chief  of  the  platoon  on  tlie  inarching  flanlc,  de- 
scribes his  circle  so  as  neitlier  to  move  from,  nor  ap- 
proach the  other  chiefs  of  platoon. 

The  files  on  the  flanks  of  platoons  dress  upon  eacli 
other,  all  observing  the  progression  of  tlie  marching 
flank,  and  keeping  upon  the  arc  tliey  should  describe. 

The  particidar  guide  placed  on  the  side  of  the  pivot 
is  the  actual  piv(jt,  although  he  is  not  counted  in  the 
rank. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  marching  flank  of  a  squad- 
ron should  measure  with  accuracy  its  arc  of  circle;  if 
it  is  too  great,  the  files  are  made  to  open  and  disunite, 
and  the  wheel  becomes  longer;  if  it  is  too  small,  the 
files  are  crowded,  there  is  conlusion,  and  the  pivot  is 
forced. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  squadron  is  exercised  in  wheeling  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  first  at  the  walk,  then  at  the  ti'ot;  also  at  the  gallop, 
when  the  troopers  are  confirmetl  in  all  the  principles. 

The  squadron  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

1.    Squadron  in  circle  right  wheel.  2.   March. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  phitoon. 

To  hall  the  squadron  during  the  wheel,  the  first  cap- 
tain c(immands  : 

1.  Squadron.  3.  Left — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command;  the  troopers  of  the  rear 


192  THE    SQUADRON. 

rank  strniuhtcn  their  horses,  and  rc5unic  their 
places  holiind  their  file-leaders. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  third  comn»and,  the  S(|uadrun  dresses  to 
the  Kit. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  Front. 

If.  instead  of  lialtinjj,  the  first  captain  wi-hcs  to  resiune 
the  direct  march,  he  commands: 

1.  Forward.  2.   Gnuk  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  troopers  of  the  rear 
rank  straighten  their  horses,  and  place  themselves 
behind  their  file-leaders,  and  the  whole  s(juadron 
moves  forward  at  the  gait  in  which  it  was  march- 
ing before  the  wheel. 

The  s;(]u:i(lron  i.s  halted,  if  the  slightest  confusion  arise? 
(luring  the  wheel  ;  the  first  captain  explains  the  origin 
of  the  fault,  and  the  means  of  repairing  it. 

When  the  trutipers  begin  to  unilev?tand  the^e  move- 
ments, the  whole  circle  is  jnissed  over  several  times 
without  halting. 

If  the  lir.-5t  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  squadron  during 
the  wheel,  it  is  necessary,  particularly  in  the  quick  gaits. 
to  command  squadron  in  suflicienl  time  to  enable  thi 
trooj)ers  to  prejiare  to  halt,  and  halt  when  the  marching 
(lank  is  in  the  act  of  arriving  upon  the  new  direction,  so 
that  the  jiivot  may  not  be  required  to  move. 

The  squadron  wheeling  steadily  at  the  walk,  to  pass  to 
the  trot,  the  lirst  captain  chooses  a  moment  in  which  the 
horses  arc  perfectly  calm.  After  one  or  two  turns,  the 
squadrcni  is  maile  to  resume  the  W(tlk.  The  squadron 
wheeling  well  at  the  (rot,  is  exercised  to  whei-l  at  the 
^'«//oy;,  uj oil  the  same  principles.  After  one  or  two  turns 
it  passes  to  the  trut,  then  to  the  walk. 


e 

i 


THE     SQUADRON.  193 

The  troopers  being  habituated  to  these  movements, 
are  exercised  in  changing  the  side  of  the  wheel,  with- 
out halting.  These  changes  oi  wheel  to  bdth  hands 
are  executed  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trol.  but  never  ai  the 
gallop. 

The  squadron  wheeling  to  the  right,  at  the  ivulk  or  at 
the  iroti  the  first  caj  tain  conmiands: 

1.   Squadron  in  circle  left  wheel.  2.  MARCH 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 

The  wheels  at  the  gallop,  and  the  changes  of  wheel 
without  halting  require  much  attention  on  the  part  of  the 
troopers  and  non-commissioned  officers  ;  the  correct  exe- 
cution of  these  movements  dei)ends  upon  their  measur- 
ing pro|)erly  tl)e  arc  to  be  passed  over,  and  regulating, 
the  rapidity  of  the  gait. 

The  squa.iron  is  afterwards  exercised  to  wheel  at  the 
trot  and  at  the  gallop,  commencing  from  a  halt,  and  to 
halt  while  wheeling  at  these  gaits. 

The  squadron  being  halted,  the  first  captain  commands: 

C  right  (or  left)  u'heel. 

1.  Squadroiiy  -|  right-about  (or  left-ahout')  wheel. 

{^right-half  (or  left-half)  ivheel. 

2.  March.  5.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

3.  Squadron.  6.   Front. 

4.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon. 

The  first  captain  allows  sufficient  time  to  elapse  be- 
tween the  first  and  second  command,  for  the  truopers  to 
gather  their  horses,  that  they  may  commence  the  move 
together. 

Those  movements  are  executed  at  the  difl^erent  gaits: 
but  they  siioidd  not  be  repeated  too  frequently  at  the 
gallop,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  horses. 

n 


194  THK    SQUADRON'. 

To  exorcise  the  squadron  while  marching  at  the  wheels 
on  a  (ix<><l  pivot,  the  tiisl  captain  commands  : 

i  rifjht  (or  left)  ichcel. 
1.    S'lU'iffron  <  ri(jht-ahout  (or  Uft-ahoiit^  ichrel. 

(  rujht-half  (or  Icft-haff)  wheel. 
1.   Maikii. 

.1.    FoKWARD. 

4.    (>  id'de  left  (or  guide  riffht). 

The  srinndron  being  on  tlie  march,  to  canse  it  to  wheel, 
donblinji  ihe  g:nt,  ll)e  first  cnptain  gives  tlie  command 
trot  or  ^'illop  before  that  oT  uarcu. 

At  the  coinn)and  march,  ilie  pivot  stops  sliort;  the 
man-liinii  flank  takes  the  gait  imlicated. 

At  ihf  i-oinmand  FORWAHi),  both  move  forward  at  the 
gait  in  licated  fur  the   wheel. 

T)  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot, 

In  the  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the  pivot  shonld 
describe  an  arc  of  circle  of  20  purfs,  nl  the  same  time 
slackening  the  gait ;  the  martdiing  fhink  increases  its 
gait.  The  sixth  file  of  the  second  platoon,  whi>  h  is  the 
middle  of  the  radins  of  the  wheel,  preserves  the  gait  at 
wliiidi  tlie  »<]iiadroii  was  marching.  The  troopers  placed 
between  this  lile  and  the  pivot  diminish  proportionally 
their  gait;  those  placed  bctwcch  this  lile  and  the  march- 
ing (lank  angment  proportionally  theirs. 

The  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot  is  executed  upon  the 
guide,  or  upon  the  opposite  flank. 

After  a  wheel  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the  guide  remains 
where  it  was  before  the  wheel,  and  is  given  a  new 
j)oiiit  i)f  direction. 

The  squadron  marching  in  lino,  to  change  direction 
to  the  right,  the  lir.st  captain  commands  : 

1.  Ri;/ht — Turn.  2.  Forward. 


THE     SQUADRON.  195 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  platoon, 
the  pivot  describing  an  arc  of  circle  of  20  paces. 

When  this  wheel  is  executed  properly  at  the  uv/ZA-,  the 
marchinjr  flank  taking  the  trot,  it  is  repeated  at  the  trot. 
the  marching  flank  taUing  the  gallop. 

To  change  the  direction  to  the  left,  the  movement  is 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  commands:   1.  Left — Turn;  2.  Forward. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain 
groimd  towards  its  right  flank,  without  changing  the 
front  of  the  squadron,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Right  oblique.  2.  March. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  first  captain 
commands: 

Forward. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  made  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  left  flank,  without  changing  the  front, 
on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the 
commands:  1.  Left  oblique;  2.  March;  it  resumes  the 
primitive  direction  at  the  command  Forward. 

During  the  oblique  march,  the  first  captain  observes 
that  the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  on  the  same  line,  ]ireserve 
between  them  the  same  interval,  and  follow  parallel 
directions  in  order  to  preserve  the  general  alignment. 

The  particular  guide  who  marches  abreast  of  die 
chiefs  of  platoon,  after  having  executed  a  quarter  turn 
to  the  right,  moves  straight  forward. 

This  movement  is  executed  at  the  ivclk,  or  at  the  trot. 
but  never  at  the  gallop. 


196  THE     SQUADRON. 


0]jli(|ue  raarcli  by  platoons. 

The  s'liimlroii  beinj:  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  jrain  ground 
towartis  its  rij^lit  Hank,  by  the  oblique  march  by  plalouiis 
the  lirst  captain   coiTiinantl.s  : 

1 .  Platoons  right  half-whccl.      3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  command  marcfi,  each  platoon  executes 
its  half-wh'd  to  the  right,  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

At  the  third  command,  each  platoon  moves 
forward,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct 
march. 

To  cause  the  squadron  to  resume  the  primitive  direc- 
tion, the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons  left  half -wheel.         3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.    Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by 
inverse  means. 

In  the  oblique  innrch  by  platoons,  the  pivots  of  the 
platoons  slidnhi  all  halt  at  the  >anie  instant,  at  the  C(»m- 
mand  mahch.  so  that  all  the  wheels  nuiy  terminate  at 
the  SRtne  time. 

During  thi.s  march,  the  right  guide  of  the  first  platoon 
marches  directly  upon  the  [)oint  which  has  been  indi- 
cated to  him.  The  guides  of  the  other  jilatoons  preserve 
their  distances,  lake  for  lile-leader  the  fourth  trooper 
from  the  left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  and 
keep  at  two  pa(^es  from  him. 

The  (ir.sl  captain  places  himself  habitually  at  two 
paces  OMisiile,  and  abreast  of  the  front-rank  of  the  second 
platoon. 


i 


THE   SQUADRON.  197 

The  second  captain  behind  tlie  guide  of  the  first  i)la- 
toon,  in  order  to  superintend  his  direction  ; 

The  chiefs  of  phitoon  at  tlie  centre  of  their  platoons, 
the  head  of  their  horses  on  a  line  with  the  boot  of  the 
rear-rank  man  of  the  platoon  which  precedes; 

The  particuhir  guides,  and  the  file-closers,  remain  at 
their  places  in  line. 

If  tlie  squadron  is  inarching,  and  thi<  movement  is 
executed,  the  particular  guide  who  marches  abreast  of 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  makes  a  half-turn  to  the  right,  and 
then  marches  straight  forward. 

The  oblique  march  by  platoons  is  executed  at  the 
walk,  at  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop,  the  squadron  being 
halted  or  in  motion. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  it  is  made  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  left  flank  on  the  san:e  principle?,  but  by  in- 
verse means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoons  left  half- 
wheel;  2,  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left,  and 
resumes  the  primitive  direction  at  the  commands:  1. 
Platoons  right  half  wheel ;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4. 
Guide  right. 

Movements  by  fours. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
towards  its  right  flank,  tlie  first  captain  commands: 

1.  J^)/  fours  right  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon- 
The  chiefs  of  platoon  march  on  tlie  side  of  the 
guide,  at  one  pace  from,  and  abreast  of  the  leading 
files  of  their  platoons. 

The  particular  jruide  of  the  \'vfS\i  marches  in 
front  of  the  column,  at  one  pace  from  the  leading 
IT* 


1\)S  TIIK     SQUADRON. 

rauk  of  ei<i1it,  tlie  jjaitieular  ij^uiJe  of  the  left  be- 
hind tlie  last  rank  of  eight  of  the  fourth  platoon. 

The  squadron  having  wheeled  to  the  right  by  fours, 
and  being  in  cohimn,  lo  change  direction  to  tlie  lefi,  the 
tirst  captain  comntands  :  • 

I[ead  of  column  to  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  fir<t  platoon  commands:  1.  Left — 
Turn  ;  2.  Forward. 

To  change  direction  to  the  riglit.  the  movement  is 
executed  on  tlie  same  principles,  luit  by  inverse  means, 
at  the  coMimand:  Head  of  column  to  the  right. 

To  put  tho  squadron  again  in  line,  the  lirsl  captain 
c^Jiiimaiul.s  : 

1.  lit/  fours  left  wlietl.  4.   R'ujlit — DreSS. 

2.  iMarcu.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon, 
the  particular  guides  resuming  their  places  in  line. 

These  movements  are  executed  by  the  left,  on  the 
same  [jrinciples.  at  thf  commands:  1.  By  fow's  left  ivheel ; 
'2.  Mai{CH  ;  .1.  FtiKWAiii);  4.  Guide  right;  and  1.  By 
fours  right  wheel :  J.  .Mahcu:  3.  Halt;  -1.  Left — Dress; 
.'"i.  Front. 

Tlic  .s(]Uiidroii  ])eiiig  in  line,  to  cause  it 
to  gain  ground  to  the  rear,  and  to 
face  it  again  to  the  front. 

The  squadron  being  in  lino,  to  lace  it  Im  iIh'  opposite 
direction,  the  lirst  captain  commands: 


THE    SQUADRON.  199 

1.  Bj/  fours  right-about  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  left. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  file-closers,  and  the 
particular  guides,  wheel-about  individually  and 
march,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  behind  the  centre  of 
their  platoons,  the  file-closers  in  front,  and  the  par- 
ticular guides  abreast  of  the  rear  rank,  become  the 
front. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  file-closer  nearest 
the  guide  passages  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  him- 
self in  front  of  the  particular  guide;  the  first  cap- 
tain gives  him  a  point  of  direction,  which  is  also 
indicated  to  the  particular  guide,  who,  in  this 
movement,  remains  on  the  flank  of  the  squadron. 

The  squadron  is  faced  again  to  the  fronts  by  a  move- 
ment similar  to  the  one  just  stated. 

The  wheels  to  the  left-about  by  fours,  are  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  but  by  inverse  menns. 

These  movements  by  fours  are  executed  from  a  halt, 
aud  in  marcliing  at  the  walk  and  at  the  trot. 

The  squadron  marcliing  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  platoons,  to  the  right,  and  to 
form  it  again  in  line. 

The  squadron  marching;  in  lino,  to  cause  it  to  jiain 
ground  towards  its  rij'ht  flank,  the  lirst  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  F/atoons  right  wheel.  3.  FORWARD. 

2.  March.  4.   Guule  left. 


200  THE    SQUADRON. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  the  pivots  halt- 
ing sliort,  .-iiid  the  left  file  of  each  platoon  stepping 
out  promptly  and  regulating  its  movements  upon 
that  of  the  platoon  which  is  in  front,  so  as  to  artive 
together  in  column. 

To  put  the  squadron  again  in  line,  the  first  captain 
coinmamis  : 

1.  Flutoons  hjt  xchceL  3.  FORWARD. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  intjht. 

The  marching  flanks  regulate  their  movements 
upon  those  of  the  platoon  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  so  as  to  arrive  together  in  line. 

The  second  captain  gives  a  point  of  direction  to  the 
particular  guide,  who  moves  up  on  the  line  of  officers, 
and  indicates  it  also  to  the  file-closer,  who  replaces  him 
on  the  Hank  of  the  squadron. 

These  movements  are  executed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, when  ihe  squadron  is  marching  at  the  trot^  and  at 
the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  matle  to  gain 
ground  towards  its  left  iiank,on  the  same  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoons  left 
wheel;  2.  Mauch  ;  3.  Fokwahd;  4.  Guide  right;  and  is 
put  again  in  line  at  the  comuumds  :  1.  Plaloons  right 
wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  left. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  march 
it  to  the  rear  by  wheeling  the  pla- 
toons about. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  guide  right,  the  first 
captain  commands: 


THE    SQUADRON.  201 

1.  Platoons  riijlit-ahout  wheel.  3.  Forward. 

2.  March.  4.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt  short, 
and  turn  upon  themselves;  the  marching  flanks 
step  off  at  the  same  instant,  regulating  themselves 
by  the  right  during  the  first  half  of  the  wheel,  so 
as  to  arrive  together  in  column,  and  by  the  left 
during  the  second  half,  so  as  to  arrive  together  in 
line.  In  each  platoon,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file- 
closers  carry  the  hand  towards  the  marching  flank, 
in  order  to  facilitate  the  movement. 

At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  resumes 
the  direct  march. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  particular  guide  on 
the  side  indicated  moves  up  on  the  line  of  oflBcers; 
he  is  immediately  replaced,  and  a  point  of  direc- 
tion given. 

If,  after  wheeling  about,  the  first  captain  wishes  to 
halt  the  squadron,  instead  of  commanding  FORWARD,  he 
commands:  3.  Halt;  4.  Left — Dress;  5-  Front. 

This  movement  is  executed  by  the  left,  on  the  same 
principles,  hut  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands:  1. 
Platoons  left-about  wheel;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4. 
Guide  right. 

In  these  movements,  the  particular  guide  of  the 
right  ^Mn?s  to  the  right,  moves  straight  forward  the 
extent  of  the  front  of  a  platoon,  and  turns  again 
to  the  rights  in  order  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  squadron.  The  particular  guide  of  the  left 
executes  the  same  movement,  to  place  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  squadron. 


202  TUE    SQUADRON. 

These  inoveinents   are   executed  from  a  halt,  and  in 
marchiijj^  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

Tlie  s(iua(lron  marcliiiig  in  line,  to  break 
it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  and  to  re- 
form it. 

The  first  captain  commands: 

1.  B//  platoons  to  the  froiit.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  af?  prescribed  in  breaking 
from  u  halt,  except  that  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, continuin<r  to  uiarch  on,  does  not  eoniniand 
platoon  forward,  nor  MARCH,  but  repeats  the  indi- 
cation of  the  guide. 

This  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  at 
the  trot  and  at  the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marchins:  in  column  with  distance, 
rij{ht  in  front,  to  form  it  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.   Form  squadron.     2.  MARCH.     3.    Guide  right. 

The  squadron  marching  at  the  trot,  this  movement  is 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  except  that  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon  commands :  1.  Walk;  2.  March, 
the  right  particidar  j^uidc,  at  the  command  guide  right, 
moves  up  on  the  line  of  ofiicers,  and  each  of  the  other 
cliiefs  of  platoon  commands :  1.  Walk;  2.  March;  on 
arriving  in  line.  The  movement  is  executed  in  the 
same  manner  w^hen  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  each 
platoon  passing  successively  to  the  trot. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  it  is  broken  by  the 


\ 


f 


THE    SQUADRON.  203 

left,  on  the  same  princiy)les,  but  by  inverse    means,    at 
the  commands  :   1.  By  the  left — by  platoons  to  the  front ;* 

2,  Mauch  ;   3.   Guide  right.     It   is  re-formed  at  ilie  same 
gait  at  the  commands  :     1.  Form  squadron;    2.  March; 

3.  Guide  left. 

Tlie  squadron  marcliing  in  line,  to  break 
it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  doul>ling 
tlie  gait,  and  to  re-form  it. 

The  lirst  captain  commands: 

1.  Bj/ platoons  to  the  front — trot.        8.    Guide  left, 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Trot;  and  those  of  the  three 
other  platoons  command,  Platoon  right  half- wheel — 
trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in 
breaking  from  the  line  halted. 

Tlie  squadron  marchinj^  in  line  at  the  trot,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  at  the  gallop  on  tlie  same  j)riiKii)les. 

The  squadron  marchiiifi  in  column  witli  di>t:-ince, 
right  in  front,  to  form  it,  doubling  the  gait,  the  tirst  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.  Form  squadron — ti^ot.  3.    Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

At   the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  "three 


*It  is    better   to  command.  1.  "  Uy  platoons  from  the 
left;  2,  March;  3.   Gtiide  right.'' 


204  THE     SQUADRON. 

last  platoons  command,  Platoon  hft  haJf-whcI — 
trot. 

At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  tlie  tlirce  last  platoons,  the  first  platoon  continues 
to  march  straight  forward  at  the  icdllc,  and  its 
chief  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide. 

The  three  other  platoons  execute  their  half-wheel 
to  the  left  at  the  trot,  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  ha  If- wheels  being  nearly  terminated,  the 
chiefs  of  these  platoons  command,  1.  Forward; 
2.  Guide,  riyht ;  they  move  straight  forward,  and 
as  soon  as  the  right  file  of  their  platoon  is  in  the 
direction  of  the  left  file  of  the  platoon  wliich  pre- 
cedes, they  command,  1.  liiyht  half-wheel ;  2. 
March;  '^.  Forward;  and  then,  walk;  in  sufii- 
cient  time  to  command  march,  when  their  platoon 
arrives  in  line ;  then  the  troopers  resume  the  icalk^ 
and  align  themselves  in  marching. 

Each  platoon,  after  its  half-uheel  to  the  left, 
move  straight  forward  on  the  point  where  it  is  to 
turn,  and  without  obliquing  towards  the  platoons 
which  precede  it. 

The  second  captain  gives  a  point  of  direction  to  the 
particular  g\iide  ol"  the  right,  who  moves  upon  llie  line 
of  ofTicers  at  the  command,  guide  right. 

Tlie  column  being  nt  the  trot.,  this  movement  is 
executed  at  the  commands,  1.  Form  squadron — gallop; 
2.  March;  3.  Guide  right  ;  the  iuist platoon  continues  to 
march  at  the  trot,  and  the  three  last  platoons  take  the 
gallop,  and  resume  the  trot  when  they  arrive  on  the  line 
of  the  llrst. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  tlie  squadron  is 
formed  at  the  same  gait  as  prescribed,  each  platoon 
passing  successively  to  the  trot. 


THE   SQUADRON,  205 

Tiie  squadron  marching  in  line,  it.  is  broken  by  the  left 
by  platoons,  doubling  the  gait,  on  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands.*  1.  By 
the  Icfi — by  platoons  to  the  front — trot  (or  gallop);  'i.  March  - 

3.  Guide  right.  The  squadron  is  re-formed,  iloubling  the 
gait,  at  the  commands,  1.  Form  squadron — trot  (or  gal- 
lop): 2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left. 

Passage  of  obstacles. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  execute  the  pas 
sage  of  obstacles,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.    Obstacle.       2.  First  platoon.       3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  pkitoon  halts,  and  its 
chief  immediately  commands,  1.  Left  oblique — trot; 
2.  March  ;  and  this  platoon  doubles  upon  the 
second. 

When  the  platoon  which  has  obliqued  is  in  rear 
of  the  one  upon  which  it  has  doubled,  its  chief 
commands,  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  right;  3.  Walk; 

4.  March. 

To  cause  the  platoon  which  has  obliqued  to  return  to 
its  place,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  First  platoon.  2.  Into  Line. 

At  the  command  into  line,  the  chief  of  the  pla- 
toon commands,  1.  Right  oblique — trot;  2.  Marchj 
when  opposite  the  ground  the  platoon  is  to  occupy, 
he  commands,  1.  1^'orward;  2.  Guide  left ;  3. 
Walk;  and  when  the  platoon  is  in  line,  4.  March. 


'^  \.    By  platoons  from    the  left — Trot    (or    gallop;    2. 
March  ;  3.  Guide  right. 


206  THE    SQUADRON. 

The  cliief  of  the  platoon  commands  Forward,  a 
little  before  its  left  tile  has  passed  beyond  the  right 
file  of  the  platoon  on  which  it  is  to  form. 

If  tlie  t^uide  is  to  the  right,  as  soon  as  the  first  plfitoon 
has  re-entered  upon  the  line,  the  first  captain  indicates 
the  new  guide  ;  he  does  the  same  as  soon  as  tlie  I'ourth 
platoon  is  iii  line,  if  the  guide  is  to  the  left. 

The  second  platoon  executes  the  same  niovenient,  in 
obliquing  to  the  right  behind  the  first  platoon  ;  the  third 
in  obliquing  to  the  left  behind  the  fourth,  and  thefnurth 
iti  obliquing  to  the  right  behind  the  third  ;  eacli  platoon 
shoidd  always  double  upon  that  witli  wliich  it  forms  the 
division. 

Tlie  chiefs  of  platoon  give  tlie  prescribed  conunands 
rapidly,  and  cause  the  degree  of  obliquity  to  be  a  lit- 
tle incrcHSCil,  that  the  movement  may  be  )uore  proiiq)tly 
executed,  and  to  enable  the  platoons  to  talce  their  dis- 
tances. 

All  these  movements  are  oxecuted  first  at  the  loalk. 
When  the  squadron  is  at  the  trot^  the  movement  is  exe- 
cuted at  the  gallop. 

The  squadron  marchioLr  in  line,  to  execute  the  ))assage 
of  obstacle,  iqjon  the  head  of  each  platoon,  the  first  cap- 
tain cotnmands  : 

1.  //*   each  platoon — h^  /ours  (or  hj/  ttcos) — trot. 

2.  March. 

3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  com- 
mand :   By  fours  (or  hi/  tv)os) — trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  offi- 
cers, each  platoon  breaks  by  fours  as  prescribed,  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  march  at  the  head  of  their  platoons; 
the  particular  guide  of  the  right,  who  marches  on 
the  line  of  officers,  places  himself  on  the  right  of 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  j  the  particular  guide 


THE    SQUADRON. 


207 


of  the  left,  in  rear  of  the  fourth  platoon,  and  the 
file-closers  upon  the  riijht  flank  of  their  platoons. 

Each  platoon  being  thus  broken  in  column,  should 
preserve  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  one 
which  is  the  guide,  keeping  on  the  same  line,  and 
always  at  the  distance  of  its  front,  to  be  able  at  any 
moment  to  re-form  in  line. 

If  the  ground  requires  a  platoon  to  deviate  from 
its  direction,  it  should  return  to  it  as  sion  as  possi- 
ble, and  recover  its  proper  distance  with  respect  to 
the  side  towards  the  guide. 

In  marching  thus,  the  first  captain  inay  cause  the 
squadron  to  break  by  twos  and  bij  file,  observing  to  form 
hvos  an (\  fours  as  soon  as  tlie  ground  will  permit. 

These  movements  are  executed  when  the  squadron  is 
marching  at  the  trot  or  at  the  gallop. 

This  formation  being  only  momentary,  the  guide  re- 
mains on  the  side  it  was  during  the  march  in  line,  that 
the  base  of  the  alignment  may  not  be  changed. 

;  o  re-form  the  squadron,  each  platoon  having  broken 
by  fours  or  by  twos  at  the  trot,  right  in  front,  the  first 
captain  commands: 

1.  Form  platoons.  3.    Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  com- 
mand :   Form  2)la toon. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  ofii- 
cers,  each  platoon  forms  as  prescribed  in  the  platoon 

drill. 

If  the  ground  does  not  permit  all  the  platoons  to 
form  at  once,  the  one  before  which  the  obstacle  is 
presented,   forms  in   rear  of  the  other  platoon  of 


208  THE    SQUADRON.     * 

its  division,  and  retakes  its  place  in  line  as  soon  as 
practicable. 

These  movements  are  executed  by  the  left,  on  the  same 
principles,  but  hy  inverse  means,  at  the  conmiands  :  1.  In 
each  platoon — by  fon,rs  (or  by  twos) — from  the  left — trot  ; 
'2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left ;  and  to  re-form  the  squadron,  1. 
Form  ■platoons ;  2.  March  ;  3.  Guide  left. 


CHARGE.— RALLYING— SKIRMISHING. 


Charge. 


In  the  charge,  as  in  every  other  direct  march,  it  is  im- 
jSortant  to  keep  the  horses  straight.  As  soon  as  any  con- 
fusion is  observed,  it  is  necessary  to  hah  and  re  com- 
mence the  movement. 

Tlic  squadron  is  exercised  at  the  charge  :  1.  Inline; 
2.  In  column;  3.  ^s  foragers. 

The  charge  in  line  is  executed  by  tlie  squadron  when  in 
line;  it  should  be  as  short  as  possible,  so  as  to  arrive  in 
good  order,  and  without  fatiguing  the  horses. 

The  charge  in  colvmn  is  executed  by  the  squadron  bro- 
ken in  column  with  distance. 

To  execute  the  charge  as  foragers.,  all  the  troopers  of 
the  squadron  disperse,  and  direct  themselves  each  upon 
the  point  ho  wishes  to  attack,  observing  not  to  lose  sight 
of  their  olficers,  who  charge  with  them. 

The  line  upon  which  the  squadron  should  re-form  af- 
ter the  charge  is  marked  out,  as  prescribed,  (see  Platoon 
Drill,)  by  two  non-commissioned  ofllcers,  who  are  file- 
closers,  and  who  are  placed  240  paces  in  front,  facing, 
and  at  a  distance  from  each  other  ecpxal  to  the  front  of 
the  squadron. 


THE    SQUADRON.  209 

Non-commissioned  officers  are  also  placed  opposite  the 
right  flank  at  tlie  diflercut  points  where  the  changes  of 
gait  should  take  place. 

If  the  guide  is  on  the  left,  they  are  placed  opposite  the 
left  flank. 

The  scpmdron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  orders 
the  sabres  to  be  drawn,  and  the  platoons  to  charge  one 
after  another,  commencing  by  the  right. 

For  this  purpose,  the  first  captain  advances  240  pace.s 
to  the  front,  taking  a  trumpeter  with  him;  and  when  he 
v/ishes  the  movement  to  commence,  he  causes  a  signal 
to  be  given. 

The  first  platoon  then  moves  forward  at  the  com- 
mands of  its  chief.  It  passes  successively  from  the  walk 
to  the  trot,  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  and  from  the  gal- 
lop to  the  charge. 

The  tliree  other  platoons  break  in  their  turn,  when  the 
preceding  one  has  halted. 

To  execute  the  charge  by  the  entire  squadron,  the  first 
captain  places  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  squad 
ron,  and  commands  : 

1.  Squadron  forward.  3.  March. 

2.  Guide  right  (or  le/t. 

When  the  squadron  has  marched  forward  20  paces, 
he  commands  : 

1.   Trot.  2.  March. 

At  60  paces  farther,  he  commands  : 

1.   Gallop.  2.  March. 

At  80  paces  farther,  he  commands  ; 
CnARGE. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon, the  troopers  take  the  position  of  raise  sahrc. 


210  THE   SQUADRON. 

When  the  squadron,  afker  having  passed  over  60  paces 
at  the  charge,  is  20  paces  from  the  non-commissioned 
officers  who  mark  the  line,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Attention.  4.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Squadron.  5.  Front. 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  attention^  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  troopers  prepare  to  slacken  the  pace, 
and  carry  the  sabre  to  the  shoulder. 

At  the  command  squadron,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
command,  Platoon,  and  the  troopers  pass  to  the 
trot. 

At  the  command  HALT,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align  them- 
selves to  the  right. 

The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands.  Front. 

To  assure  himself  that  the  principles  prescribed  are 
exactly  followed,  the  first  captain  sometimes  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  squadron,  facing  it,  and  at  the  dis- 
tance that  will  enable  him  to  remark  better  the  faults. 
In  this  case  he  is  rejdaced  on  the  line  of  officers  by  the 
second  captain,  who  gives  the  commands. 

When  the  squadron  executes  the  charge  correctly,  in- 
stead of  hailing  when  the  charge  is  finished,  the  first 
captain  commands  : 

1.   Attention.  2.    Trot.  3.   March. 

At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  squadron  passes  to  the  trot,  and  at  20  paces  beyond 
the  line  marked  out,  he  commands  : 


THE   SQUADRON.  211 

1.  First  (pv  fourili)  lylatoon — asjoragers. 

2.  March. 

At  these  coramaiids,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  pla- 
toon designated,  the  platoon  moves  forward  at  the  gal- 
lop, and  disperses  as  foragers.  A  trumpeter  follows  the 
chief  of  the  platoon. 

The  squadron  follows  this  platoon  at  the  trot;  when  it 
has  passed  over  150  paces,  tlie  first  captain  causes  the 
rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  repeated  by  the 
trumpeter  of  the  platoon  dispersed  as  foragers,  tlie  latter 
rally  upon  the  squadron,  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon 
Drill;  and  wlien  three-fourths  of  the  platoon  have  ral- 
lied and  are  iu  line,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention.  3.  March. 

2.  Gallop.  4.  Charge. 

The  squadron  executes  again  the  charge  in  lilie  ;  the 
troopers,  wlio  have  not  been  able  to  rally,  charge  upon 
the  flanks  of  the  squadron. 

To  exercise  the  troopers  in  rallying  upon  any  point 
whatever,  the  first  captain,  during  the  march  at  the  ^rof, 
causes  the  squadron  to  gain  ground  towards  one  of  its 
flanks,  by  executing  a  half-wheel  to  the  right  or  to  the  left, 
or  by  bi-eaking  by  platoons  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  re- 
forming immediately  in  a  new  direction. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at 
the  trot,  the  first  captain  commaiads  : 

1.    To  the  charge.  2.   MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon commands,  Gallop. 

'  At  the  command  MARCH,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  commences  the 
gallop. 


212  THE    SQUADRON^ 

The  other  platoons  follow  at  the  trot,  each  taking 
the  (jdUop,  when  the  platoon  which  precedes  is  at 
the  distance  of  ;iO  paces. 

When  the  first  platoon  has  passed  over  80  paces 
at  the  (jcltop,  its  chief  commands,  Chargk. 

At  this  command,  the  platoon  executes  the 
charge  ;  and  when  it  has  passed  over  00  paces,  its 
chief  causes  it  to  pavSS  to  the  tvot  by  the  commands: 
1.   Attention;  2.    Trot;   V^.   March. 

Tlie  other  plaroous  puy  attention  to  the  moveinon's  of 
the  platoon  whi(;h  precedes  tlieni,  so  as  to  chaiiiie  the 
gait  in  lirne.  and  to  rcstinie  their  ordinary  ((i>taMee  ;  the 
first  captain  halts  tlic  colntnn  when  he  thinks  jjroper. 

Tliese  charges  are  executcil,  each  platoon  taking  in  it* 
turn  tlie  head  of  the  cohinin. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at 
the  trot,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  First  Platoon — as  fa)'ager&. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  MARCH,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  plat(H)n,  this  platoon  disperses  as  foia^ors. 
The  squadron  continues  to  march  at  the  trot,  and 
when  it  has  passed  over  lUO  or  150  paces,  the  first 
captain  causes  the  nillif  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  sigjial,  the  platoon  rallies  and  re-forms  at 
the  rear  of  the  column,  or  at  its  place  in  line,  if  the 
squadron  has  been  put  in  line. 

Eallying. 

'To  gi\ f  the  tr(i(i|)cr.s  the  habit  of  rallying  promptly, 
after  havintj  been  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  tirst  captain 


THE    SQUADRON.  213 

places  the  squadron  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground  ;  nud 
after  giving?  notice  to  the  files  on  tlie  flank  of  phitoons, 
the  file-closers  and  the  trurnj^eters,  to  remain  upon  the 
line  with  him,  he  causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded.  At 
this  signal,  the  troopers  disperse  and  charge  as  foragers  ; 
when  they  are  at  tlie  distance  of  15U  or  200  paces,  the 
first  captain  causes  the  7-ally  to  be  sounded. 

The  first  ca|)tain  observes  that  the  troopers  disperse 
without  confusion  ;  that,  in  rallying,  they  direct  them- 
selves to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  outside  of  the  flanks 
of  the  squadron,  in  order  to  unmask  promptly  the  front 
of  the  squadron,  and  to  re-form,  passing  by  the  rear. 

When  the  troopers  rally  without  confusion,  this  move- 
ment is  repeated  without  requiring  the  flank  files,  &c., 
to  remain  on  the  line  of  the  squadron, 

At  the  signal  to  disperse^  the  squadron  disperses  in 
every  direction  to  the  front. 

When  the  squadron  is  dispersed,  the  first  captain 
causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers, and  the  troopers,  rejoin  rapidly;  the  officers  align 
themselves  promptly  upon  the  lirst  captain,  and  the  non- 
commissioned officers  mark  immediately  the  flanks  of 
the  platoons. 

As  soon  as  the  first  captain  has  formed  two-thirds  of 
the  squadron,  he  moves  forward,  charges  again,  and 
halts. 

When  the  squadron  is  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  first 
captain  should  sometimes  establisli  hlmsell' to  (he  right 
or  to  the  left  of  the  direction  followed  by  the  troopers, 
and  then  order  the  rally  to  be  sounded,  to  accustom  them 
to  rally  upon  any  point  he  may  select. 

These  movements  are  first  executed  at  the  ti'ot.  and 
then  at  the  gallop. 

Light  cavalry  should  be  {particularly  exercised  in 
•charging  as  foragers  and  in  rallying. 


214  TUE    SQUADRON. 

Skirmishing. 

When  tlie  squadron  is  in  sijrl>i  of  the  skirmisbers,  the 
iirst  caplain  orders  no  signal  except  the  rally.  The  ehief 
of  the  sl<irmi^;|)crs  observes  the  movements  of  tlie  scpiad  - 
ron  he  covers,  and  conform-s  totliem  as  soon  as  practica- 
ble, reqiiirinj;  his  trumpeter  to  sound  the  necessary  sijjnals. 

When  the  squadron  clian!.;es  front,  the  chief  of  the 
skirmishers  moves'upon  the  new  front,  unless  the  first 
captain  gives  orders  to  the  contrary. 

If  the  squadron  is  out  of  siglil  of  the  skirmisliers,  the 
first  captain  causes  the  signals  whicii  correspond  to  the 
movements  he  executes  to  be  sounded,  in  order  to  give 
notice  to  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers,  who  conforms  to 
them  as  soon  as  practicable. 

The  trumpeter  who  follows  the  chief  of  the  skirmish- 
ers should  give  the  signals  only  upon  the  order  of  that 
officer.  The  skirmishers  should  execute  their  move- 
ments only  by  tlie  signals  of  the  trumpeter  who  accom- 
panies the  officer  who  commands  them. 

With  respect  to  the  signals,  as  well  as  to  commence 
and  to  cease  firing,  the  troopers  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  Platoon. 

When  several  ])latoons  act  as  skirmishers,  the  firing 
is  commenced  by  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

When  a  squadron  is  acting  as  skirmishers,  the  first 
ca])tain  is  always  followed  by  a  trumpeter.  The  others 
are  placed  several  steps  in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers, 
at  equal  distances  from  the  centre  to  the  extremities,  in 
(»rder  to  repeat  as  soon  as  possible  the  signals  given  by 
the  trumpeter  of  the  first  captain. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  ca])tain  com 
mands  : 

1.  Firat  (ov  fonrtit)  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toons orders  the  sabres  to  be  returned,  the  holsters 


k 


i 


THE   squadron:  515 

to  be  uncovered,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded ;  he 
then  commands:  1.  Platoon  forward;  2.  Guide 
right;  3.    Trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiei 
of  the  platoon,  this  platoon  moves  forward.  After 
marching  100  paces  to  the  front,  the  chief  of  the 
platoon  commands:  1.  Six  files  from  right  (or/rom, 
left) — as  skirmishers  ;  2.  Marcii  ;  3.  Guide  right 
(or  gitide  left)  ;  which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  Platoon. 

When  the  first  captain  wishes  the  skirmishers  to  re- 
enter the  squadron,  he  causes  thcrally  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  cliief  of  the  skirmishers  rallies  his 
platoon,  as  prescribed  in  the  Platoon,  and  then  rejoins 
the  i^quadron  at  the  gallop^  directing;;  himself  upon  one 
of  the  flanks  to  resume  his  place  in  line. 

When  the  first  captain  w^ishes  to  relieve  a  platoon 
which  is  skiimishinji,  the  chief  of  the  new  platoon,  afler 
causing  the  arms  to  be  loaded,  moves  fbrwurd  upon  the 
leserve  of  the  platoon  which  is  actinj,^  as  sliirmislicrs. 
On  coming  up  abreast  of  it.  he  orders  out  G  files  as  skir- 
mishers, as  has  been  explained;  the  remaining  6  files 
halt  and  draw  sabres. 

As  soon  as  the  new  skirmishers  have  passed  5  paces 
beyond  those  they  are  to  relieve,  the  latter /wrn-aAoM^  and 
rally  upon  their  reserve.  The  platoon  having  rallied,  is 
conducted  back  to  the  squadron  at  the  (rot. 

When  the  entire  squadron  is  to  act  as  skirmishers,  the 
first  captain  orders  the  .-abres  to  be  returned,  the  holsters 
to  be  uncovered,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded ;  he  then 
commands : 

1.  Squadron  forward.  3.    Trot, 

2.  Guide  right.  4.   March. 


216  THE    SQUADROW. 

Having  arrived  at  tlie  point  wliere  the  reserve  is  to  he 
estahli.>*lif'(K  al)f>ut  100  paces  from  ilie  front  of  tite  body 
to  be  r»tvc'rcd,  and  more  if  it  has  been  comtnanded,  the 
first  captain  commands: 

1.  Three  Jirst  (or  three  last)  j>l(^toons  as  skir- 
mishers. 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  MAKcn,  the  chief  of  the  pla- 
toon which  is  to  support  the  skirmishers,  halts  that 
platoon,  and  orders  the  sabres  to  be  drawn.  The 
chiefs  of  the  three  other  platoons  continue  to  march 
on,  each  directing:  himself  by  the  shortest  route,  100 
paces  to  the  front  towards  the  part  of  the  line  hia 
platoon  is  to  occupy,  and  having  reached  it,  he  dis- 
perses his  platoon  as  skirmishers. 

The  right  phitoon  covers  the  right  of  the  regi- 
ment, and  extends  30  or  40  paces  beyond  it;  an- 
other platoon  covers  the  centre,  and  the  left  platoon 
covers  the  left,  extending  also  80  or  40  paces 
beyond.  The  chiefs  of  these  platoons  remain  25 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  and  pass 
over  the  extent  occupied  by  the  troopers  of  their 
platoons. 

The  reserve  remains  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  skirnjishers.  If  the  first  captain  thinks 
proper  to  divide  it,  each  fraction  moves  upon  the 
point  designated,  the  first  commanded  by  the  ofiicer, 
the  other  by  the  non-commissioned  ofiicer  who  was 
the.  file-closer. 

The  squadron  having  moved  forwafd  to  cover  the 
regiment,  if  the  first  captain  wi.shes  only  one  division  to 
act  as   skirmishers,  he  commands;  1.  First  (or  second) 


I 


THE    SQUADEON.  217 

hrision — ai' skirmif^hers ;  4.  March  ^   which   is   executed 
;;s  pre.soibed  above. 

Tlie  division  whieh  serves  as  a  reserve  remains  as  a 
single  troop,  or,  if  the  first  captain  thinks  proper,  it  is 
<livideii  into  two  partss. 

The  first  captain,  followed  by  the  first  sergeant,  keeps 
habitually  half  way  between  the  reserve  and  the  skir- 
mishers, to  direct  the  movements. 

The  second  captain,  followed  by  the  second  sergeant, 
passes  the  line,  and  gives  notice  to  the  first  captain  of 
<?very  thing  that  it  is  important  for  him  to  know. 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
upon  themselves,  he  causes  the  rally  of  skirmishers.  No. 
^\  to  be  mounded. 

At  this  signal,  each  platoon  rallies  as  rapidly  ae 
possible  upon  its  chief. 

If  the  first  captain  then  wishes  to  rally  the  squad- 
ron, he  moves  upon  the  point  where  he  intends  it 
shall  form,  and  causes  the  raUi/  to  be  sounded  when 
three-fourths  of  each  platoon  has  rallied. 

At  this  new  signal,  the  reserve  and  each  platoon 
of  skirmishers  move  at  a  gallop  upon  the  point 
where  the  captain  commanding  is  placed.  The 
troopers,  who  did  not  rejoin  their  platoon  when  it 
rallied  upon  itself,  direct  themselves  towards  the 
squadron. 

The  squadron  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  tho 
first  captain  wishes  it  to  rally  immediately.  !e  orders  tin; 
rally  to  be  sounded-,  at  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  skir- 
mishers and  the  reserve  rally  ui)on  the  point  occupied 
by  the  first  captain. 

The  troopers  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  the  firsl 
<;aptain  wishes  them  to  charge  as  foragers,  he  orders  theui 
to  cease  firing,  and  causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded. 

19 


218  THE    SQUADROJT. 

At  this  signal,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  move  for- 
ward in  line,  and  the  skirmishers  draw  sabres;  they 
charge  immediately.  The  reserve  follows  at  the 
trot  or  at  the  jallop,  as  may  be  necessary. 

After  the  charge",  flie  first  captnin  orders  the  rnlly  ti» 
be  sounded,  when  !liietr,'>ojiers  rally  in  rear  of  the  reserve. 

The  skirmishers  beJTJK  rallied  bj*  platoons,  as  \>iK- 
.scribed  above,  if  the  firsit  captain  wishes  to  charj;e,  lie 
orders  Oie  charge  to  l>e  sounded. 

At  this  ."^ignal,  each  ehicf  of  platoon  conducts 
his  platoon  to  the  change  in  good  order;  the  re- 
serve supports  the  movement  at  the  (rot  or  at  the 
ffallojp. 

The  first  captain  platcBS  himself  so  as  to  be  able  Xo- 
direct  the  general  movement. 

The  second  captain  cliargCTj  with  the  platoon  noaro>t 
to  him. 

The  platoons  rally  behind  the  reserve ;  the  first  captaiti 
moves  upon  that  point  at  the  same  time  that  he  order.s 
the  rally  to  bo  soimded. 

If,  in  a  squadron  c»f  dragoons,  one  platoon  dismotmt.4 
to  fight  on  foot,  the  first  ca])tain  commnnds: 

1.  First  (or  fourth)  platoon — prepare  to  Jisiht  on  foot. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  orderd 
the  sabres  to  be  returned. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
platoon,  this  platooti  moves  forward,  having  tnarched  12 
paces,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  halts  it  and  commands  : 

Prepare  to  fight — ON  FOOT. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  dragoons,  in  the 
platoon  drill. 


THE    SQUADRON.  219 

The  platoon  beinc  formed  on  foot,  it  is  conducted  to 
■the  point  it  is  to  defend,  and  is  exercised  as  light  in- 
fantry. 

The  horses  without  riders  will  he  led  in  rear  of  the 
•centre'oC  the  squadron. 

When  the  first  captain  wishes  the  ilismounted  platoon 
to  remount,  he  orders  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this 
iiiiriial,  the  chief  of  tlii?  platoon  pliaces  himself  at  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  the  dras^oons  to  rally,  if  dis- 
jiersed  us  skirniishers,  and  the  rally  is  executed  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  drajioons. 

The  platoon  being  formed,  is  conducted  by  the  rear 
Tank  to  within  12  paces  -of  the  grovmd  occupied  by  their 
horses,  and  the  chief  of  this  platoon  gives  the  command, 
•dragoons  mount,  wdiich  having  been  executed,  it  resumes 
its  place  in  the  squadron. 

If  the  first  captain  wishes  a  division  to  disn>ount,  he 
•commands: 

First  (or  second)  division — prepare  tojight  on  foot.. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  platoon.  The  2d  lieutenant  commanding  the  second 
g)latoon  of  the  division,  remains  with  the  liorses  of  the 
"dismounted  men:  the  1st  lieutenant  commands  the  dis> 
mounted  dragoons;  he  forms  two  platoons  which  are 
v3xercised  on  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  tlie 
platoon. 

If  the  whole  squadron  dismounts  to  fight  on  foot,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

Prepare  to  jfiirht — on  Foot. 

Which  is  executed  by  the  whole  squadron,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  platoon. 

The  i^econd  captain  and  an  otTiccr  remain  with  the 
liorses  of  the  dismounted  men:  the  first  captain  moves 
his  dismotmtcd  squadron  uprtn  the  i)oint  it  is  to  defend, 
and  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  light  infantry 
tactic-. 

The  squadron  remounts  by  the  commands  and  on  the 
principles  i)rcscribed  for  the  platoon. 


220  THE    SQUADRON. 

TI)P  riglit  flic  of  the  s<]iiadron  remains  moimted. 

The  jiarficnilar  j^uides  disinoiuit.  nnd  al?o  the  two 
trumpeters  who  follow  the  first  cnpiain  ami  the  lietjteii- 
ant  coimuanilin^i  the  sUirmishers. 

The  lik'-closcrs  who  remain  mounted  take  their  jjluces 
in  front  of  their  platoons. 

Thn  horses  of  t}ie  officers  who  dismount  are  lield  as 
follows : 

Those  of  the  first  captain  and  tlie  lieutenant  eom- 
Diandin^  the  first  platoon,  by  a  trumpeter  who  remains 
mounted  on  the  right  of  the  srpiadron.  He  holds  the 
captain's  horse  on  his  right  and  the  other  on  his  left. 

The  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  holds  tlie 
horses  of  the  two  other  commandants  of  ]ilatoons. 

The  trooper  on  the  riglit  of  the  rear  rank,  holds  with 
his  right  hand  the  horse  of  tl)e  particular  guide  of  the 
right,  and  the  horses  of  the  two  trumpeters  are  linked 
on  his  left. 

The-trooper  on  the  loft  of  the  front  rank  holtls  tlic 
horse  of  the  particular  guide  of  the  left  ^ith  his  left 
hand. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  roar  rank  holds  the  horse 
of  the  file-closer  who  dismounts. 


THE  COLUMN  BY  DIVISIONS. 

'  he  Sfjuadron  being  in  line,  if  the  first  i'aj)tain  wishes 
to  form  it  in  column  by  divisions,  he    commands: 

1.  Divhiona  riifht  (or  left)  wheel. 

2,  March. 

8.  Halt  (or  Forward.) 
4.    Guide  left  (or  ri(jht.) 

Whicli  is  executed  as  jjrescnbed.  in  ordi-rto  brcau  im- 
squadron  by  ])latoons  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  halting 
after  the  wheels  or  without  halting. 


THE   SQUADRON.  221 

The  same  movements  arc  execiUed,  wlien  the  squad- 
ron is  marcliiiitj  in  line. 

The  prinoi])les  prescribed  for  the  cohim«  by  platoons^ 
are  applicable  to  the  march  in  column  by  divisions^  the 
different  modes  of  passing  from  line  into  column,  and 
from  column  into  line. 

To  gain  ground  towards  its  flanks  or  to  the  rear,  em- 
ploy the  means  prescril^ed  for  the  column  by  platoonsv 
The  wheels-about  can  be  also  executed  by  divisions. 

The  distance  measured  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of 
the  rear  rank  of  one  division,  to  the  head  of  the  horses 
of  the  division  which  follows,  should  be  equal  to  the 
front  of  the  division,  minus  the  depth  of  the  two  ranks. 

In  the  wheels  on  a  moveable  pivot  by  divisions,  the 
ninth  lile  of  the  jilatoon  upon  which  the  wheel  is  exe- 
cuted, is  the  middle  point  of  the  radius  of  tlie  wheel. 
The  pivot  describees  an  arc  of  circle  of  ten  paces. 

The  squa  Iron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right 
iin  front,  to  form  the  divisions  at  the  same  gait,  the  tirst 
captain  commands: 

1.  Form  divisions:  2,  March, 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoon  left  half- 
wltcel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  same 
officers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a 
lialf-iched  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot.  The  first 
and  third  platoons  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward, and  after  having  marched  30  pac(\'3,  their 
chiefs  command  :  Halt. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons, 
when  the  half -wheel  to  tlxebft  is  nearly  terminated, 
command,  1.  Forward;  2.  G aide  right;  they 
move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the  right 
tile  of  their  platoon  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the 
19* 


222  THE    SQUADROX. 

left  file  of  the  platoon  which  pTeeedes,  thej  com- 
mand,  1.  7^ />///?  half-ichcrl ;  2.  March  j  3.  For- 
ward ;  tliey  move  forward,  and  command  halt, 
on  arriving-  abveast  of  the  ph\tuuji  bclunging-  to  the 
same  division. 

The  lieutcnaKts  commanding  divisions  then  com- 
mand, Rujlit — Drkss,  move  to  the  left  of  the  divi- 
sion, rectify  the  alignment,  command,  fhont,  and 
return  to  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

Wliei)  the  column  is  at  tlie  tro^,  to  itirm  divisions  at 
the  .<aine  gait,  conform  to  i\\c  principles  just  prescribed, 
except  that  the  chiefs  of  the  lirst  and  third  platoons,  at 
the  lirst  command,  commnnd  Walk;  at  the  command 
MARCH,  repeateil  by  ihem,  their  platoons  pabs  to  Chewo/t, 
continue  io»  march  on,  and  that  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
;ind  fc)urth  pla>toons,  which  execute  their  movements  in 
inarchinfj  at  the  trot,  command  Walk,  in  sufiicient  time- 
to  command  MARCH  whw)  their  phi  toons  come  up  abreast 
of  those  oil  wliich  they  are  to  form. 

The  first  captain  then  commands  :  Qttide  left. 

Wlien  tlie  coUimn  is  at  tlie  gallop,  to  form  the  divi- 
sions at  the  same  gait,  conform  to  the  same  principles, 
the  first  and  third  platoons  passing  to  ihe  //of  at  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  and  the  secojid  ami  fomth  platoons  taking 
the  trot,  as  they  come  up. 

The  cf>lurnn  having  the  left  in  front,  conform  to  the 
same  prin(^ii)k'S,  the  lirst  and  ihinl  platoons  executing  iu 
an  inverse  sense  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second 
and  fourtFi ;  and  the  latter  conforming  to  wliat  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  first  and  thirii. 

The  S(]uadron  inarching  in  cohimn  by  divisions,  right 
in  front,  to  break  the  divisions  by  i)latoons.  the  first  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.  Bf/  platoons.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 


THE    SQUADRON.  223 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoons  right-half 
wheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  same 
officers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a 
half  icliccl  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  thefii'st 
and  third  platoons  continue  to  march  on. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons,  the 
half  wheel  to  the  right  being  nearly  terminated, 
command,  1.  Forward;  2.  Guide  left;  they 
move  stmight  fwward,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file 
of  their  platoon  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  left 
file  of  the  platoon  which  precedes,  they  command, 
1.  Left  half  wheel;  2.  MARCH ;  3.  Forward; 
and  move  forward  taking  their  proper  distances. 

The  divisions  are  brcvken  by  platoons,  on  the-  same- 
principles,  in  inarching  at  the  trot  or  af  the  gallopi. 

The  cohimn  having  the  left  in  front,,  the  first  captain 
commands.  1.  By  the  left — by  platoons;*  2.  Marck; 
3.  Guide  right;  which  is  executed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, the  first  and  third  platoons  executing  in  an  inverse 
sense  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  and  fourth,  and 
the  hitter  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  firsS 
and  third  platoons. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right 
in  front,  to  P)rm  divisions,  doubling  the  gait,  the  firsrt 
captain  commands: 

1.  Form  divisions — trot.  3.    Guide  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  the  first 
*It  is  better  to  command — ''By  platoons  from  the  leftJ'^ 


224  THE    SQUADRON. 

and  third  platoons  continuing  to  march  at  the  same 
j^ait,  and  tlic  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  pla- 
toons commanding:  1.  Platoon  left  half  wheel — 
trot;  2.  March;  3.  Forward;  4.  Guide  right ; 
and  1.  Right  halficheel ;  2.  March;  3.  For- 
ward ;  4.  Walk.  "When  they  arrive  abreast  of 
the  platoon  on  which  they  form,  they  command  : 
5.  March. 

The  column  marching  at  the  tro!,  tlie  division:?  are 
formednt  the  gallop,  on  ihe  same  principles,  at  the  com- 
mands: 1.  Form  divisions — gallop;  2.  March:  3.  Guide 
htft. 

When  the  cohnnu  is  at  the  gallop,  the  (!i visions  are 
formed  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  and  third  platoons  takin;^ 
the  trot  at  tlie  command  march. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  tlivisions,  right 
in  front,  to  break  the  divisions  by  platoons,  doubling th(^ 
gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  jplatootu — tr<)t.  o.    Guide  right. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
third  platoons  command,  2\'<tt;  those  of  the  sec- 
ond and  fourth  platoons  command,  Platoons  right 
lialf  wltecl — trot. 

•  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  first  and  third  platoons  move  for- 
ward at  the  trot.  The  second  and  fourth  execute 
their  half-inhcel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  at  the 
trot,  and  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed 
above. 

The  eolunin  being  at  the  trot^  to  breiiu  by  platoons  at 
the  gallop,  conform  to  the  same  principles,  at  the  com- 


THE    SQUADRON.  225 

lommands:  1.  By  p'atO(rns — gallop  ;  2.  Mkncu  ]  3.  Gitide 
left. 

When  the  colnmn  nmrches  at  the  gallop,  the  divisions 
are  broken  at  tlie  same  ijait. 

The  squadron  bein<?  in  line,  to  break  it  by  divisions 
by  the  rijiht  to  march  to  the  left,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Dicisions  break  hi/  thr  right — to  march  to  the 
left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column 
by  platoons,  each  first  lieutenant  commanding  suc- 
cessively, MARCH,  when  the  division  which  pre- 
cedes arrives  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon  of  his  own  division. 

The  same  principles  are  observed,  to  break  by  the  left 
to  march  to  the  right. 

To  break  the  squadron  by  divisions  to  the  rear  by  the 
right,  lo  march  to  tlie   lefi.  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Divisions  break  by  tlie  right  to  the  rear — to 
march  to  the  left. 

2.  March. 

"Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column 
by  platoons,  each  first  lieutenant  commanding  suc- 
cessively, MARCH,  when  the  chief  of  the  division 
which  was  on  his  right  has  commanded  torward, 
after  having  executed  his  ivheel  to  the  right-about. 

To  1)reak  to  the  roar  by  the  left  to  march  to  the  right, 
follow  the  same  principles. 


22G  THE    SQUAD..ON. 


THE  SQUADRON  OF  SIXTY-FOUR  FILES, 

The  priiKM[)les  establislied  Cor  tlit»  squ.Tdmii  of  forty- 
eight  filess  ni'?  applicable  \o  the  sqiuulron  of  ?ixty-four 
files,  with  the  ftjUowino;  modifications: 

The  phitodni;  being  of  sixteen  files,  tlie  distance  mca- 
Mired  frotn  the  erou])  of  the  rear  rank  of  one  phitoon  to 
the  head  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank  of  the  ph)toon 
vvhich  follows,  is  ten  paces. 

For  the  chanties  of  direction,  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed when  tlie  platoons  are  composed  of  twelve  files, 
cxcejit  that  the  arc  described  by  the  pivot  is  of  six  paces. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  it  is 
broken  by  sections,  on  the  prin(;iples  indicaterl  to  break 
by  fours,  at  the  con)manils  :  1.  By  sections:  'J.  March, 
The  same  movements  are  cxecutetl  doubling  the  gait. 
The  sections  are  commanded  as  prescribed/ 

In  the  movement  to  breaA'  by  platoons  by  the  right  to 
march  to  the  left,  each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the  com- 
mand MARCH,  when  the  platoon  which  precedes,  after 
having  turned  to  the  left,  arrives  opposite  the  centre  of 
his  own   platoon. 

In  the  movement  to  break  by  platoons  to  tlie  rear  by  the 
right  to  march  to  the  left,  each  chief  of  platoon  gives  the 
command  mauch.  when  the  chief  of  the  })latoon  which 
precedes,  after  having  executed  his  wheel  to  the  right- 
about, com  n  ands  :  FouwARU. 

In  the  wheels  of  a  division  on  a  moveable  pivot,  the 
arc  of  circle  is  of  12  paces;  the  twelfth  file  from  the  pivot 
should  ))reserve  the  gait  at  which  the  division  was 
marching;  for  the  squadron,  tlie  arc  of  circle  described  by 
the  pivot  being  of  24  paces,  the  eighth  file  of  the  second 
platoon  from  tlie  side  of  the  pivot  should  preserve  the 
gait  at  which  the  squadron  was  marching. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  by   section,  con- 

•  See  paiagraph  (in  first  part  of  platoon  drill)  on  col- 
umn of  sections. 


THE    SQUADRON.  227 

}bvm  U>  the  principles  prescribed  in  onlcr  to  break  by 
platoons,  at  the  commands:  1.  Sections  right  ivheel ;  li. 
March;  3.  Halt  (or  Forward);  4.  Guide  left;  or  1. 
Sections  right  wheel — head  of  column  to  the  right  (or  to  the 
left.) 

In  the  column  by  sections,  tine  distance  from  one  sec- 
tion to  another  is  two  paces  * 

The  changes  of  direction  of  the  cohnnn  by  sections  are 
executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  coliunn 
marching  by  fours,  the  pivot  descril)ing  an  arc  of  cir- 
cle of  5  paces^  without  slackening  the  gait. 

For  the  oblique  march,  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  cohinin  by  fours. 

The  sections  are  broken  by  fours  on  the  principles  to 
break  the  platoons  by  four$,  at  the  same  gait  and  doubling 
the  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  to  the  front.,  or  on  right  into  line.,  on  the  princij^les 
prescribed  for  these  formations,  when  marching  in  eol- 
tivin  by  fours. 

The  squadron  inarching  in  column  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  at  the  same-  gair,  or  (loid>ling  the  gait,  by  the 
means  prescribed  for  tlie  forma,tion,  front  into  line  ivhen 
marching  by  fours. 

The  squadron  marclung  in  cohimin  by  sections,  it  is 
formed  left  into  line,  on  the  princij)les  prescribed  for  the 
squadron  marching  in  coliunn  by  platoons. 

The  squadron  is  broken  by  sections  for  \\\e  formation 
of  close  column  and  for  the  passage  of  lines. 

*  2   yards. 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


I^uA-ItX    rOXJR.TIi- 


Sindc  fxanli  iformations. 

The  principles  which  govern  the  movements  oi 
mounted  forces  formed  in  two  ranks  are  equally 
applicable  when  there  is  but  one  rank. 

The  words  of  command  remain  the  same,  except 
that  those  which  can  only  be  executed  by  two  rank, 
are  omitted. 

At  the  sin;nal,  ''hoot  and  suddlv,"  the  horses  arc 
saddled,  bridled,  and  prepared  to  be  led  out  to  the 
parade  or  drill  ground. 

The  call  "to  horse^^  beit)<;  sounded,  the  1st 
Sergeant  orders  the  troopers  to  '^Icad  out.'' 

When  the  last  call  only  is  sounded,  (as  is  proper 
in  cases  of  sudden  alaru),)  the  troopers  saddle,  bri- 
dle and  mount  with  the  utmost  celerity;  and  form 
mounted  at  the  place  of  as-sembly,  which  must  al- 
ways be  previously  designated. 

The  platoon  is  composed  of  16  troopers  as  a  max- 
imum^ 12  as  a  minimum. 


SINGLE   RANK    FORMATIONS.  229 

It  is  preferable  to  divide  into  platoons  of  16,  al- 
though this  may  require  the  number  of  platoons  to 
be  diminished;  platoons  of  16  arc  divisable  into 
sections,  but  not  those  of  12. 

Two,  three,  or  four  platoons  united  may  practice 
the  squadron  exercises. 

A  company  divided  into  4  platoons  of  16  men 
will  require  1  Captain,  2  Lieutenants,  4  Sergeants, 
4  Corporals,  and  60  Privates.  When  the  hitter  fall 
below  60  in  number,  they  may  be  divided  into  3 
platoons  and  one  section  of  8  ;  or  into  4  platoons  of 
12  men  each. 

When  the  number  is  more  than  sufficient  for  a 
front  of  48  or  64,  some  of  the  more  expert  troopers 
will  act  as  Corporals,  the  latter  then  acting  as  Ser- 
geants. If  the  strength  is  sufficient,  the  number 
of  non-commissioned  officers,  (and  troopers  acting 
as  such,)  will  equal  the  number  prescribed  in  the 
Squadron  Drill,  and  their  posts  will  be  the  same  as 
there  indicated.  (See  first  pages  of  Squadron 
Drill.) 

In  the  assignment  of  posts  with  the  supposition 
that  48  or  64  rank  and  file  are  present,  we  will 
designate  the  Captain  as  No.  1,  the  next  in  rank 
No.  2,  and  so  on  to  the  4th  Corporal,  who  will  bo 
No.  11. 

The  company,  formed  as  squadron  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  positions  will  be  as  follows : 

No.  1 


1, 

1  yard  in  front  of  centre  of  company. 

3, 

"      "      "       '•       "  1st  platoon 

"             "         "         i'          «          u    4tlj          u 

4, 

vi             u         u         I.          11          u    2d            u 

20 


230  SINGLE   RANK    FORMATIONS. 

No.  T),  1  yard  in  front  of  centre  of  3tl  platoon. 

•'     6,  on  the  rifjht  flank,  not  counteil. 
•'     7,  "        left  '•     '  " 

'•     8,         "         ''     of  the  1st  platoon. 
"    9,         "       right     -       2(1         « 
'•  10,         "       left        "       3(1         " 
"  11,  "       right     ••        4th         " 

Experienced  troopers  should  be  assigned  to  the 
flanks  of  platoons  and  sections. 

The  horses  are  conducted  to  the  drill  ground  as 
directed  in  the  first  pages  of  the  Drill  of  the 
Trooper,  and  having  arrived  there,  the  Captain 
commands: 

Attention  !    In  one  rank — Form  Squadron.* 

The  Captain  and  chiefs  of  platoons  are  now  mounted  ; 
all  the  rest  ^^stand  to  horsc,^^  thnt  is  to  sa3%  they  take  the 
position  of  the  trooper  dismounted.  The  Captain  and  chiels 
of  platoon  face  the  centres  of  their  respective  commands 
at  10  yards  distance  measured  from  head  to  head. 

At  the  above  command,  the  company  is  formed 
with  the  tallest  on  the  right.  The  Captain  having 
ascertained  that  the  positions  have  been  taken  as 
directed, ■{■  he  commands  : 

Attention  !  Rujht — Dress. 

*In  practicing  the  Squadron  movements,  the  word 
"Squadron"  is  used  in  the  cominands. 

fThe  po.sitions  of  all  hesides  the  Captain  and  chiefsof 
l)latoriii  are  the  same  as  in  line  of  battle  ;  the  trumpeters 
•.i5  yards  (unless  otherwise  ordered)  in  rear  of  the  cen- 
tre; the  file-closers  1  yard  in  rear  ot  the  3d  files  from 
the  flanks.  For  further  directions,  see  first  pages  of 
Platoon  Drill. 


WNGLE   RANK   FORMATIONS.  281 

The  drrss  being  completed,  he  commands : 
Front,  and  directs  the  Orderly  Sergeant  to  call 
the  roll;  which  having  been  done  and  the  absentees 
reported,  the  Captain  commands  : 

In  each  platoon — Count  by  fours. 

This  is  executed  as  directed  in  the  platoon  and 
squadron,  omitting  what  is  prescribed  for  ihe  rear 
rank. 

The  Captain  cautions  the  troopers  to  recollect 
their  numbers,  and  then  commands  : 

PREPARE   TO    MOUNT. 

At  the  command  prepare  to  mount,  all  other 
cavalry  than  mounted  riflemen  will  be  governed  by 
the  principles  laid  down  in  the  Drill  of  the  Trooper. 

Mounted  Riflemen  will  observe  the  principles 
explained  in  the  Mounted-iUIlo-Drill. 

The  same  remarks  are  applicable  to  the  execu- 
tion of  the  next  following  command,  viz:  Mount; 
also  to  the  execution  of  the  commands,  ^'Prepare 
to  dismount^'  and  '•' Dismoimt." 

Having  mounted,  all  will  take  posty  as  above 
prescribed,  for  battle  order;  mounted  riflemen  con- 
forming to  the  rules  prescribed  for  that  class  of 
mounted  troops. 

The  compai  y  being  in  line,  to  execute  a  move- 
ment by  files  from  one  of  the  flanks,  the  Captain 
commands : 

1.  Bi/  files  to  the  right  (or  left.)      2.  TuARCFI. 
At  the  1st  command,  the  chief  of  the  platoon 


232  SINOLE    RANK    FORMATIONS. 

which  shrmhl  htyhi  the  movement,  witli  tlic  right 
(or  left)  particular  guide  followiug  him,  will  place 
himself  faeiiiir  in  the  direction  indicated,  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  flank,  the  croup  of  the  Ser- 
geant's horse  being  one  yard  from  the  boot  of  the 
flank  man. 

At  the  word  march,  the  trooper  on  the  flank  in- 
dicated will  turn  and  follow  the  Sergeant  guide  of 
that  flunk.  All  the  others  will  turn  in  .^^uccession, 
each  one  opening  the  rein  and  closing  the  leg  on 
the  side  indicated,  promptly,  so  as  to  take  and  pre- 
serve the  distance  of  2  feet  from  the  file  in  front  of 
him. 

The  chiefs  of  (all  except  the  leading)  platoon 
will  march  one  yard  from  their  leading  files,  abreast 
of  them  and  on  the  side  of  guides.* 

The  guide  of  that  flank  vrhich  has  bow  become 
the  rear  will  march  2  feet  behind  the  last  file  in  the 
column. 

The  Captain  will  march  on  the  side  of  guides  4 
yards  from  the  centre. 

When  3  l^ieutenants  are  present,  the  3d  in  rank 
will  connuand  the  2d  ])latoon,  and  a  corresponding 
change  will  be  made  in  the  posts  of  the  non-com- 
missioned ofticcrs.  The  music  will  turn  to  the 
right  (or  left)  when  the  centre  files  turn,  maintain- 
ing the  same  relative  position  as  in  line,  except 
when  ordered  to  the  front  or  rear,  or  when  obsta- 
cles require  a  change. 

One  bugler  will  follow  the  Captain  at  3  yards 
distance. 

*The ''side  of  the  guides'^  is  the  /«/if  when  the  rtg/t/  is 
in  front,  and  the  right  when  the  left  is  in  front. 


SINGLE    RANK    FORMATIONS.  233 

In  the  column  of  route,  passing  along  highways 
or  streets,,  or  marching  in  review,  the  music  will 
move  6  yards  in  front  of  the  leading  officer. 

Columns  of  fours,  twos,  and  files  are  formed  to 
the  front  from  either  flank,  by  the  commands  and 
on  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  drills  of  the 
iPlatoon  and  Squadron. 

The  column  of  files  being  in  motion,  right  in 
front,  to  form  line  facing  to  the  left,  without  gain- 
ing ground  to  that  flank,   the   Capt  tin   commands  : 

1.  Front.  3.  Right — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Fr-ont. 

At  the  word  front,  the  leading  officer  and  Ser- 
geant burn  promptly  to  the  left,  and  halt  at  the 
word  halt.  All  the  rest  move  forward  in  the  orioi- 
iial  direction  of  the  column,  each  trooper  com- 
mencing his  turn  to  the  left  when  2  yards  from  his 
place  in  the  new  line,  halting  1  yard  short  of  the 
line,  and  then  gradually  dressing  up,  without  pass- 
ing over  it. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  take  their  posts  as 
soon  as  half  of  their  platoons  have  come  up  to  the 
line. 

The  Captain  taking  position  near  the  right  flank, 
will  direct  the  alignment,  not  giving  the  word //w/^ 
until  the  last  file  is  aligned. 

The  column  of  files  lei't  in  front  will  be  formed 
facin<:;  to  the  riulit  of  tlie  column,  without  liaining; 
ground  to  the  right,  on  the  same  principles,  but  by 
inverse  means,  at  the  commands  : 
20* 


2M  61NJ.LK    RANK    FORMATIONS. 

1.  Front.  3.  Lr/t — Dress. 

2.  Halt.  4.  Front. 

The  niove:i  cuts  '■^litfht  into  liur^'  and  "A./?  into 
fine'  are  executed  as  directed  in  the  second  and 
third  jiarts  of  this  vuluuie.  The  latter  niove- 
iiiciit.K  rofjuirc  oU  yards  to  be  frained  to  the  flank, 
but  in  other  respects  are  similar  in  execution  to  the 

All  other  movements  of  cavalry  arc  fully  ex- 
]>lained  in  the  three  first  parts  of  this  work,  or  in 
the  ioilowinir  instructions  for  Mounted  Kiflemon. 

Corps  {}{  cavalry  designed  exclusively  for  the 
latter  branch  of  service  will  form  and  manwuvre 
altogether  on  the  following  principles,  suj)plyir)g 
what  is  wauting  in  the  following  rules  and  explana- 
tions from  the  1st,  2d  and  3d  parts. 

With  such  corps,  the  actual  engL\genient  being 
prineii>ally  on  foot,  the  Liylit  lufdiitrtj  exercises  of 
the  schooLs  oj  the  wldltr  and  company  should  be 
Well  understood. 

Remafik. — The  large  size  bowie-knife,  or  tlie  sword- 
bayonet.  \»  perhaps  jtreleraMe  to  ihe  sabre  for  the 
Tiionntoil-rifle  seiviro.  and  the  rilles  shonhl  be  breech- 
loaders (if  hiiij;  ran^e. 


SKIRMISH 


ARTICLE    I. 

I  1. — Composition  of  a  company  acting  sinjily,  and 
posts  of  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  &c.,  &c. 

A  company  consists  of  one  captain,  one  first 
lieutenant,  one  second  lieutenant,  one  brevet*  sec- 
ond lieutenant,  four  sergeants,  four  corporals,  one 
farrier,  one  blacksmith,  two  buglers,  and  sixty-four 
privates  minimum,  seventy-four  maximum. 

A  company  is  divided  into  two  platoons,  which 
are  numbered  from  the  right,  first  platoon  and 
SECOND  platoon. 

Each  platoon  contains  two  sections.  The  first 
and  second  sections  make  up  the  first  platoon  ;  the 
third  and  fourth  sections  make  up  the  second  pla- 
toon. 

The  sections  are  called  from  the  right  in  the 
order  in  which  they  stand — first,  second,  third  and 
fourth  section. 

Each  section  is  made  up  of  "sets  of  four,"  which 
are  called  in  the  order  in  which  they  stand  in  their 
respective  sections,  from  the  right,  "first  set," 
''second  set,"  "third  set,"  &c.,  &c. 

I^os(  of  ojjirrrs  and  non -commissioned  officers,  of 
a  compoii}/  in  line  (tf  bdltle,  viz: 

*0r  junior  second  heutcnant. 


236  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

No.  1.  Captain,  ten  yards  in  front  of  cen- 
tre of  coni|iany. 

No.  2.   1st  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  front 
of  centre  of  1st  platoon. 

No.  3.  2d  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  front 
of  centre  of  2d  platoon.  J  !5 

No.  4.  Brevet  2d  lieutenant,  five  yards  in  rear  of 
centre  of  company,  (not  replaced  when  absent.) 

No.  5.   1st  .serueant,  on  riiiht  of  1st  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  0.  2d  seriicant,  on  riirht  of  2d  section,  not 
counted  m.  the  rank. 

No.  7.  3d  sergeant,  on  right  of  3d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  8.  4th  sergeajit,  on  right  of  4th  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  9.  1st  corpnrail,  on  left  of  1st  section,  not 
-counted  i«  the  rank. 

No  lU.  2d  corporal,  on  left  of  2d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  11.  od  corporal,  on  left  of  3d  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

No.  12.  4th  corjioral,  on  left  of  4th  section,  not 
counted  in  the  rank. 

Karrier  and  blacksmith  in  the  rank;  bugler  near 
and  behind  the  caj»tain,  or  on  right  of  1st  sergeant, 
and  one  yard  fro.i:  him. 

•Itli  section.      3(1  section.        2(1  sectitjn.        1st  section. 


1st  pluloon. 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  237 

In  line  of  battle  there  will  be  an  interval  of  one 
yard  between  the  corporal  on  the  left  of  each  sec- 
tion and  the  sergeant  on  the  right  of  next  section. 
In  column  of  platoons  the  same  interval  will  be 
observed. 

In  column  of  platoons  the  captain  v^ill  be  habit- 
uall}'  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  about  ten  yards 
outside  the  centre  of  the  column.  The  other  offi- 
cers, non-commissioned  officers,  &c.,  will  occupy  the 
positions  above  indicated. 

In  column  of  sections  the  captain  will  be  ten 
yards  outside  the  flank  of  the  column  on  the  side 
of  the  guide. 

The  first  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  the 
flank  of  the  column  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
opposite  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the  1st 
and  2d  sections. 

The  second  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside 
the  flank  of  the  column  on  the  side  of  the  guide, 
and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the 
3d  and  4th  sections. 

The  sergeants  will  be  one  yard  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  their  respective  sections,  and  will  com- 
mand them.  The  corporals  will  be  in  the  rank  of 
their  respective  sections. 

The  buglers  will  accompany  the  captain,  or  will 
be  on  the  right  of  the  leading  sergeant  of  the  col- 
umn. 

In  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  captain  will 
be  ten  yards  outside  the  centre  of  the  flank  of  the 
column,  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  1st  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  of 


238  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

the  centre  of  the  flank  of  his  platoon,   on   the   side 
of  the  guide. 

The  2d  lieutenant  will  be  five  yards  outside  of 
the  centre  of  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  on  the  side 
of  the  guide. 

The  sei  ueants  (except  the  sergeant  of  the  lead- 
ing section)  will  be  abreast  of  the  leading  four,  two, 
or  file,  of  their  respective  sections,  and  on  the  side 
opi'osite  the  guide. 

The  sergeant  of  the  leading  section  will  be  in 
front  of  its  leading  four. 

In  all  colunms  the  brevet  2d  lieutenant,  when 
there  is  one  serving  with  the  conijtany,  will  be  five 
yards  outside  of  the  centre  of  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn, and  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

The  Corporal  will,  in  all  columns  of  fours, 
twos,  and  files,  be  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide, 
abreast  of  the  last  set,  two,  or  file.  In  columns  of 
companies,  platoons,  or  sections,  he  remsuns  in  the 
rank. 

The  company  having  been  thus  formed,  will  be 
drilled  by  the  means  and  direct  inns  laid  down  in 
Cavalry  'i'acties  for  the  squadron. 

The  section  will  be  drilled  by  the  means  and 
directions  laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics  for  the 
platoon. 

The  only  changes  necessary  in  order  to  make  the 
one  answer  for  the  other,  are  those  which  result 
from  tVie  diminished  de))th  of  the  rank  and  the  use 
of  the  words  '^company"  and  "section,"  instead  of 
"squadron"  and  "platoon  :" — (r.  g.) 

in  forming  to  left  into  line  from  column  of  fours, 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  239 

the  command  must  be  changed  to,  "  By  fours  left 
wheel.'' 

To  mount. 

g  2. — The  command  being  dismounted  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  men  standing  to  horse,  to  mount,  the  commands 
of  the  Chief  are  : 

1.  Prepare  to  mount.  2.  Mount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  sergeant  and  numbers 
two  and  four  of  each  section  move  five  yards  to  the 
front,  stepping  off  with  the  left  foot,  and  regnlatipg 
by  the  right.  The  corporals  and  numbers  one  and 
three  stand  fast  until  the  others  have  cleared  them  ; 
all  then  prepare  to  mount  according  to  the  princi- 
ples laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics,  except  that  they 
take  the  end  of  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  draw 
them  through  the  left,  which  holds  them  above  the 
middle  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  between  the  thumb 
and  hand,  with  the  palm  down,  until  the  horse  just 
feels  the  bit;  then  with  the  right  hand  adjust  the 
stirrup  to  the  left  foot,  and  with  the  left  hand  take 
up  a  lock  of  the  mane  so  that  its  end  comes  out  by 
the  thumb ;  then  take  the  surplus  part  of  the  reins 
in  the  right  hand  between  the  thumb  and  hand, 
with  the  palm  up,  and  seize  the  right  side  of  the 
pommel  with  the  right  hand. 

At  the  second  command,  all  mount  together, 
and  the  corporals  and  numbers  one  and  three 
immediately  move  forward,  and  place  themselves 
boot  to  boot  with  the  sergeants  and  numbers  two 
and  four. 


240  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

The  ClHcf  corrects  the  alignment,  if  it  be  neces- 
sary, commanding  "Right — dress."  The  Assistant 
places  himself  at  this  cuinmand  on  the  right  of  the 
line,  looking  along  it,  and  correcting  the  files  \Yho 
are  out  of  place.  ♦ 

IMic  Chief  remains  in  front,  in  order  to  superin- 
tend the  alignment.  The  Assistant  commands 
♦'  Steady,"  when  the  files  are  all  correctly  aligned ; 
and  then  the  Chief  commands  "  Front.  " 

To  dismount. 

§  .T. — The  command  beiiifi  mounted  in  hne  of  battle, 
10  ilii-muiuil  il  the  commands  are: 

I,  Prepare  to  dumount.  2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gergcant  and  numbers 
two  and  four  in  each  section  move  to  the  front  five 
yards ;  the  corporals  and  numbers  one  and  three 
stand  fast.  All  then  prepare  to  dismount  in  other 
respects  as  laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics,  except 
that  they  take  the  reins  in  the  left  hand  with  a  lock 
of  the  mane,  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  right 
side  of  the  pommel. 

At  the  second  command  all  dismount,  leaving  the 
reins  over  the  ])ommel ;  the  sergeants  and  numbers 
two  and  four  stand  to  horse,  while  the  corporals  and 
numbers  one  and  three  lead  forward  and  form  rank 
with  them. 

To  link. 

To  link  after  dismounting,  the  man  stands  to 
horse,  faces  about  to  the  rear,  takes  the  link  which 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  241 

hanirs  from  the  halter  lino-  of  the  horse  of  his  left 
file  in  his  right  hand,  seizes  his  own  horse  by  the 
bit  near  the  mouth,  and  draws  the  horse  of  his  left 
file  towards  his  own  until  he  can  hook  the  snap 
into  the  curb  ring;  in  hooking,  the  nails  of  his 
right  hand  are  down. 

When  he  dismounts  he  leaves  his  reins  over  the 
pommel  of  the  saddle. 

'J'o  facilitate  the  liiiking,  the  horse  holder  should 
bear  his  horse's  head  well  towards  number  three. 

§4. — Form  and  course  of  inspection  for  the  single 
rank  formation  :  The  company  being  formed  in  line,  in 
one  rank,  mounted,  tlie  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers,  in  their  places,  (see  section  1,)  to  inspect  it — 
the  commands  are  : 

1.  For  inspection — Prepare  to  dismount. 

2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  second  lieu- 
tenants move  forward  ten  yards  The  brevet  second 
lieutenant  places  himself  upon  the  line  with  them, 
in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  company;  they  all 
then  return  sabre  and  prepare  to  dismount. 

'\\\Q.  non  commissioned  officers  move  forward  ten 
yards,  and  prepare  to  dismount. 

Numbers  two  and  four  move  forward  five  yards, 
and  prepare  to  disnu)unt. 

Numbers  one  and  three  prepare  to  dismount  in 
their  ])laces. 

At  the  serond  command  all  disniount  and  stand 
to  horse.  They  then  shift  the  pistol  hol.iter  to- 
wards the  front  of  the  body  sufficiently  to  enable 
21 


242  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

the  inspecting  officer  readily  to  withdraw  the  pistol. 
The  men  then  unsling  rifles,  order  arms,  and  spring 
ratuincrs  without  noise,  with  the  right  arm  passed 
through  the  rein ;  they  then  allow  the  rifle  to  fall 
across  the  body  obliquely  into  the  hollow  of  the 
left  arm,  which  holds  it  with  the  fore-arm  extended 
down,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  closed 
fingers.  In  this  position  they  await  the  inspec- 
tion. 

As  soon  as  the  inspecting  officer  perceives  that 
the  second  command  has  been  executed,  he  returns 
his  sabre,  disniounts,  gives  his  horse  to  a  trum- 
peter to  hold,  and  commences  his  inspection  on  the 
riglit  of  the  line  of  offi-cers.  He  passes  along  the 
front  of  the  line,  around  its  left,  and  along  its  rear; 
lie  then  pa.sses  to  the  front  of  the  line  of  non- 
commissioned officers,  whieh  he  inspects  in  the 
same  manner.  He  draws  and  inspects  the  pistol 
of  each  man  as  he  comes  to  him,  and,  after  inspect- 
ing, returns  it  to  the  holster.  He  tlien  passes  to 
the  right  of  the  front  line  of  men,  draws  and  in- 
spects the  pistol  of  the  man  on  the  right  of  that 
line,  returns  it  to  the  holster,  takes  the  rifle  from 
the  position  in  which  it  rests,  and,  after  inspecting, 
returns  it  to  that  jtosition;  and  so  on  throughout 
the  line.  Each  man  slings  his  rifle  and  re-adjusts 
his  pistol,  as  soon  as  the  inspector  has  passed  one 
file  beyond  him.  After  having  completed  liis  in- 
spection of  the  men,  horses,  arms,  equij)ments,  &c., 
from  the  front,  the  officer  passes  around  the  left 
and  along  the  rear  of  the  line,  examining  as  he 
goes  the  condition  of  men,  horses,  arms,  and  equip- 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  243 

merits.     He  then  inspects  the  rear  line  of  men  in 
the  same  manner. 

Alter  which  he  mounts,  and  coinimiiids, 

1.  Prepare  to  mount.  4.  Right — DiiESS. 

2.  Mount.  5.  Front. 

3.  Form  rank. 

At  the  first  command  all  prepare  to  mount  in 
their  places.  At  the  second  command  all  mount, 
and  the  rear  line  of  men  move  forward  to  their 
places,  boot  to  boot  with  the  front  line  of  men.  All 
then  move  forward  together  to  the  line  of  non-com- 
missioned officers,  on  which  they  are  aligned  by  the 
fourth  and  fifth  commands. 

The  eabres  are  then  inspected,  as  directed  iii  Cavalry 
Tactics,  by  the  comtnand  : 

1.  Inspection  of  babrk 

If  the  company  be  in  tents  or  other  quarters, 
the  valises  or  saddle  bags  and  clothing  are  inspect- 
ed in  the  quarters. 

If  in  tlie  field,  the  men  will  unstrap  and  di.:;play 
them  on  the  ground  at  their  feet,  as  they  stand  to 
horse,  before  they  unsling  rifles. 

The  trumpeters  will  be  near  and  in  rear  of  the 
inspecting  officer  when  he  gives  the  first  command. 
They  will  dismount  with  the  rest.  One  of  them 
holds  the  horse  of  the  other,  who  goes  to  take  that 
of  the  inspector. 


244  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

ARTICLE    II. 

Skirmish  drill  for  ijioiiiited  rifles. 

§5.   Preliiiiiiiiiry  leiiiHrkri. 

For  this  drill  the  iiieii  sliould  bo  dressed  so  as  to 
secure  tlie  tj^reatest  freedom  of  action,  as  in  the 
bhtusc  or  sack,  and  in  the  forage  cap,  with  the  chin- 
strap  down.  The  revolver  will  be  worn  in  a  belt- 
holster  uj)()n  tlie  riuht  side  of  tlie  man.  The  ijuu 
will  hc!  slum;  across  his  back,  with  the  butt  near  his 
right  hi]).  ]n  addition  to  the  usual  equipment  of  a 
cavalry  soldier,  each  man  will  be  provided  with  a 
*Mink,"  for  the  purpose  of  securing  his  horse  when- 
ever he  dismounts.  It  will  be  buckled  in  the 
lialter-rinii'  of  the  headstall,  and  when  not  wanted 
for  immediate  use,  will  be  hooked  up  by  the  snap 
in  the  same  ring. 

At  the  signal  ^M)oot  and  saddle,"  the  horses  will 
be  saddled  and  bridled. 

At  the  signal  ''to  horse,"  the  command  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  instructions  already  given 
in  section  2. 

Should  the  command  be  less  than  a  complete 
company,  the  officer  in  charge  of  it  will  make  .such 
changes  in  its  organization  as  are  necessary  in  con- 
sequence of  the  absence  of  members. 

Every  command,  be  it  a  full  company  or  a  scout- 
ing party  less  than  a  company,  will  be  divided  into 
four  equal  sections  if  possible. 

A  section  must  contain  at  least  eight  men. 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  245 

Some  portion  of  every  command  will  be  held  in 
reserve,  unless  it  is  so  small  as  to  manifestly  render 
it  unwise  to  divide  it.  Any  section  may  form  the 
reserve ;  and  its  commander  will  be  assigned  by 
selection  and  not  according  to    rank. 

A  "set  of  four"  means  the  four  men  who  tell 
off  together. 

A  "  chief  of  four  "  is  the  right  file  of  the  set,  or 
"number  one"  of  the  set,  and  will  be  habitually 
the  guide  of  his  set;  when  in  column  of  fours,  he 
will  command  the  set  to  which  he  belongs. 

He  will  be  i^sponsible  that  the  men  of  his  set 
?i(?i;cr  separate  from  each  other,  and  for  the  interval, 
distance,  and  alignment. 

The  senior  ofiicer  on  drill  is  termed  the  "Chief/"' 
his  next  in  rank  is  tenned  the  "Assistant." 

Before  skirmisliing,  two  or  three  men  will  be 
detailed  to  accompany  and  protect  the  Chief. 

Preparatory  to  skirmishing,  a  section  will  take 
ojyen  order. 

The  interval  between  men  in  open  order,  mea- 
sured from  "  boot  to  boot,"  is  twenty-seven  inches. 

In  a  column  of  fours,  open  order,  the  distance  be- 
tween the  sets  of  four,  from  croup  to  head,  is  4  yards. 

In  a  column  of  twos,  open  order,  the  distance 
from  croup  to  head  is  eighteen  inches. 

In  a  column  "by  file,"  open  order,  the  distance 
from  croup  to  head  is  eighteen  inches. 

These  distances  and  interval  are  deduced  from 
the  length  and  breadth  of  the  horse,  and  from  the 
agreement  which  must  exist  between  the  depth  of 
a  column,  and  the  length  of  the  line  into  which  it 
will  wheel. 

21* 


246  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

Tho  interval  of  twenty-seven  inches  will  be 
found  in  [iractiec  ample  to  enable  the  men  to  mount 
and  dism<mnt  in  their  places  in  line  or  in  column, 
without  the  necessity  of  the  alternate  files  moving 
out  to  the  front  for  that  purpose. 

In  an  enemy's  country,  or  when  in  danger  of 
sudden  attack  or  ambuscade,  the  leadinu;  section 
of  the  company  or  scouting  party  should  march 
in  open  order,  so  as  to  be  able  to  get  at  once  into 
action. 

To  take  open  order. 

§,0.  Being  in  line,  rif^ht  in  Trent,  the  commands  of 
the  Chief  are: 

1.  l.s/1  sf^ctioUf  (  01'  2d  or  '6dj  as  the  case  may  5e,) 
O'l^en  order — Gallop. 

2.  Mauch. 

At  the  first  command  all  gather  their  horses;  at 
the  second  comntand  all  take  the  gallop,  except  the 
centre  file  of  the  section,  which  trots  out  directly 
to  the  front.  Those  on  the  right  of  the  centre 
oblique  to  the  right,  each  n»an  «-ontinning  to  ob- 
lique until  he  has  an  interval  i>f  twenty-seven 
inches  between  him  and  the  next  file  on  his  left; 
those  on  the  left  of  the  centre  continue  to  oblique 
to  the  left  until  each  man  has  twenty  seven  inches 
interval  between  him  and  the  next  file  on  his  right. 
They  all  then  align  theniselves  on  the  centre,  take 
up  its  gait,  and  continue  to  move  to  the  front  until 
the  next  command  of  the  Chief. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  247 


To  return  to  close  order. 

Being  in  line,  ri^lit  in  front,  in  open  order,  the  com- 
mands of  the  Chief  are  : 

1.    Close  orchr — TllOT.  2.  Marcij. 

At  the  first  command  all  gather  their  horses )  at 
the  second  command  the  centre  file  moves  to  the 
front  at  the  walk,  the  others  close  in  towards  him 
at  the  trot ;  each  in  succession  taking  up  the  walk 
and  aligning  on  the  centre  as  he  gains  his  position 
in  the  line. 

§  7.  The  section  being  in  line,  right  in  front,  open  or- 
der, breaks  into  columns  of  fours,  by  llie  commands  : 

1.  By  fours — Trot,  (or  Gallop.)        2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  first  set  of  four  gathers 
its  horses,  and  takes  the  trot  together  at  the  second. 
After  the  first  set  has  cleared  the  front  of  the  line, 
or  marched  three  yards,  the  second  set  moves  out 
at  the  trot,  ( or  gallop,)  marches  straight  to  the 
front  until  clear  of  the  line,  and  then  obliques  to 
the  right  until  in  position  in  column  exactly  be- 
hind the  first  set,  and  at  four  yards  distance  from 
it,  when  it  marches  to  the  front  to  take  its  place  in 
column.  The  third  set  follows  the  second,  and  so 
on  throughout  the  section,  according  to  the  forego- 
ing directions. 

Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  losing  distance  in 
this  movement.     The  sets  of  four  must  move  out 


248  SKIRMISH    DRILL   FOR 

promptly  in  turn,  and  oblique  together.  The  Chief 
commands  "Guide  right"  when  the  first  set  is  out. 

A  column  of  "twos"  and  "file"  may  be  formed 
on  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  means,  ex- 
cept that  the  distance  in  these  cases  is  only  eighteen 
inches  from  head  to  croup. 

In  all  formations  of  this  drill,  the  same  princi- 
ples will  be  observed  in  regard  to  increasing  the 
gait  as  are  now  established  in  Cavalry  Tactics. 

When  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  file,  the  va- 
rious methods  of  forming  into  line  (iront,  right,  or 
left,)  can  be  executed  by  the  coujmands  and  means 
laid  down  in  Cavalry  Tactics  for  the  platoon. 

Observe:  that  as  there  is  no  rear  rank,  lines  can 
be  formed  at  once  on  either  flank  by  wheeling  by 
fours  to  the  right  or  loft.  When  the  right  of  the 
column  is  in  front,  and  the  wheel  is  made  by  fours 
to  the  riii-ht,  the  sots  will  be  in  line  bv  inversion. 
The  men  of  each  set  will  not  be  inverted. 

When  the  iwen  are  not  well  instructed  in  the 
drill,  the  deployments  from  close  order  into  open 
order,  and  from  open  order  into  skirmishing  order, 
should  be  made  at  the  walk  or  trot.  Habitually 
they  should  be  executed  at  the  gallop;  and  in  ac- 
tion, with  the  greatest  possible  celerity  compatible 
with  steadiness. 

In  deploying,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  will  fall  to  the  rear  of  the  line  in  order  to 
superintend  the  movement. 

Every  movement  not  fully  described  in  the  fol- 
lowing pages  will  be  understood  to  be  executed,  as 
is  now  ordered,  in  the  system  already  in  use. 


MOUNTKD   RIFLES.  249 

§  8.  To  form  column  of  two--,  open  order,  from  col- 
umn by  iile,  marching  at  the  walk,  right  in  front,  the 
commands  are  : 

1.    Form  twos,  open  order — TllOT.  2.   Marcii. 

At  the  second  cominand  niiiubers  two  and  four 
oblique  to  the  loft  at  the  trot,  and  move  to  the 
front  when  in  rear  of  their  places  in  columns  of 
twos,  until  in  line  with  their  respective  ones  and 
threes.  The  leadinij;  set  of  twos  then  being  at  the 
walk,  all  the  others  close  up  at  the  trot  to  their 
places,  with  distance  of  eiiihteen  inches,  and  inter- 
val from  boot  to  boot  of  twenty-sc^en  inches. 

§  0.  To  form  column  of  four^,  o[)en  order,  from  col- 
umn by  file,  when  marching  at  the  walk,  right  in  front, 
the  commands  are  : 

I.  Form  fours,  ojjcu  order — Trot.        2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  number  one  of  each  set 
continues  to  march  at  the  walk  to  the  front;  twos, 
threes,  and  fours  of  every  set  oblique  to  the  left  at 
the  trot,  each  moving  to  the  front  when  in  rear  of 
the  place  he  will  occupy  in  his  set  of  four;  when 
they  have  pjained  their  places  in  line  with  numbers 
one,  the  leading  set  being  at  the  walk,  the  others 
take  up  the  trot,  which  they  keep  until  each  has 
arrived  at  the  distance  of  four  yards  I'roni  the  one 
preceding  it;  each  in  turn  then  takes  up  the  walk. 
The  Chief  commands  "Guide  right"  when  the 
first  set  is  formed. 

^  10.  To  form  column  of  fours,  open  order,  frotn  co- 
lumn of  twos,  open  order,  when  marching  at  the  walk, 
with  right  in  front,  the  commands  arc  : 


250  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

1.  Form   fours — Trot.  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  threes  and  fours  oblique 
to  the  left  at  the  trot,  until  opposite  their  places  in 
the  sets  of  four,  when  they  move  to  the  front,  taking 
up  the  walk  when  in  line  with  ones  and  twos.  The 
Chief  commands  "Guide  right''  when  the  move- 
ment is  completed.  Ones  and  twos  preserve  the 
walk  and  direction  during  the  movement;  and  after 
the  other  files  have  moved  out,  must  take  care  not 
to  diminish  the  distance  left  by  them.  If  the 
column  is  trotting  when  the  movement  is  ordered, 
it  will  be  executed  at  the  gallop. 

§  11.  To  break  from  column  of  fours  into  column  of 
twos,  open  or  close  order,  marching  at  the  walk,  with 
right  in  front,  the  commands  are: 

1.  By  twos.  2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  numbers  three  and  four 
halt  until  numbers  one  and  two  have  cleared  them, 
when  they  oblique  to  the  right,  promptly,  into  their 
places  in  column  of  twos.  The  Chief  commands 
'•'Guide  right''  as  soon  as  the  movement  is  com- 
pleted. 

§  12.  To  break  a  cokimn  of  twos,  in  open  or  in  close 
order,  into  column  by  file,  when  marching  at  the  walk, 
right  in  front,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  By  file— Trot.  2.  March. 

At  the    second    command    number    one    of  the 
leading   set  takes  the  trot.     As  soon   as   he  has 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  251 

cleared  number  two  of  the  first  set,  number  two 
obliques  to  the  right  at  the  trot,  and  enters  the 
column  behind  number  one.  Number  three  then 
moves  in  his  place  in  column  at  the  trot,  followed 
by  number  four,  who,  by  obliquing  at  the  trot, 
takes  his  place  in  rear  of  number  three;  and  so  on 
throughout  the  column,  each  even-numbered  file 
obliquing  at  the  trot  as  soon  as  the  odd-numbered 
file  on  his  right  has  cleared  him.  The  files  must 
move  very  promptly  and  exactly  in  their  proper 
time,  so  as  not  to  lose  distance  in  this  movement. 
Being  in  column  of  twos,  wheels  to  the  left  may 
be  executed  when  the  right  is  in  front;  or  to  the 
right  with  the  left  in  front,  but  not  the  reverse  of 
these,  for  then  the  twos  would  be  inverted  in  their 
respective  fours,  and  confusion  would  result  on  ac- 
count of  the  change  in  position  of  the  horse-holder. 

§  13.  To  deploy  forward  as  skirmisliers,  froni  a  line, 
right  in  front,  halted,  or  marching  at  any  gait,  the  com- 
mands are  : 

1.  On  (sucJi)  set — Deploy  as  skirmishers — 
Gallop. 

2.  March. 

At  the  second  command  all  take  the  gallop  except 
the  designated  set,  which  trots  out  to  the  front. — 
Those  on  the  right  and  left  of  it  oblique  at  the 
gallop  to  the  right  and  left,  each  set  taking  up  the 
trot  when  on  line  with  the  directing  set,  and  at 
fifteen  yards  from  the  nearest  file  of  the  next  set  on 
the  side  of  direction. 

Tn  this  movement  the  chiefs  of  four  will  be  held 


252  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

responsible  for  the  direction  and  interval  and  align- 
ment of  the  men  of  their  respective  sets,  and  will 
See  that  the  sets  are  at  proper  intervals  from  each 
other.  The  Chief  will  halt  the  line  when  it  has 
reached  the  point  where  it  is  to  act. 

The  following  movements  will  enable  cavalry, 
when  on  a  march,  to  get  into  action  with  the  least 
possible  delay,  in  case  of  an  attack  when  passing  a 
defile  or  of  any  other  ambuscade. 

It  is  understood  that  always,  when  dismounted 
to  fight,  the  horse-holders  remain  mounted,  unless 
otherwise  ordered. 

In  all  the  manceuvres'of  this  article  the  com- 
mands numbered  "  I"  are  cautionary. 

ARTICLE  III. 

§  14.  To  dismount  to  li^'lit  when  in  colinnn  of  fours, 
open  order,  riglit  in  fionr,  lialied  or  maichinfi  at  any 
gait,  to  meet  an  enemy  on  the  left  and  front,  the  com- 
mands are  : 

1.  Dismount  to  Jiglif. 

2.  Action  front  and  hft. 
,      3.    Commence  Jiririg. 

At  the  first  command  ;>11  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  the 
first  set  moves  forward  four  yards,  and  at  the  third 
command  commences  firing.  The  other  sets  move 
at  the  double  quick  obliquely  to  the  left,  and  take 
the'r  places  on  the  line  with  the  first  set.  Each 
set,  as  soon  as  it  arrives  upon  the  line,  commences 
firing. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  253 

In  case  it  is  desired  to  form  the  line  towards  the 
right  of  the  head  of  the  column,  the  commands  are  : 
1.  Dmnount  to  fght  ;  2.  Action  front  avd  right ; 
3.  Commence  fi ring  All  the  sets  except  the  first 
will  then  gain  their  places  in  the  line  by  obliquing  to 
the  right.  The  sets  will  be  in  line  by  inversion. 
The  men  in  each  set  will  be  in  direct  order. 

^  15.  Being  in  column  of  fonis  open  oidci,  right  in 
front,  marcliing  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  attaclc 
on  left  of  rear,  the  coniuiands  are  : 

1.  Dismount  to  fglit. 

2.  Action  re'ar  cind  left. 

3 .  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
3^ard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  the 
men  of  the  rear  set  face  to  the  right,  and,  led  by 
their  chief,  file  to  the  right  around  the  rear  set  of 
horses  to  a   line  five  yards  in  rear  of  their  croups. 

At  the  second  command  all  the  other  sets  face 
to  the  left,  and  move  at  the  double-quick.  Each 
man  as  he  clears  the  column  moves  obliquely  to  the 
left  and  rear  to  his  place  on  the  line  with  the  rear 
set. 

If  it  be  desired  to  get  at  once  into  action,  the 
Chief  commands  '^Commence  firing''  as  soon  as  the 
set  first  on  the  line  is  established.  This  set  then 
commences  the  fire;  and  each  of  the  others  takes 
it  up  in  succession  as  it  arrives  upon  the  line ;  and 
in  all  of  the  following  movements  the  same  rule 
will  be  observed. 
^2 


254  SKIRMISH    DRILL    FOR 

^  16.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  open  order,  right  in 
front,  marching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  attack 
from  the  right  of  the  column,  the  conmrnands  are: 

1.  Dismount  to  fight. 

2.  Action  right. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  all 
move  briskly  upon  a  line  five  yards  outside  the  right 
flank  of  the  column,  where  they  take  their  places, 
in  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right.  The  sets  will  be 
in  order  by  inversion;  but  the  men  in  each  set  will 
be  in  direct  order,  the  chief  being  on  the  right. 
From  this  position  they  may  be  deployed  forward 
as  skirmishers,  if  it  be  desired. 

^  17.  When  in  column  of  four?,  open  order,  right  in 
front,  halted  or  marching",  to  meet  an  attack  from  the 
left,  the  commands  are: 

1.  Dismount  to  fight,. 

2.  Action  left. 

At  the  first  command  all  halt,  spring  to  the 
ground,  link  horses,  unsling  rifleS;  and  step  one 
yard  to  the  front.  At  the  second  command  all 
move  briskly  to  the  left,  and  place  themselves  on  a 
line  five  yards  outside  the  left  flank  of  the  column;, 
facing  to  the  left  of  it,  and  in  their  proper  places 
in  line  of  battle.  From  this  position  they  may  be 
deployed  forward  as  skirmishers,  if  desired. 

^  18.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  with  right  in  front, 
marching  at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  enemy  on 
left  of  front,  the  commands  are: 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  255 

1.  By  twos,  left  tt'7iceZ— March. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

3.  Action  front  and  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  twos  wheel  to  the  left 
and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all  dismount, 
link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  and  step  one  yard  to  the 
front.  At  the  third  conjmand  the  leading  set  moves 
to  a  line  five  yards  to  the  right  of  the  right  flank, 
as  now  formed,  and  facing  in  that  direction.  The 
others  move  obliquely  to  their  right  and  front,  at 
the  double  quick,  and  take  their  places  on  line  with 
the  first. 

If  it  be  desired  to  form  tlie  line  towards  the  right  oi 
Hie  head  of  tlie  column,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  By  twos,  left  wheel — March. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

3.  Action  front  and  right. 

Each  of  the  sets  in  rear  of  the  leading  set  will 
then  gain  its  place  in  the  line  by  passing  through 
the  interval  on  the  right  of  its  set  of  horses,  and 
moving  obliquely  to  the  right  and  front,  to  its  place 
in  line  with  the  leading  set.  The  sets  will  be  in 
line  by  inversion. 

I  19.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front,  march- 
ing at  any  gait,  or  halted,  to  meet  an  enemy  in  rear,  the 
conmiunds  are  : 

1.  By  ticos,  left  wheel — MARCH. 

2.  Dismount  to  fight. 

8.  Action  rear  and  left. 


256  SKIRMISH   I  RILL   FOR 

At  the  first  command  all  wheel  by  twos  into  line 
to  the.  left,  and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all 
dismount,  link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  one  yard 
to  the  f'roDt,  and  await  the  next  command.  At  the 
third  command  the  rear  set  faces  to  the  left,  and 
moves  at  the  double-quick  to  its  place  on  a  line  five 
yards  to  the  left  of  the  left  flank,  as  now  formed, 
and  facing  in  that  direction.  The  other  sets  face 
obliquely  to  the  left,  and  njove  ofl"  at  the  double- 
quick  to  their  places  in  the  line  with  the  rear  set. 

If  it  be  desired  to  form  the  line  to  the  right  in- 
stead of  the  left,  the  first  two  commands  are  the 
same  as  in  the  other  case;  the  third  command^  is, 
'^Action  rear  and  right;''  at  which  the  rear 
set  takes  its  place  on  the  line  as  before,  and 
the  others  pass  through  the  intervals  to  the  left  of 
their  sets  of  horses,  respectively,  and  take  their 
places  in  succession  on  the  left  of  the  set  first  es- 
tablished. The  sets  will  then  be  in  line  by  inver- 
sion . 

§  20.  Being  in  column  of  twos,  marching  at  any  gait, 
or  halted,  with  right  in  front,  to  dismount  to  tight;  in 
order  to  meet  an  enemy  on  the  right  flanlc,  the  com- 
mands arc  : 

1.  Bij  f2i'0S,  left  u-hecl — MarCII. 

2.  Dhmount  to  jig  hi — Action  right. 

At  the  first  command  the  twos  wheel  into  line  to 
the  left  and  halt.  At  the  second  command  all  dis- 
mount and  link.  In  linking,  tlie  men  remain  faced 
to  the  front,  and  take  the  link  in  the  left  hand,  and 
the  bit  in  the  right.     After  linking  they  face  about, 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  257 

unsling  rifles,  and  take  their  places  in  a  line  five 
yards  outside  the  croups  of  tlic  horses.  The  cau- 
tionary words  "ACTION  right"  should  be  uttered 
immediately  after  "dismount  to  fight." 

The  method  of  linking  is  changed  in  this  in- 
stance to  avoid  the  inconvenience  which  might  re- 
sult from  the  men  having  to  stoop  under  the  links, 
alter  linking,  in  order  to  pass  to  their  position  in 
rear  of  the  horses. 

§  21.  Bcini!;  in  cohiiwn  of  twos,  right  in  front,  march- 
ing at  any  gait,  or  hahed,  to  disraonnt  to  fight,  to  meet 
an  enemy  on  the  left,  the.  comnmiids  are  : 

1.  Bij  twos,  left  wheal — March. 

2.  JDisinoufit  to  Jight. 

At  the  first  command  wheel  by  twos  into  line  to 
the  left  and  halt;  at  the  second  command  all  dis- 
mount, link  horses,  unsling  rifles,  step  five  yards  to 
the  front  and  stand  fast. 

In  case  it  should  be  desired  in  an}^  of  the  prece- 
ding manoeuvres  to  form  the  line  in  an  oblique  di- 
rection, the  commands  would  be  the  same;  but  the 
set  first  in  the  line  would  be  placed  in  the  desired 
direction,  and  the  others  would  conform  to  it.  The 
Chief  will  judge  from  the  circumstances  which  of 
the  manoeuvres  to  adopt — whether  the  flank,  the 
front,  or  the  rear. 

In  all  the  cases  of  tliis  article  the  command 
'^Commence  firing"  will  be  the  signal  for  the  set 
first  on  the  line  to  open  fire.  The  other  sets,  if  not 
on  the  line  when  it  is  given,  will  commence  firing 
as  soon  as  practicable  after  they  arrive  on  the  line. 


258  SKIRMISH   DRILL   FOR 

ARTICLE  TV. 

§  22.  To  deploy  as  skirmishers,  when  dismounted, 
the  command  is : 

1.    On  (such)  set — Deploy — Forward. 

At  this  command  the  section  springs  forward  at 
the  double-quick.  The  sets  on  the  right  of  the  di- 
recting set  move  obliquely  towards  the  right  until 
opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  w4ien  they 
move  to  the  front,  aligning  by  the  left. 

The  sets  on  the  left  of  the  directing  set  move 
obliquely  towards  the  left  until  opposite  their  places 
in  line  of  battle,  when  they  move  to  the  front, 
aligning  by  the  right.  All  move  forward  until 
halted  by  the  Chief. 

When  in  proper  position  in  line  of  battle,  thus 
deployed,  there  will  be  fifteen  yards  between  sets 
and  three  feet  between  files  in  each  set. 

The  firing  will  commence  at  the  command  of  the 
Chief. 

If  it  be  desired  to  deploy  on  the  line  already  oc- 
cupied, the  command  will  be  "On  (such')  set — 
Deploy.^' 

The  directing  set  stands  fast;  the  sets  to  the  right 
and  left  of  it  face  to  the  right  and  left,  respectively, 
and  move  at  the  double-quick  to  >take  their  inter- 
vals ;  then  face  to  the  front,  and  align  themselves 
on  the  directing  set. 

§  23.  To  deploy  as  skirmi-shers^  mounted,  from  a  col- 
nmn  of  fours,  right  in  front,  the  commands  are  : 

1.   On  (such)  set — Deploy — Gallop.       2.  March. 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  259 

At  the  second  command  the  directing  set  trots 
out  to  the  front;  those  in  front  of  it  obHque  to  the 
right  at  the  gallop  ;  those  in  rear  to  the  left  at  the 
gallop ;  and  all  take  trot  when  they  have  gained 
their  intervals  of  fifteen  yards,  aligning  themselves 
by  the  directing  set.  The  chief  will  halt  the  line 
when  it  has  arrived  where  it  is  to  act. 

To  assemble  the  skirmishers  into  line  or  column 
again,  the  Chief  will  place  himself  at,  or  otherwise 
indicate,  the  point  at  which  the  directing  set  is  to 
rest,  and  have  the  rally  sounded.  At  this  signal 
the  sets  will  close  in  at  the  gallop  upon  the  indica- 
ted point  and  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

When  the  line  is  formed,  it  will  be  broken  into 
column,  in  order  to  advance  or  retire  as  may  be 
necessary. 

^  24.  Havin;^^  been  thus  deployed  into  line  for  skir- 
mishing, to  commence  action,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  Dismount  to  fight.  3.  Halt. 

2.  Forward.  4.    Commence  firing. 

Atthe  first  command,  all,  except  the  horseholders, 
dismount,  link  horses,  unsling;  rifles,  step  one  pace 
to  the  front,  and  await  the  next  order.  At  the  sec- 
ond command  the  line  moves  forward  at  the  double- 
quick  until  halted.  At  the  fourth  command  the 
rio-ht  file  of  each  set  delivers  his  fire,  and  he  is  fol- 
lowed  in  succession  by  the  other  two. 

The  chief  of  four  will  take  care  that  there  is  al- 
ways one  gun  loaded  in  his  set ;  this  will  never  be 
neglected,  whether  in  advancing  or  retreating. 
The  files  of  each  set  must  depend  upon  each  other 


260  SKIRMISH   DRILL    FOR 

for  support  and  assistance ;  they  must  never  sepa- 
rate; every  kind  of  cover  must  be  seized  and  occu- 
pied by  the  skirmishers;  each  chief  of  four  must 
be  alert  to  perceive  such  advantages  for  his  set, 
taking  care,  however,  tliat  in  attempting  to  secure 
them  he  does  not  separate  too  far  from  the  other 
sets  of  the  line  to  receive  or  give  support  when 
necessary. 

The  horses  will  be  habitually  kept  at  about  one 
hundred  yards  in  rear  of  their  riders,  though  they 
shculd  be  nearer,  when  they  can  find  shelter  from 
fire  which  will  admit  of  it.  Fifty  yards  will  be  far 
enough  when  the  enemy  does  not  use  fire-arms. 

They  will  be  under  charge  of  a  non-comnnssioned 
officer ;  and  when  it  is  desired  to  remount  rapidly, 
should  be  advanced  to  meet  their  riders.  The  re- 
serve will  be  kept  mounted  and  where  it  can  best 
protect  the  horses  of  the  dismounted  men  and  get 
into  action  best. 

The  deployed  line  will  be  manoeuvred  by  the 
commands,  signals,  and  means  provided  in  the  Cav- 
alry Tactics. 

If  it  be  desired  to  fight  mounted,  the  Chief  will 
command  the  charge.  The  men  will  then  draw 
sabre  or  pistol  and  charge. 

^^  25.  The  section  beinji  in  column  of  fours,  open  or- 
der, right  in  front,  and  at  the  walk,  to  take  close  order, 
the  commands  are: 

I.   Close  ordcT — Trot.  2.  March. 

At  this  command  number  one  of  the  leading 
set  marches  to  the  front  at  the  walk.     The  other 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  261 

men  of  his  set  closing  upon  him  at  the  trot  until 
each  has  <2:ained  his  place  in  the  set  of  four  in  close 
order.  The  set  then  walks.  The  other  sets  close 
at  the  trot  in  the  same  manner,  each  walking 
when  it  has  closed  to  eighteen  inches  from  that  in 
its  front. 

^  20.  The  section  being  in  column  of  two?,  rijrlit  in 
iVont,  open  order,  to  take  clo:?e  order,  the  eonmiand:^  are: 

1.    Chse  order.  2.   March. 

At  this  command,  numbers  two  and  four  incline 
to  the  right,  slightly  quickening  the  gait  and  place 
themselves  boot  to  boot  with  numbers  one  and 
thrce.^ 

§  27.  To  form  cohnnn  oT  fonrs.  in  elose  order,  wlien 
inarching  in  column  of  file  at  tlie  wallc,  with  right  in 
front,  the  commands  are;. 

1.  Form  fours.  2.    Trot — xsIarcii. 

At  the  second  command,  nuiuber  one  of  the 
leading  set  continues  to  march  to  th'"  front  at  the 
walk.  All  the  others  oblique  to  the  left  at  the  trot; 
each  "man  marching  to  the  front  when  in  rear  of 
his  place  in  his  set  of  fours  in  close  order,  and 
aligning  by  number  one  of  his  set.  All  of  the  sets 
(except  the  leading  set)  continue  the  trot  until 
they  have  closed  up  to  within  eighteen  inches  of 
each  other,  and  then  take  the  walk. 


262  SKIRMISH    DRILL   FOR 

ARTICLE  V. 

§  28.  To  sling  rifles,  from  cany  arms,  the  command  is 

1.    Sling  rifles. 

At  this  command,  raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  a  little  higher  than  the  hip,  inclining  the 
barrel  over  the  right  shoulder,  and  in  rear  of  the 
head  j  at  the  same  time,  with  the  left  hand  near 
the  right  shoulder,  move  the  sling  out  from  the 
barrel,  thrust  the  head,  right  shoulder  and  right 
arm  through  the  opening;  let  the  piece  fall  into 
its  position,  steadying  it  with  the  right  hand,  and 
drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 

To  imsling  rifles,  the  command  is: 

1.    UnsUng  rifles. 

At  this  command,  pass  the  right  hand  through 
the  opening  between  the  sling  and  piece  near  the 
right  hip,  bear  the  piece  towards  the  front  with  the 
right  arm,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  as  in  carry 
arms,  and  raise  it  a  little  above  the  right  hip;  at 
the  same  time,  with  the  left  hand,  free  the  sling 
from  the  head,  and  lower  the  piece  to  the  position 
of  carrv  arms. 

§  29.  All  of  the  movements  described  herein  are 
supposed  to  be  executed  when  the  right  is  in  front. 
It  will  be  understood  'that  they  can  all  be  executed 
when  the  left  is  in  front  upon  the  same  principles 
bv  inverse  means. 


MOUNTED    RIFLES.  263 

The  men  should  always,  after  dismounting,  leave 
their  reins  over  the  pommel  of  the  saddle. 

When  more  than  two  full  companies  are  serving 
together,  and  their  front  in  single  rank  would  be 
unduly  extended,  all  lines  should  be  formed  of 
companies  in  column  of  platoons  at  wheeling  dis- 
tance. 

As  far  as  possible,  the  composition  of  the  differ- 
ent sets  will  remain  unchanged,  and  every  thing 
should  be  done  which  \vill  promote  the  mutual  de- 
pendence of  the  men  of  each  set  on  each  other. 

They  should  act  together  as  much  as  possible  on 
all  kinds  of  duty,  as  well  in  the  fatigue  duties  of 
the  camp  or  garrison  as  when  on  drill  or  in  action. 

All  details  should  be  made  as  much  as  practica- 
ble, of  sets  of  four,  rather  than  of  individuals  from 
different  sets;  and  the  chief  of  four  should  be 
always  in  command  of  his  set,  and  invested  with 
the  authority  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  over  it. 
He  must  see  that  his  men  stand  by  each  other  in 
action,  and  whether  in  the  charge,  in  pursuit,  or  in 
retreat,  that  they  never  separate.  After  the  men 
and  horses  are  familiar  with  the  drill,  all  of  its 
movements  should  be  executed  at  the  gallop. 

The  men  should  be  made  to  saddle  up  with  the 
greatest  possible  despatch  whenever  the  "■  boot  and 
saddle"  sounds. 

Always  before  using  their  guns,  the  men  must 
dismount. 

In  order  to  avoid  fretting  the  horses,  the  men 
should  be  at  least  five  yards  from  them  before  they 
commence  firing. 

When  the  men  are  in  action  on  foot,  they  should 


264  SKIRMISH   DRILL    FOR 

be  manoeuvred  with  due  reference  to  the  safety  of 
their  horses. 

While  the  horses  should  be  so  far  in  rear  of  the 
men  as  to  be  out  of  the  range  of  the  (aiemy's  fire, 
they  should  not  be  so  far  that  their  riders  cannot 
reach  them  before  the  enemy,  if  an  attempt  should 
be  made  to  capture  or  stampede  them.  Generally, 
in  open  ground,  one  hundred  yards  will  be  about 
the  maximum  distance.  They  should  be  nearer,  if 
they  can  be  safe  from  j&re. 

One  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  of  each 
section  should  be  left  in  charge  of  its  horses  when 
the  men  dismount  to  fight^  and  he  will  be  held 
responsible  for  their  security  and  proper  manage- 
ment. The  other  will  dismount  with  his  section, 
linkino;  his  horse  to  that  of  the  nearest  number  one. 

J 11  this  drill,  inversions  of  platoons,  of  sections, 
and  of  sets  of  four  should  be  frequently  practiced, 
but  the  individual  men  of  the  sets  should  never, 
either  when  mounted  or  on  foot,  be  inverted  in 
their  sets. 

When  the  company  is  about  to  be  formed,  two 
or  three  men  will  be  detailed  to  accompany  the 
chief  during  the  drill  or  skirmish. 

Whenever  the  men  are  dismounted,  at  the  com- 
mand '^  mount"  they  will  run  to  their  horses  with- 
out unnecessary  noise,  unlink  and  mount. 

When  the  "rally"  is  sounded,  the  skirmishers 
will  close  upon  the  indicated  point  at  the  gallop, 
and  by  the  quickest  means. 

When  charging  in  line  with  pistols  or  sabres, 
the  officers  must  ride  in  the  rank;  the  captain  on 
the  right  of  the  first  platoon^  the  first   lieutenant 


MOUNTED   RIFLES.  265 

on  the  left  of  it^  tlie  second  lieutenant  on  the  right 
of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  brevet  second  lieu- 
tenant on  its  left.  In  case  of  the  absence  of  any 
one  of  them,  his  place  must  not  be  supplied  by  the 
next  in  rank,  except  on  the  flank  of  the  company. 
All  the  commands  should  be  habitually  given 
with  the  trumpet;  and,  on  drill,  the  trumpeters 
should  always  accompany  the  chief.  It  is  very 
important  that,  in  this  drill,  the  men  should  learn, 
perfectly  what  the  signals  mean. 


23 


A  GLOSSARY  OF  TERMS 

USED    IN 

CAVALRY  TACTICS. 


About. — About-face  is  a  change  of  front  on  the  heels  a> 
pivots  over  an  arc  of  180°,  that  is  tosayover  a  semi- 
circle ;  about-wheel  is  a  circular  movement  of  the 
line  on  one  flank  as  pivot,  so  that  the  new  front  is  the 
former  rear. 

Alignment. — The  act  of  straightening  or  forming  troops 
or  individuals  on  right  lines,  marked  by  fixed  points 
or  guides.     It  also  signifies  the  line  itself. 

Assembly. — A  trumpet  call.  The  collecting  and  uniting 
together  in  order  the  units  on  parts  of  military  corps. 

Army. — An  armed  body  of  men.  It  is  usually  applied 
to  large  collections  of  troops  comprising  several  arms 
of  service. 

Artillery. — All  the  offensive  weapons  of  war;  techni- 
cally, cannon  and  such  weapons  as  are  too  heavy  for 
the  use  of  single  men.  As  a  distinct  arm  of  service^ 
it  embraces  only  those  corps  whose  appropriate  arms 
are  of  the  last  named  description.  Light  artillery 
drawn  by  horses  should  be  organized  in  squadrons. 

Breech. — The  extremity  of  a  gun  nearest  the  vent  or 
cone. 

Breech-loader. — All  fire-arms  not  loaded  by  the  muzzle. 
These,  including  revolvers  and  repeating  arms,  are 
the  only  suitable  guns  for  horsemen. 


268  GLOSSARY. 

Brigade. — Tlie  command  of  a  Brigadier-General ;  com- 
posed of  2  or  more  regiments;  2  or  more  brigades 
form  a  division. 

Cavalry. — Soldiers  who  serve  chiefly  on  horseback  ;  for- 
merly they  were  confined  To  the  mounted  service; 
and  those  who  were  armed  with  muskets,  serving 
ot'ten  on  foot,  were  called  dragoons.  In  our  service 
the  diflerence  is  merely  nominal. 

Carbine, — A  r-hort  musket  much  used  by  cavalry.  The 
only  varieties  of  carbine  now  approved  by  expe- 
rienced comjuanders  are  such  as  load  at  the  breach, 
and  revolvers. 

Charge. — A  rapid  movement  either  at  the  gallop  or  trot- 
out,  by  wliich  actual  contact  with  the  enemy  is  ob- 
tained. 

Column. — Parallel  lines  of  troops,  generally  at  equal  dis- 
tances. In  signification,  it  is  opposite  to  line ;  also, 
in  cavalry,  it  means  single  men  and  horses  arranged 
one  behind  anoiher.  or  a  similar  arrangement  of 
twos,  fours,  sections,  platoons,  &c. 

Column  of  route. — Is  usnally  a  column  of  files  twos  or 
fours,  but  should  be  ibrmed  of  platoons,  when  obsta- 
cles do  not  prevent. 

Column  with  distance. — Column  of  platoons  with  wheel- 
ing distance,  tluit  is,  distance  between  ihem  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  platoon. 

Close  column. — Column  of  squadrons  with  12  yards  dis- 
tance. 

Countermarch  is  usually  understood  as  a  movement 
which  clianges  the  direction  to  one  opposite;  its 
tactical  nieaniiig  is,  aflank  movement  by  files  which 
changes  xha  fro7it  to  the  former  rear. 

Commands  are  of  three  kinds:  1st.  That  of  caution, 
which  is  "  attention^''''  the  last  syllable  being  strongly 
emphasized;  2d.  The  preparatory  command,  which 
indicates  the  desired  movement;  3d.  That  of  execu- 
tion, such   as    '■•March,''''   or    "  ifcjZi,"  on    receiving 


GLOSSARY.  269 

which,  the  execution  of  the  commands  follows  in- 
stantly. In  the  manual  at  arms  and  in  the  foot  drill 
the  commands  especially  of  execution  should  be  dis- 
tinct, bub  very  short;  but  all  others  should  be  pro- 
longed considerably.  The  commands  are  numbered 
1,  2,  3,  &c.,  which  numbers  are  not  expressed  in  giv- 
ing the  commands. 

Company. — A  number  of  soldiers  usually  varying  from 
50  to  100.  This  is  the  regimental  unit  for  infantry, 
but  not  for  cavalry;  the  latter  shovild  therefore  be 
required  by  law  to  organize  in  squadrons. 

Croup. — The  buttocks  of  a  horse. 

Cuirassier. — A  horseman  wearing  defensive  armour. 

Distance  is  measured  perpendicular  to  the  proper  front, 
or  from  front  to  rear;  thus  the  distance  between  the 
front  and  rear  rank  in  close  order  is  2  feet;  that  be- 
tween squadrons  in  close  order  is  12  yards. 

Depth  is  the  extent  from  the  head  to  the  rear  of  a  column. 

Deployment. -The  movement  from  close  column  into  line. 

Defile. — A  narrow  pass  between  obstacles  compelling  a 
reduction  of  the  front  of  column  or  line. 

Division,  in  the  squadron,  is  composed  of  2  platoons  ;  a 
half-squadron  ;  in  an  army  a  division  is  two  or  more 
brigades. 

DcRECT-MARCH  is  a  forward  movement  perpeixlicular  to 
the  alignment. 

Diagonal-march  is  one  which  commences  with  a  wheel 
of  an  eighth  of  a  circle,  to  gain  a  certain  point  to 
the  right  or  left. 

Evolutions  of  a  regiment  are  the  movements  by  which 
a  regiment  passes  from  one  formation  to  another; 
evolutions  of  the  line  are  the  corresponding  move- 
ments of  two  or  more  regiments. 

Execution. — The  carrying  into  eflect  any  order.  This 
must  be  done  with  promptness  on  the  rece])tion  of  a 
command. 

23* 


270  GLOSSARY. 

File. — The  import  of  this  term  depends  on  the  number 
of  ranks;  in  infantry  formations  in  3  ranks  a  file 
wouhl  be  3  men  *,  in  cavalry  formations  in  2  ranks  a 
file  consistsof  2  men,  mounted  or  dismounted  ;  when 
there  is  but  one  rank  a  file  is  only  1  man  ;  in  gen- 
eral a  file  is  1  man  for  every  rank  in  the  formation  : 
?ifih  of  men\n  commonparlanceis  2  private  soldier:>. 
In  file,  the  men  stand  one  behind  the  other. 

File-leader  is  the  front  man  of  the  file. 

File-closers  are  the  non-commissioned  officers,  posted 
1  yard  behind  the  rear  rank;  but  sometimes  com- 
missioned officers  thus  posted  aci  as  file-closevs. 

Front  is  the  direction  perpendicular  and  before  the  line 
or  column  ;  the  reverse  of  rear. 

Flank. — The  right  or  left  side  of  a  column  or  line. 

Flank-march. — A  movement  to  the  right  or  left,  com- 
mencing by  a  wheel  over  a  quarter  circle. 

Formation. — The  mode  or  order  of  arranging  troops  : 
also  the  act  of  placing  the  fractions  of  corps  inline 
or  column. 

Forage. — Food  for  animals  ;  as  a  verb^  to  range  over  the 
country  in  quest  of  provisions  for  man  and   beast. 

Foragers. — Soldiers  detailed  to  impress  or  otherwise 
collect  Ibod,  or  anything  else  for  public  service. 

Forager's  l!HARGB. — A  charge  in  open  an'l  extended 
order,  each  trooper  acting  separately  and  according 
to  circumstances. 

FiE'.D-oi'TiCERS. — Those  above  the  rank  of  cajotain  and 
not  being  of  the  staff";  but  field  officers  by  rank 
often  serve  on  the  staff". 

Guide. — The  trooper,  either  sergeant,  cor])oral  or  private, 
by  whose  march  that  of  the  others  on  his  right  or 
left  is  regulated. 

Guide  of  the  column  is  the  man  on  one  of  the  ffanks  of 
the  fioiit  rankoi'  a  column,  who  is  charged  with  the 
direction  of  the  march. 


GLOSSARY,  271 

Guide  op  the  march  in  line. — The  sergeant,  file-closer 
of  one  of  the  wings,  wlio  in  the  march  in  line,  re- 
places the  particular  guide,  when  the  latter  places 
him.«elC  in  the. line  of  officers,  to  ensure  the  direction 
of  the  march  by  serving  as  an  intermediate  point. 

General  Guides  are  the  two  sergeants  who,  in  the  form- 
ation of  a  regiment,  mark  the  point  where  the  right 
and  left  flanks  are  to  rest;  they  are  selected  in  the 
first  and  last  squadrons,  and  are  ttnder  the  orders  of 
the  Adjutant  and  Sergeant-Major,  for  the  tracing  of 
lines 

Guides  Principal. — The  principal  guides  are  the  ser- 
geants who  serve  to  mark  the  intermediate  points  of 
formation  in  line.  The  sergeants  file-closers  of  the 
1st  and  4tli  platoons  are  the  principal  guides  of  their 
squadrons. 

Guides  particular  are  the  sergeants  who  place  them- 
selves on  the  line  of  formation  to  mark  the  front  of 
their  squadrons  as  they  arrive.  The  two  sergeants 
of  the  flanks,  who  are  not  counted  in  the  rank,  are 
the  particular  guides  of  their  squadrons.  In  inarch- 
ing, the  position  of  the  guide  who  regulates  the 
movement  of  the  line  or  column  is  indicated  by  the 
commands  guide  left  or  guide  right ;  as  a  general  rule 
the  guide  is  left  when  the  column  \s7'ight\n  front,  and 
vice-versa,  unless  especially  ordered  otherwise  ;  in 
the  oblique  march  the  guide  is  on  the  side  toward 
which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  when  the  primitive 
direction  is  resumed,  the  guide  is  where  he  was  be- 
fore obliquing. 

In  columns  composed  of  cavalry  and  infantry,  the  cav- 
alry guides  cover  the  2d  file  of  the  subdivisions  of 
infantry,  on  the  side  of  the  guides. 

In   line,  officers  in   front  of  squadrons  align  themselves 

on  the  rear  rank  of  infantry. 
Gallop. — The  speed  at  the  slowest  gallop  is  300  yards 

per  minute. 
Guidon. — A  small  pennon  or   flag  carried  on  the   left  of 

the  1st  and  3d  platoons. 


272  GLOSSARY. 

Gather  horse. — This  is  the  sign  by  which  the  trooper 
prepares  his  horse  for  any  movement.  It  is  made 
by  raising  the  bridle  hand  and  drawing  it  slightly 
towards  the  body,  at  the  same  time  closing  the  legs 
a  little,  behind  the  girths. 

Hau:!vCHES. — The  hinder  portions  of  the  horse  in  advance 
of  the  buttocks  an<l  after  the  last  ribs. 

Interval. — The  lateral  space  between  squadrons,  or 
troops,  or  fractions  of  troops. 

Inverse. — Opposite  to  w^hat  is  customary  and   natural. 

Inverse  order. — An  arrangement  reversing  the  ordi- 
nary and  natural  relative  positions;  when  the  sub- 
divisions of  a  corps  are  in  inverse  order,  their  right 
is  where  their  left  would  naturally  be. 

Inversion. — The  change  from  the  nartural  to  the  inverse 
order. 

Infantry. — Foot  soldiers;  but  infantry  is  sometimes 
mounted  temporarily  for  rapid  movements. 

Light  HORSE. — Cavalry  lightly  armed  and  equipped ;  now 
synonymous  with  light  cavalry  or  light  dragoons. 

Line,  or  Line  of  Battle. — That  order  or  disposition  of 
troops,  in  which  all  the  companies,  squadrons,  &c., 
stand  in  the  same  row  or  line,  in  1,  2,  or  3  ranks; 
the  line  being  either  curved  or  straight. 

Lance. — A  weapon  with  a  wooden  shaft  and  metalic 
head  and  point ;  much  used  among  the  semi-civili- 
zed races  ;  also  used,  to  some  extent,  by  European 
cavalry,  but  little  used  by  ours.  The  length  varies 
from  8  to  11  feet,  10.}  being  the  most  approved 
length  from  butt  to  point. 

Manceuvres. — Tactical    changes  of  position  by   troops. 

Movement  is  nearly  allied  to  marKmivre ;  equally  so  to 
viarch.  each  term  implying  change  of  position;  but 
a  manoeuvre  is  generally  considered  to  embrace 
several  movements  or  marches. 

March. — The  word  of  execution  at  which  the  required 
movement  is  instantly  commenced;    also  thesimul- 


GLOSSARY.  273 

taneou.-^  or  successive  movement  of  troops  from  one 
point  X''  anf)tlier.  A  r/wj/'s  warr/?,  without  unusual 
impediments,  is  from  15  to  17  rpiles;;  Innger-day's- 
journeys  me  called  forced  marches;  \\icse  are  used 
only  when  required  by  circumstances;  light,  troops 
often  marcli  on  uiiieut  occasions  from  'JO  to  40  miles 
in  one  day.  and  small  bodies  of  ravalry  have,  in  re- 
treat f)r  pursuit,  accomplished  90  miles  in  less  than 
24  hours. 
Such  marches  are,  of  course,  destructive  to  man  and 
beast  and  must  not  be  allowed,  except  when  vitally 
essential  to  the  success  of  important  enterprises. 

Oblique. — A  direction  between  front  and  flank. 

Oblique  mauch. — A  march  gaining  ground   ta  the  flank 
without  changiiiir  front. 
In  the  iiidividiial  oblique  march,  each  man  executes  an 
oblique  movement;   making   a  quarter-turn  to    the 
right  or  left  as  ordered. 

Oblique  march  by  troop  is  exeeutedby  the  movement,  at 
the  same  tiiiu'  of  each  of  the  sub-divisions  of  a  troop 
in  line.  In  general  the  different  changes  of  front 
of  squa-iion  require  oblique  movement  by  the  half- 
wheeling  of  sub-divisions. 

Obstacle. — Whatever  obstructs  the  march,  requiring  a 
temporary  reduction  of  the  extent  of  front. 

Organization. — Arrangement  and  distribution  of  the  di- 
visions, snb-divisions,  and  corpsof  every  sort,  under 
suital)le  chiefs,  into  efl'ective  botlies. 

Pace. — In  cavalry,  one  yard ;  the  pace  or  step,  when  not 
mounted,  is  28  inches. 

Picket. — A  short  stake  to  which  the  trooper  attaches  the 

rein  or  rope  which  is  to  confine  liis  horsf  !n  the  camp 

or  bivouac.     It  should  be  at  lea^t   18   inches  long, 

and  of  tough,  elastic  material.     The  animal  is  best 

.   confined  by  a  strap  around  the  pastern. 

Pivot. — The  man  or  flank  which  in  a  wheel  turns 
without  gaining  or  losing    ground,  and   in  a  TURN 


274  GLOSSARY. 

marches  over  a  short  curved  path  or  arc  of  circle  ; 

in  2  ranks  the  front  rank  man  is  pivot. 
In  wheeling, the  pivot  is  said  to  he  fixed,  because  it  turns 

on  its  own  centre  w^ithout  advancing  or  receding. 
In  turning,  the  pivot  is  said  to  be  moveable,  because 

it  marches  on  an  arc  of  circle. 
The  TURN  is  sometimes  called  a  wheel  on  a  moveable 

pivot. 
Where  there  are  more  than  one  single  file,  the  arc  is 

increased   in    proportion    to    the    number    of  files 

abreast.     Single  files  turn  on  an  arc  3  yards   long. 

But  the  pivot  man  of  any  rmmber  in  line,  from  2   to 

15  inclusive,  turn  on  an  arc  of  5  yards. 

The  curved  path  or  arc,  moved  over  by  a  pivot — 

Of  tw^os,  fours,  sections   of  8   files,  and  platoons  of 

12,  is   5  yards. 
Of  Divisions  of  24  files,  is  10  yards. 
Of  Squadrons  of  48  files,  is  20  yards. 
Of  Platoons  of  16  files,  is  6  yards. 
Of  Divisions  of  32  files,  is  12  yards. 
Of  Squadrons  of  64  files,  is  24  yards. 

The  above  is  the  length  of  the  pivot-arcs  in  the 
wheel,  or  rather  turoi  over  a  quarter  of  a  circle  ;  the 
arc  will  be  shortened  or  lengthened  as  the  turn  is 
less  or  more  than  90  degrees 

Pivot-flank  is  that  flank  around  which  is  executed  the 
wheel  into  line  in  natural  order. 

Platoon. — The  fourth  of  a  squadron,  or  the  half  of  a 
division  ;  it  is  composed  of  12  files  in  the  squadron 
of  48;  of  16  files  in  the  squadron  of  64  ;  when  it 
has  16  files,  it  is  sub-divided  into  sections  of  8  files. 

Ployment. — The  movement  from  regiments  in  line,  to 
close  column ;  it  is  the  reverse  of  deployment,  the 
latter  being  the   movement  from  column  into  line. 

Points. — Points  of  direction,  or  y?zec?/?oi«?s,  serve  to  point 
out  the  direction  in  M'^hich  a  troop  in  line  or  column 
is  to  march  ;  also  to  mark  the  right  and  left  of  lines. 


GLOSSARY.  27 

Intermediate  points  nxe  those  taken  between  the  fixed 
points,  to  preserve  the  exactness  of  direction  and 
straightness  of  the  lines. 

QuARTE  (pronounced  Carte.) — The  position  of  the  right 
hand,  holding  the  sabre  with  the  fingers  to  the  left, 
nails  upward;  opposite  to  tierce. 

Rank. — Relative  grade  or  degree  among  military  men  ; 
a  rank  of  soldiers  is  a  row  of  them  side  by  side,  or 
abreast.  Cavalry  is  organized  in  1  or  in  2  ranks; 
the  single  or  1  rank  system  is  believed  by  experi- 
enced officers  to  suit  our  service  best. 

Rank  and  File. — -The  order  of  the  common  soldier;  in 
common  phrases  it  is  applied  to  all  who  are  not 
commissioned  officers.  In  this  book  it  is  limited  to 
its  strict  signification,  viz  :  those  who  compose  the  ranks 
and  the  files,  therefore  excluding  all  who  are  not 
counted  into  fours. 

Regiment. — The  command  of  a  colonel ;  3  to  5  squadrons 
are  understood  as  forming  a  regiment ;  these  latter 
numbers  are  the  most  approved  for  cavalry  manoeu- 
vres and  3  are  preferable  to  5. 

Reverse  flank. — The  flank  opposite  to  the  pivot  and 
usually  opposite  to  the  guide. 

Rifle. — The  short  breech-loading  rifle  is  the  best  arm 
for  our  mounted  service ;  in  battle  the  troopers 
should  be  dismounted  when  circumstances  permit, 
using  the  rifle  on  foot  and  mounting  again  when 
necessary  to  piirsue  or  retreat. 

Sabre. — The  cavalry  sabre  should  be  very  slightly 
curved,  as  light  as  consistent  with  strength  and  the 
point  more  relied  on  than  the  edge. 

Schabraque  (  pronounced  Shah-rack, )  is  the  saddle 
cover  ;  it  should  be  water-proof. 

Squad  is  usually  from  4  to  12  men  united  in  1  rank  for 
drill. 

Squadron. — 48  or  64  files  of  mounted  soldiers,  divided 
into  4  platoons,  2  platoons  making  1  division. 


276  GLOSSARY. 

Skirmishers. — Lifrht  troops  thrown  forward  in  advance 
of  the  main  body  to  observe  the  movements  of  the 
enemy,  check  his  advance,  and  prevent  smprise. 

Strategy. — The  movements  and  operations  of  armed 
bodies  when  not  within  reach  of  projectiles. 

Staff. — Officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  not  im- 
mediately connected  with  the  line  ;  those  of  the 
quartermaster's  department;  inspectors,  paymas- 
ters, adjutants,  &c.,  are  of  this  class  ;  there  is  a 
medical  staff  also,  a  general  staff,  brigade  staff, 
and  a  regimental  staff. 

Tactics. — Tiie  movements  of  armed  bodies  when  in 
reach  of  projectiles  or  weapons. 

Tampion. — A  cylindrical  piece  of  wood  or  other  mate- 
rial to  close  up  the  muzzle  of  a  gun. 

Tierce. — Opposite  to  quarte.  the  position  of  the  sword- 
hand  wlien  the  finger-nails  are  downward  or  to  the 
right. 

Troop. — Any  number  of  armed  horsemen;  it  is  usually 
applied  to  a  company  or  division  of  2  platoons. 

Troopbr. — An  armed  horsema^n. 

Trot. — The  cavalry  movement^  intermediate  between 
the  walk  and  the  gallop;  the  common  trot  is  about 
240  yards  per  minute,  the  trot  out  is  from  275  to 
300  yards  per  minute. 

Turn. — A  sort  of  wheel  in  which  the  pivot  is  moveable, 
or  gains  ground. 

Unit. — A  sub-division  of,  part  of  armed  bodies,  most  re- 
garded in  the  organization  of  those  bodies  ;  thus 
the  squadron  is  the  proper  imit  of  a  regiment. 

Vault. — To  mount  without  stirrups,  by  leaping  or 
springing  from  the  ground. 

Wheel. — A  movement  to  the  right  or  left  in  which  one 
flank  turns  in  its  own  place  ;  see  pivot  and  turn. 
The  definitions  of  wheel  and  turn  are  peculiar  to 
mounted  troops.  The  latter  touch  hoot  exclusively 
to  the  pivot,  dress  by  both  flanks,  but  especially  by 
the  wheeling  or  marching  flank. 


INDEX. 


PART   I.— DRILL  OF  THE  TROOPER. 


First  lessons, 

To  conduct  the  horses  to  the  ground, 

Position  before  mounting, 

Prepare  to  mount, 

To  mount,  ... 

Bridle  hand, 

Length  of  stirrup,. 

Position  of  foot  in  stirrup, 

Form  ranks, 

Position  mouiited,     - 

Use  of  reins,        .  -  - 

Use  of  legs,  -  -  . 

Effect  of  reins, 

To  march,     -  -  -  - 

To  halt. 

To  turn,         .  .  -  . 

To  turn  about,      .  -  - 

Quarter  turn ;  oblique. 

Rein  back, 

Dismount,     ...  - 

File  off,  ... 

Forward,  trot,  ... 

Trot  out,  ... 

Slow  trot,  gallop. 

Right  or  left  pass, 

Movements  of  bridle  hand, 

Halt;  turn;  turn-about, 

24 


Pag«. 

11 

■  12 
12 

.  13 
14 
14 
15 

■  15 
16 
16 
IS 

■  19 
19 

.  20 
21 

•  21 
22 

■  23 
24 

•  25 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
31 
32 


278  INDEX. 

Page. 

Quarter  turn  ;  rein  back  ;  the  spur,              -  -       33 

Preparation  for  sabre  exercise,                -             -  34 

Draw  sabre,                -             -             -             -  -35 

Present;  carry;  return  sabre,                 -             -  36 

Inspection  of  sabre,               -             -             -  -       37 

Raise  sabre,         -             ....  38 

Open  and  close  files,             -             -             -  -       39 

Cuts,  thrusts,  moulinet,                -             -             -  40 

Tierce,  quarte,  guard,           -             -             -  -       41 

Moulinet,             .....  42 

Tierce  point ;  quarte  point,              -             -  -       43 

Left  point;  right  point,                -             -             -  44 
Rear  point ;  against  infantry,  right  and  left  point,         45 

Front  cut;  right  cut;  left  cut,                  .             -  46 
Rear  cut ;  right,  left  and  rear  in  quarte  and  tierce,       47 

Parry,       --....  48 

Against  infantry — parry,      -             -              .  -       49 

Manual  for  Colt's  revolver,         -             -             -  51-55 

To  load  the  repeating  rifle,               -             •-  .57 

To  load  with  powder  and  ball,               .             -  57 

Manual  of  breech-loader,     -             -             -  -       58 

Self-priming  breech-loader,         ...  59 

Inspection  of  revolver  pistol,           -             -  -       60 

Inspection  of  breech-loader,       -             -             -  61 

PART   11— PLATOON  DRILL.  * 

Platoon  in  2  ranks ;  posts,          -             *             -  62-64 

Squadron  in  line ;  posts,        ...  64-65 

Column  of  twos  and  fours,          ...  66-67  « 

Column  of  platoons,                ...  67-68 

Column  of  divisions,       ....  69 

Form  platoon  (company  or  squadron),         -  -      69 

Right  dress  ;  count  by  fours,      -              -             -  70 

Alignment,                  -              -             -             -  -      71 

By  file,  right  backwards  dress,                -             -  72 

By  twos,  right  or  left  dress,               -             -  -       73 

To  correct  the  alignment,           ...  74 


INDEX.  279 

Page. 

To  open  and  close  ranks,            .             -             -  75-76 

To  rein  back,             -              .             -              .  76-77 

To  break  by  files,             ....  77 

To  march  in  column  by  files.           -             -  -       78 

To  change  direction,       -             -              -             -  78 

Halt;  forward  trot;  oblique,             -              -  -       79 

Platoon,  ftont  into  line,                 -             -             -  80 

Left  into  line,            -              -             -              .  -       81 

On  right  into  line.            -              -             -             -  82 

On  left  into  line,       -              -     .        -             -  -       82 

By  twos  (or  fours),           -             -             -             -  83 

Direct  march  by  twos  (or  fours),     -              -  -       84 

Head  of  column  left  (or  right),                 -              -  84 

Left  turn,      -             -             -             .             _  -       85 

Left  (or  right)  oblique,                  -              -              -  86 

Column  of  twos  or  fours,  front  into  line,      -  -       87 

Column  of  twos  or  fours,  left  into  line,               -  88 

Column  of  twos  or  fours,  on  right  into  line  -       89 

Left  into  single  rank,       -              -             -             ,  90 

Right  into  2  ranks,                 -             -             .  -       91 

To  form  twos  or  fours  at  same  gait,       -             -  92 

To  break  by  twos  or  file,  same  gait,            -  -       93 

By  file,  march,                  -             -             -             -  94 

Form  twos — trot,      -             -             .             ,  -       95 

Form  fours — trot,              .              .              .             .  gg 

To  break  by  tw-os  and  by  file,  doubling  gait,  -       97 

March  in  line,   *-              -              .              .             .  98 

"         "      " 99 

Open  files,           -            .             .            .             -  100 

Close  files,                 -             .             .             .  .     101 

Open  and  close  files,  marching,             -             -  102 

Countermarch,           -              ,             -              .  .     103 

Front,  halt,           .....  i04 

Wheelings,                  -              -             .              .  .     i05 

Fixed  pivot,         -             -             .             .             .  106 

In  circle  wheel,        -             -             •             .  .     i07 

"             "                    ....  108 

"  " 109 

"             •'                    ....  110 


280  INDEX. 

Page, 

Platoon  right  (or  left)  wheel,          •             -  -       111 

"         "     about  wheel,        -              -             -  112 

"         "     half  wheel,                  -             -  -       112 

Moveable  pivot,             ....  113 

Left  (or  right)  turn,              -              •              -  -       114 

Individual  oblique,        -              -              -              -  115 

Platoon    marching  in  line,  to  break  by  fours  or 

twos,           -              -              -              -              -  116 
Platoon  marching,  by  twos  or  fours,  form  platoon,       117 

By  fours  (or  twos) — trot,            -              -              -  118 

For  in  platoon — trot,             -              -              -  -       119 

Porm  platoon — gallop,                ...  120 

By  fours,  left  (or  right)  wheel,        -             -  .       120 

By  fours,  h'ft  (or  right)  about  wheel,                  -  121 

Halt,  right  dress,  front,        -              -              .  -        122 

Forward,  guide  right  (or  left),                -              -  122 

To  march  the  column  of  fours  to  the  rear  -       123 

To  gain  ground,  right  or  left,                  -             -  123 

Movements  by  fours,          -             -       ^     -  -       124 

"...             -  125 

To  charge  by  platoon,         ...  -       126 

The  charge,                     ....  127 

Rallying,                   -             -             -              -  -       128 

Skirmishing,                    ....  129-134 

Prepare  to  fight  on  foot,                   -             -  -       1 35 

Dragoons  on  foot,           ....  136 
Sling  and  unsling  carbine,               ...        137 

Leaping  the  diteh  and  bar,       _             -             -  138 

>i            u              u        .            .            .  ,       139 


PART  III.—THE   SQUADRON. 

The  squadron,         ...  -  -  140 

Positions  in  line,  .  .  •  -  141 

Positions  in  column,  twos  or  fours,  -  -  142 

Directions,         -  -  -  -  -  143 

Count  by  fours,        ...  -  -  144 


INDEX.                         ^  281 

Page. 

Successive  alignment,                -             -             -  144 

»                    "                 ....  145 

To  open  and  close  ranks,          -             -             -  146 

To  break  the  squadron  by  fours,  -              -              -  147 

Column  of  fours,  front  into  line,             -              -  148 

"          "      "      on  right  into  line,      -             -  150 

Rapidity  of  gaits,    -----  151 

To  form  in  one  rank  and  two  ranks,    -             -  151 

Column  with  distance,       -              .              -              -  152 

Changes  of  direction,    -             -             -             -  153 

"         "          -'                 .             .             -              -  154 

Left  or  right  oblique,     -             -             -             .  155 

Change  of  gait,       ....              -  155 

In  column  of  platoons,  to  break  by  fours,        -  156 

By  twos;   by  fours;    by  file,            -              -              -  157 

Column  by  file,  form  twos,       -             -             -  158 

Column  by  twos,  form  fours,          .             .             -  159 

Column  by  fours,  form  platoons,           -             -  159 

By  fours — trot,         -              -              -             -              -  160 

Form  twos — trot,            -             -             -             -  161 

Form  fours — trot;   form  platoons — trot,     -              -  162 

Platoons  left-about  wheel,         -              -             -  163 

To  halt  the  column,             ....  164 

Left  into  line  wheel,     ....  165 

Column  with  distance,  left  in  front,           -             -  166 

Break  by  the  right  to  march  to  the  left,             -  167 

Form  line  to  the  right  by  inversion,            -              -  168 

Break  by  the  right  to  the  rear  to  march  to  the  left,  169 

On  right  into  line,                ....  179 

By  inversion  on  left  into  line,  -             -             -  171 

To  break  by  platoons,        -             .              -              -  172 

Front  into  line,               ....  173 

Break  by  platoons  and  move  forward,        -              -  174 

Line  to  the  front  by  inversion,               -              -  175 

Platoons  right  wheel,  head  of  column  left,             -  176 

Line  faced  to  rear  on  rear  of  column,  -             -  177 

Right  about  wheel,  by  inversion  front  into  line,  -  178 

Platoons  right  wheel,  head  of  column  right,  -  179 


282  INDEX. 

Page. 

Line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  head  of  coluinn,     -  179 

Line  faced  to  rear,  by  inversion  on  head  of  cohmin,  180 

Movements  by  fours,    -             -              -              .  181 

"              "        "                ....  182 

Direct  march  in  line,    ....  I83 

"         »         "     "               .              -             .              .  184 

"         "         "     "         -             -              .              -  185 

Flank  files  forward ;    halt,              ...  i8q 

Squadron  forward  ;  march,       -             -              -  I §6 

Squadron,  halt,        .....  187 

Countermarch,  -             .              .             -              .  189 

Wheelings,               .....  i9o 

Fixed  pivot;    wheeling  in  circle,         -              -  l9l 

Riglit  or  left;    right  about  or  left  about,  wheel,    -  193 

Moveable  pivot,  turning,           -              -              -  194 

Kight  oblique,         -             -             -              -             -  195 

Platoons  right  half  (  and  left  half)  wheels       -  196 

By  fours  right  wheel,          ....  197 

By  fours  left  wheel,      ....  198 

By  iburs  right  about  wheel,             -              -              -  199 

Platoons  left  wheel,      ....  200 

Platoons  right  about,           ....  2OI 

Break  by  platoons,  marching,  .             -             -  202 

Form  squadron,      .....  202 

Break  by  platoons,  doubling  the  gait,  -              -  203 

Form  squadron — trot,          ....  204 

Passing  obstacles,         ....  205 

In  each  platoon  by  fours  or  twos — trot,    -              -  206 

Form  platoons,               ....  207 

Charge — rallying — skirmishing,     -              -              -  208 

Charge,              .....  209 

To  the  charge,  march,        -              -              -              -  211 

As  foragers,       -              -             -             -              -  212 

Rallying,     -              •              -              -              .              -  213 

Skirmishing,       -              -              -              -              .  214 

Whole  squadron  as  skirmishers,    -              -             -  215 

Three  first  platoons  as  skirmishers,     -              -  216 

One  division  as  skirmishers,           ...  217 

1st  or  4th  platoon  prepare  to  fight  on  foot,       -  218 


INDEX.  283 

Pag«. 

1st  or  2d  division  prepare  to  fight  on  foot,  219 

Column  by  divisions,           .              -             .  .       220 

Form  divisions,               .....  021 

Column  by  divisions,  by  platoons  march,  -       222 

Form  divisions — trot,    -              -              .              -  223 

By  platoons — trot,  -              -              -              -  .       224 

Divisions,  break  by  right  to  march  to  left,        -  225 

Squadron  of  64  files,           -              -              -  226-227 

PART  IV.—SINGLE  RANKS. 

Single  rank  formations,      .             .             .  ,       22'8 

Positions,            .....  229 

5n  one  rank  form  squadron,            -             -  230 

Count  by  fours;    prepare  to  mount,      -             -  231 

By  files  to  the  right,             .              -              .  ,       231 

Side  of  the  guides.        .             .             -             ..  232 

Front,  halt,               >             ,             -             -  -       233 


DRILL  OF  xMOUNTED   RIFLES.      235 

Article   i. 

Section, 
Composition  of  company  and  posts,  etc,     -  -  i 

To  mount,  -  ■  -  -  2 

To  dismount  and  to  link,      .  .  -  .3 

Form  and  course  of  inspection,  -  •  4 

Article   II, 

Skirmish  drill ;  preliminary  remarks,  6 
To  take  open  order  vind  return  to  close  order  (in 

line,)  .....  6 

Open  order  in  line — to  break  into  fours,  twos,  and 

files,       -..-..  7 

in  column  of  file  to  form  twos,  open  order,     ,  S 

In  column  of  file  to  form  fours,  open  order,  9 


284  INDEX. 

Section. 
In.  column  of  twos,  open  order,  to  form  fours,  open 

order,  -  .  -  -  -  10 
In    column  of  fours   to   form   twos,   open  or  close 

order,           -              -             -              -              -  11 

In  column  of  twos  to  form  files,  open  or  close  order,  12 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  line,          -             -  13 

Article  III. 

In   open  order  column  of  fours ;    action  front  and 

■  left,              .....  14 

In  open  order  column  of  fours  ;   action  rear  and  left,  15 

In  open  order  column  of  fours;    action  right,            -  16 

In  open  order  column  of  fours  ;    action  left,      -  17 

In  open  order  column  of  twos  ;  action  front  and  left,  18 

In  open  order  column  of  twos;  action  rear  and  left,  19 

In  open  order  column  of  twos  ;  action  right,             ■  20 

In  open  order  column  of  twos ;  action  left,         -  21 

Article  IV. 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  when  dismounted,             -  22 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers  from  column  of  fours,  23 

After  deploying  as  skirmishers  to  commence  action,  24 

Column  of  fours  open  order  to  return  to  close  order,  25 

Column  of  twos  open  order  to  return  to  close  order,  26 

Column  of  file  to  form  fours  in  close  order^         -  27 

Article  V. 

Changes  of  the  Manual. 

To  sling  and  unsiing  rifles,   -             -             -             -  28 
Concluding  remarks,         -             -             -             ,29 


«» 


